Project Design
A. To reinforce the historic storefront character of downtown Anacortes.
B. To enhance the pedestrian environment in commercial and multifamily areas throughout Anacortes.
This section provides direction for the design of buildings consistent with the goals and policies of the Anacortes comprehensive plan. See the individual “purpose” statements for each section in this chapter.
The purpose of this chapter is to:
A. Provide for adequate, convenient, and safe parking for cars and bicycles for all uses allowed in this code in all areas of the city.
Landscaping is necessary to provide a well-balanced, aesthetically pleasing environment for the residents of Anacortes. Specifically, these requirements are intended to accomplish the following:
A. Maintain and enhance property values.
A. Applicability. This chapter applies to all signs erected or altered after the effective date of the ordinance codified in this chapter, except for those signs provided in subsection C of this section.
B. Interpretation.
1. This chapter is not intended to, and does not, restrict speech on the basis of its content, viewpoint, or message.
A. Except as otherwise provided herein, the placement of any wireless service facility at any location within the city is subject to the provisions of this chapter.
B. The standards and process requirements of this chapter supersede all other review process and approval criteria, setback, height or landscaping requirements of this title.
A. Noise levels are not to exceed those standards as established by the state pursuant to Chapter 70.107 RCW, and contained in Chapter 173-60 Washington Administrative Code (WAC).
B. The following sections of Chapter 173-60 of the Washington Administrative Code as they now exist or may hereafter be amended or recodified are hereby adopted by reference as a part of the Anacortes Municipal Code which is established in all respects as though such sections were set forth herein in full; and further provided, the inclusion of section captions is for convenience in identifying the subject of code sections only, and any error therein must not affect the validity of the adoption by reference of the section so adopted:
This division is authorized by the City Council as a major implementation tool of the Anacortes comprehensive plan. Overall, this division intends to:
A. Provide clear objectives for the planning and design of development projects in Anacortes.
B. Preserve and protect the public health, safety, and welfare of the citizens of Anacortes.
C. Promote and accomplish the goals, policies, and objectives of the Anacortes comprehensive plan.
D. Preserve and enhance the historic resources and character of the central business district.
E. Ensure that new multifamily, mixed-use, and commercial development is of high quality and appropriate to Anacortes’s character and context.
F. Promote increased pedestrian, bicycling, and transit use in commercial and multifamily areas.
G. Enhance the livability of residential developments.
H. Enhance the public’s physical and visual access to the water.
I. Increase awareness of design considerations among the citizens of Anacortes.
J. Maintain and enhance property values within Anacortes. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. The project design provisions in this division generally apply to all development within the city, including, but not limited to, building additions, site improvements, and new signage. However, since each chapter addresses different design and development elements, the applicability of each chapter is clarified at the beginning of the chapter.
B. Relationship to Other Codes and Documents. Where provisions of this division conflict with provisions in any other section of the AMC, this division prevails unless otherwise noted.
C. For building additions, remodels, and site improvements, three different thresholds have been established to determine how the standards herein are applied to such projects. See Figure 19.60.020 for examples of site development and the respective types of improvements required under each of the three levels of improvements.
1. Level I improvements include all exterior remodels, building additions, and/or site improvements that affect the exterior appearance of the building/site and/or cumulatively increase the gross floor area on a site less than 50 percent within three years of the date of permit issuance. The requirement for such improvements is only that the proposed improvements meet the standards and do not lead to further nonconformance with the standards.
For example, if a property owner decides to replace a building facade’s siding, then the siding must meet the applicable exterior building material standards, but elements such as building articulation would not be required.
2. Level II improvements include all improvements that cumulatively increase the gross floor area on a site by 50 to 100 percent, within three years of the date of permit issuance. All standards that do not involve repositioning the building or reconfiguring site development must apply to Level II improvements.
For example, if a property owner of an existing home in the CBD zone wants to convert the home to a retail use and build an addition equaling 75 percent of the current building’s footprint, then the following elements must apply:
a. The location and design of the addition/remodel must be consistent with AMC Chapter 19.61, Block Frontage Standards, which addresses building frontages, entries, parking lot location, and street setback landscaping. For such developments seeking additions to buildings where off-street parking location currently does not comply with applicable parking location standards, building additions are allowed, provided they do not increase any current nonconformity and generally bring the project closer into conformance with the standards (see AMC Chapter 19.64, Parking).
b. Comply with the standards of AMC Chapter 19.62, Site Planning.
c. Comply with all provisions of AMC Chapter 19.63, Building Design, except architectural scale and materials provisions related to the existing portion of the building where no exterior changes are proposed. All new exterior wall areas must comply with building elements/details, materials, and blank wall treatment standards.
d. Comply with the off-street parking, landscaping, and signage provisions of this division that relate to proposed improvements.
3. Level III improvements include all improvements that cumulatively increase the gross floor area on a site by more than 100 percent within three years of the date of permit issuance. Such developments must conform to all applicable standards, except in a case where there are multiple buildings on one site, and only one building is being enlarged. In that scenario, improvements to the additional buildings are not required, but conformance with all other standards apply.
Figure 19.60.020
Examples of improvement types and required compliance.
![]() |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Most sections within the chapters herein include the following elements:
A. Purpose statements, which are overarching objectives.
B. Standards use words such as “must” and “is/are required,” signifying required actions.
C. Guidelines use words such as “should” or “is/are recommended,” signifying voluntary measures.
D. Departures are provided for specific standards. They allow alternative designs, provided the reviewing authority determines the design meets the purpose of the standards and guidelines and other applicable criteria. See AMC 19.20.220 for related procedures associated with departures.
E. This division contains some specific standards that are easily quantifiable, while others provide a level of discretion in how they are complied with. In the latter case, the applicant must demonstrate to the Director, in writing, how the project meets the purpose of the standard or standards. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. To reinforce the historic storefront character of downtown Anacortes.
B. To enhance the pedestrian environment in commercial and multifamily areas throughout Anacortes.
C. To minimize potential negative impacts of parking lots and garages on the streetscape.
D. To promote good visibility between buildings and the street for security for pedestrians and to create a more welcoming and interesting streetscape. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. The provisions of this chapter apply to all nonresidential and multifamily development. The following are exempt:
1. All development in the I, LM, AZ, and CM2 zones.
2. Development in the HM and LM1 zones not abutting State Route 20 right-of-way.
3. Development in the MS zone except for applicable block frontages designated storefront, landscaped, or mixed as established in AMC 19.61.040. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Site orientation standards for individual properties depend on the block frontage designated for that location. The following steps will help in using this chapter:
A. Go to the maps in AMC 19.61.040 to find the property and the block frontage type designation.
1. For multifamily and nonresidential development in residential zones, the standards for landscaped block frontages apply.
2. For development that fronts onto multiple streets, see provisions in AMC 19.61.150.
B. Go to the appropriate code section in this chapter for the site orientation standards for applicable block frontage type designation. Table 19.61.030 includes a summary of key block frontage types.
Table 19.61.030
Summary of key block frontage types.
Permitted Frontage | Parking Location | Details | |
![]() | ![]() | • No new parking adjacent to the street. • Special transparency, weather protection, and entry requirements. • Minimum commercial space height and depth. • No ground floor residential uses except lobbies for upper-level units. | |
Mixed | 🡹 Storefront or landscape frontages allowed 🡻 | ![]() | • Parking must be to the side or rear of buildings. For multi-building developments, no more than 50% of frontage may be parking. • Landscaping to soften facades of non-storefronts and buffer parking areas. • Minimum facade transparency requirements per use and setback. |
Marine | Parking placed to the side or rear of buildings is preferred, but may be placed in front of buildings for certain uses and/or in exchange for improved public waterfront access. | • Landscaping to soften facades of non-storefronts and buffer parking areas. • Minimum facade transparency requirements per use and setback. | |
![]() | ![]() | • Landscaping to soften facades and buffer parking areas. • Parking must be to the side or rear of buildings. For multi-building developments, no more than 50% of frontage may be parking. | |
Undesignated | Storefront or landscape frontages allowed but not required | No parking lot location restrictions | • Landscaping to soften facades and buffer parking areas. • Minimum facade transparency requirements per use and setback. |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. The block frontage designations established by this title are maintained under the direction of the Director. All notations, references, and other information shown have the same force and effect as if fully described in this title.
B. At the direction of the City Council, the Director is authorized to revise the block frontage designation maps. No unauthorized person may alter or modify the block frontage designation maps.
C. The Director must revise the block frontage designation maps to correspond with any changes made through an approved framework development plan (see AMC 19.61.180).
D. The Department must maintain digital or printed copies of the block frontage designation maps and maintain records of superseded official maps.
Figure 19.61.040(A)
Anacortes block frontage designations maps index.
![]() |
Figure 19.61.040(B)
Map 1: Anacortes block frontage designations map for the downtown area.
![]() |
Figure 19.61.040(C)
Map 2: Block frontage designations map for central Commercial Avenue and central waterfront.
![]() |
Figure 19.61.040(D)
Map 3: Block frontage designations map for the south Commercial Avenue area.
![]() |
Figure 19.61.040(E)
Map 4: Block frontage designations map for the Skyline area.
![]() |
Figure 19.61.040(F)
Map 5: Block frontage designations map for the March Point area.
![]() |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
All block frontage designations contain distinct minimum facade transparency standards. The purposes of these standards are to maintain “eyes on the street” for safety and to create a welcoming pedestrian environment. Table 19.61.050 below includes details in how they are measured.
Table 19.61.050
Clarification of transparency standards
Transparency zones | ||
![]() The transparency zone is on the ground floor between 30'' and 10' above sidewalk grade | ![]() The transparency zone is between 30'' and 8' above grade | ![]() All vertical surfaces of the facade are used in the calculations |
Other transparency provisions | ||
Windows must be transparent Ground level window area for storefronts and other nonresidential uses that is covered, frosted, or perforated in any manner that obscures visibility into the building must not count as transparent window area. Exception: Window signs conforming with AMC 19.67.090(E) may be counted as transparent window area, provided the areas generally around the sign are transparent. | ![]() | |
Display windows Display windows may be used for up to 50% of nonresidential transparency requirements, provided they are at least 30'' deep to allow changeable displays and the interior wall is nonstructural so it can be removed if the windows are not used for display. Tack-on display cases as shown in the far right example do not qualify as transparent window area. | ![]() | |
Other transparency provisions | ||
Structured parking facilities Where structured parking facilities occupy a portion of the facade, any openings simulating windows may be used to help comply with transparency requirements. | ![]() | |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose. Storefront block frontages are the most vibrant and active shopping and dining areas within Anacortes. Blocks designated as storefront block frontages include continuous storefronts placed along the sidewalk edge with small-scale shops and many business entries.
Figure 19.61.060(A)
Storefront vision and key standards.
![]() |
B. Standards. All development on sites with a storefront block frontage designation must comply with the standards in Table 19.61.060(B) below:
Table 19.61.060(B)
Storefront block frontage standards.
The ⮊ symbol refers to DEPARTURE opportunities in subsection (C) below. | ||
Element | Standards | Examples and Notes |
Ground level Land use | Nonresidential uses specified in Table 19.41.050 are required except for lobbies associated with residential or hotel/motel uses on upper floors. | |
Floor-to-ceiling height | 13' minimum (applies to new buildings only) | |
Retail space depth | 50' minimum on Commercial Avenue in the CBD zone and 20' minimum elsewhere (applies to new buildings only) ⮊ | |
Building placement | Buildings must be placed at the street property line/back edge of the sidewalk. Additional setbacks are allowed for a widened sidewalk or pedestrian-oriented space (AMC 19.62.040(D)). | ![]() Corner building example |
Building entrances | Primary building entrances must face the street. For corner buildings, primary entrances may face the street corner. | |
Facade transparency | At least 70% of the transparency zone. ⮊ | |
Weather protection | Weather protection over the sidewalk is required along at least 75% of the storefront facade, and it must be a minimum of 6' deep and have 8' to 15' of vertical clearance. ⮊ Weather protection must not interfere with street trees, street lights, street signs, or extend beyond the edge of the sidewalk. | ![]() |
Parking location and vehicle access | New surface parking adjacent to the street is prohibited. ⮊ Vehicular access for surface or structured parking from a storefront street is prohibited if there is access available from another street or alley. ⮊ | ![]() |
Sidewalk width | 12' minimum between the curb edge and the storefront facade (including clear/buffer zone with street trees). ⮊ Setbacks and utility easements must also be considered and may result in a larger minimum sidewalk width. | ![]() |
C. DEPARTURE Criteria. Departures from the standards in Table 19.61.060(B) that feature the ⮊ symbol will be considered per AMC 19.20.220, provided the alternative proposal meets the purpose of the standards and the following criteria:
1. Retail Space Depth. Departures from this standard are not allowed in the CBD zone. Elsewhere, reduced depths will be considered where the applicant can successfully demonstrate the proposed alternative design and configuration of the space is viable for a variety of permitted retail uses.
2. Facade Transparency. Facade transparency in the transparency zone may be a minimum of 40 percent if the facade design between ground-level windows provides visual interest to the pedestrian and mitigates the impacts of blank walls.
3. Weather Protection. Other proposed alternative design treatments must provide equivalent weather protection benefits.
4. Parking Location. Departures from this standard are not allowed in the CBD zone. Elsewhere, there must be an acceptable tradeoff in terms of the amount and quality of storefront area that is integrated with the development and the applicable parking location departure. In addition, the alternative must include design features to successfully mitigate the visual impact of additional parking areas along designated storefront streets.
5. Sidewalk Width. Alternative designs may be considered where topographical challenges or approved city streetscape plans with different sidewalk standards exist. Alternative designs must be able to accommodate safe and comfortable pedestrian traffic anticipated for full block development. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose. Landscaped block frontages emphasize landscaped street setbacks, clear pedestrian connections between the building and the sidewalk, and minimized surface parking lots along the frontages.
Figure 19.61.070(A)
Landscaped frontage vision and key standards.
![]() |
B. Standards. All development on sites containing a landscaped block frontage designation must comply with the standards in Table 19.61.070(B) below. The standards herein also apply to all multifamily and nonresidential development in residential zones:
Table 19.61.070(B)
Landscaped block frontage standards.
The ⮊ symbol refers to DEPARTURE opportunities in subsection (C) below. | ||
Element | Standards | Examples and Notes |
Ground level Land use | ![]() Landscaped frontage example meeting setback, entry, weather protection, and transparency standards. | |
Building placement | 10' minimum setbacks are required, or greater where specified for the applicable zone in AMC Chapter 19.42, Form and Intensity Standards. | |
Building entrances | At least one building entry must be visible from the sidewalk. ⮊ | |
Facade transparency | For buildings with ground level nonresidential uses, at least 25% of the transparency zone. ⮊ For buildings with ground level residential uses, at least 15% of the transparency zone. ⮊ | |
Weather protection | Weather protection at least three feet deep must be provided over all primary entries. | |
Parking location and vehicle access | Parking must be located to the side or rear of buildings. For multi-building developments, no more than 50% of the lot frontage can be occupied by off-street parking and driveways. ⮊ Vehicular access must comply with the provisions of AMC 19.53.030. Any parking lots developed adjacent to the street must comply with landscaping provisions of AMC 19.65.070. | ![]() |
![]() | ||
Landscaping | All areas between the sidewalk and the building must be landscaped, except for pathways, porches, decks, and other areas meeting the definition of pedestrian-oriented space (AMC 19.62.040(D)). Landscaped areas must contain Types B, C, or D landscaping (as defined in AMC 19.65.060) and may incorporate rain gardens and other forms of stormwater management. See AMC Chapter 19.65 for other landscaping standards. | ![]() |
Sidewalk width | ||
C. DEPARTURE Criteria. Departures to the landscaped block frontage standards in Table 19.61.070(B) that feature the ⮊ symbol will be considered per AMC 19.20.220, provided the alternative proposal meets the purpose of the standards and the following criteria:
1. Building Entrances. Block frontages with environmental constraints and/or those facing busy arterial streets and minor pedestrian traffic may warrant some flexibility to this standard (particularly in residential zones).
2. Facade Transparency. Facade transparency in the transparency zone may be reduced from the minimum by 50 percent if the facade design between ground level windows provides visual interest to the pedestrian and mitigates the impacts of blank walls.
3. Parking Location. Corner lots and unusual lot shapes warrant some flexibility to the standards herein, provided design treatments are included that minimize visual impacts of parking areas on the streetscape. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose. Mixed block frontages allow for general flexibility where either a storefront orientation or a landscaped orientation in a pedestrian-friendly configuration could be developed.
Figure 19.61.080(A)
Mixed frontage vision and key standards.
![]() | OR | ![]() |
B. Standards. Development must conform to either storefront or landscaped block frontage standards and associated departure options and departure criteria as established above, with only the following modifications in Table 19.61.080(B) below:
Table 19.61.080(B)
Mixed block frontage standards.
The ⮊ symbol refers to DEPARTURE opportunities in subsection (C) below. | ||
Element | Standards | Examples and Notes |
Building placement | Buildings may be placed up to the sidewalk edge, provided they meet storefront block frontage standards in AMC 19.61.060 (this includes standards for ground level, building placement, building entrances, facade transparency, and weather protection elements). The minimum setback for buildings that do not meet applicable storefront block frontage standards is 10' or greater where specified for the applicable zone in AMC Chapter 19.42, Form and Intensity Standards. ⮊ | |
Facade transparency | Storefront buildings are subject to storefront block frontage transparency standards above. For other building frontages, transparent windows must be provided along at least 15% of the building facade, plus: • Buildings designed with ground floor nonresidential uses within 10' of sidewalk must feature at least 40% transparency within the transparency zone. ⮊ • Buildings designed with ground floor nonresidential uses within 20' of sidewalk must feature at least 25% transparency within the transparency zone. ⮊ | ![]() This office building (within 10' of sidewalk) would need at least 40% transparency within the 30'' to 8' transparency zone. |
C. DEPARTURE Criteria. Departures to the mixed block frontage standards in Table 19.61.080(B) that feature the ⮊ symbol will be considered per AMC 19.20.220, provided the alternative proposal meets the purpose of the standards and the following criteria:
1. Building Placement. Provide design treatments that create an effective transition between the public and private realm. For example, a stoop design or other similar treatments that utilize a low fence or retaining wall and/or hedge along the sidewalk may provide an effective transition (see Figure 19.61.080(C) for examples).
2. Facade Transparency. Facade transparency in the transparency zone may be reduced from the minimum by 50 percent if the facade design between ground level windows provides visual interest to the pedestrian and mitigates the impacts of blank walls.
Figure 19.61.080(C)
Acceptable examples of possible setback departures.
![]() The landscaped and stoop frontages above are possible departure examples with reduced setbacks for non-storefront facades. The combination of landscaping elements, facade transparency, low fencing, and facade materials and detailing help to create an effective transition between the public and private realm. |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose. Marine block frontages allow for general flexibility where either a storefront orientation or a landscaped orientation, similar to the mixed block frontage designation, could be developed. However, the marine designation offers greater flexibility in building and parking lot configuration based on the site’s context and proposed use via departure.
B. Standards. Development must conform to either storefront or landscaped block frontage standards and associated departure options and departure criteria as established above, with only the following modifications in Table 19.61.090(B) below:
Table 19.61.090(B)
Marine block frontage standards.
The ⮊ symbol refers to DEPARTURE opportunities in subsection (C) below. | ||
Element | Standards | Examples and Notes |
Building placement | Buildings may be placed up to the sidewalk edge, provided they meet storefront block frontage standards in AMC 19.61.060 (this includes standards for ground level, building placement, building entrances, facade transparency, and weather protection elements). The minimum setback for buildings that do not meet applicable storefront block frontage standards is 10' or greater where specified for the applicable zone in AMC Chapter 19.42, Form and Intensity Standards. ⮊ | ![]() Storefront example. |
Facade transparency | Storefront buildings are subject to storefront block frontage transparency standards above. For other building frontages, transparent windows must be provided along at least 15% of the facade, plus: • Buildings designed with ground floor nonresidential uses within 10' of sidewalk must feature at least 40% transparency within the transparency zone. ⮊ • Buildings designed with ground floor nonresidential uses within 20' of sidewalk must feature at least 25% transparency within the transparency zone. ⮊ | ![]() Generous ground level transparency example with modest landscaped setback. |
Parking location and vehicle access | Developments are subject to storefront or landscaped block frontage parking location standards, depending on the chosen frontage type. ⮊ Vehicular access must comply with the provisions of AMC 19.53.030. | The unique nature of these marine-oriented sites and uses often require some flexibility in building and parking area locations. |
C. DEPARTURE Criteria. Departures to the marine block frontage standards in Table 19.61.090(B) that feature the ⮊ symbol will be considered per AMC 19.20.220, provided the alternative proposal meets the purpose of the standards and the following criteria:
1. Building Placement. Provide design treatments that create an effective transition between the public and private realm. For example, a stoop design or other similar treatments that utilize a low fence or retaining wall and/or hedge along the sidewalk may provide an effective transition (see Figure 19.61.080(C) for examples).
2. Facade Transparency. Facade transparency in the transparency zone may be reduced from the minimum by 50 percent if the facade design between ground level windows provides visual interest to the pedestrian and mitigates the impacts of blank walls.
3. Parking Location. Parking areas may be located in the front where design measures are included (above and beyond base standards) to mitigate visual impacts of parking areas along the street and where it can be demonstrated that there is an acceptable tradeoff of public benefits associated with the proposed building and parking lot location. Examples include distinctive landscape design integrating a decorative low fence or trellis. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose. Gateway block frontage designations serve strategic areas along properties fronted by State Route 20 where there is a desire to provide attractive landscaped development frontages.
B. Standards. All development on sites containing a gateway block frontage designation must comply with the standards in Table 19.61.100(B) below:
Table 19.61.100(B)
Gateway block frontage standards.
The ⮊ symbol refers to DEPARTURE opportunities in subsection (C) below. | ||
Element | Standards | |
Building placement | 10' minimum street setbacks for buildings complying with facade transparency standards; 25' for all other buildings. | |
Facade transparency | For all buildings with less than 25' setback, transparent window area must be provided along at least 15% of the facade of the building. Marijuana uses and adult concession uses are exempt from this requirement. ⮊ | |
Parking and outdoor storage location | Parking lots and outdoor storage areas must be set back at least 10' from the gateway block frontage property line and screened with Type A, B, or C landscaping as defined in AMC 19.65.060. Any parking lots developed adjacent to the street must comply with landscaping provisions of AMC 19.65.070. | |
Landscaping | All areas between the property line and any building, parking, or storage area must be landscaped, except for pathways, porches, decks, and other areas meeting the definition of pedestrian-oriented space (AMC 19.63.040(D)). | |
Fencing | Landscaped screening is required (⮊) for chain-link and other similar metal fencing and opaque fences: • For fences less than 4-1/2' tall, at least 5' of Type A, B, or C landscaping (see AMC 19.65.060) is required in front of the fence. • For fences 4-1/2' or taller, at least 10' of Type A or B landscaping (see AMC 19.65.060) is required in front of the fence. No landscape screening is required for split rail or similar low decorative fencing, or a decorative wall (brick, stone, or similar) up to 4-1/2' tall. | |
![]() | Gateway frontage example with split rail fence, landscaping (shrubs behind fence) and facade meeting the modest transparency standards. | |
C. DEPARTURE Criteria. Departures to the landscaped block frontage standards in Table 19.61.100(B) that feature the ⮊ symbol will be considered per AMC 19.20.220, provided the alternative proposal meets the purpose of the standards and the following criteria:
1. Facade Transparency. Facade transparency in the transparency zone may be reduced from the minimum by 50 percent if the facade design between ground level windows provides visual interest to the pedestrian and mitigates the impacts of blank walls.
2. Fence Screening. Reduced landscaping screening is allowed where some combination of the type and design of reduced landscaping and/or the enhanced design of fencing reduces the visual impact of the fencing on the gateway corridor environment. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose. Undesignated block frontages should provide visual interest at all observable scales and meet the design objectives of the city.
B. Applicability. All undesignated block frontages in nonresidential zones that are not designated are subject to the standards of this section. These block frontages are provided greater flexibility with regard to the design of multifamily and nonresidential development frontages.
These block frontages include a combination of side streets (where most uses often front on other adjacent streets) and service oriented streets (often characterized by industrial or service types of uses), and heavy arterial streets. While there is greater flexibility in the amount of transparency of facades and the location of surface and structured parking, design parameters are included to ensure that landscaping and other design elements help to mitigate the potential impacts of parking lots and blank walls along these streets.
DEPARTURES will be considered pursuant to AMC 19.20.220.
C. Standards. Undesignated block frontages must comply with the standards in Table 19.61.110(C) below.
Table 19.61.110(C)
Undesignated block frontage standards.
The ⮊ symbol refers to DEPARTURE opportunities in subsection (D) below. | |
Element | Standards |
Building placement | Where allowed in the applicable zone (see AMC 19.42.030), buildings may be placed up to the sidewalk edge, provided they meet storefront block standards in AMC 19.61.060 (this includes standards for ground level, building placement, building entrances, facade transparency, and weather protection elements). Otherwise, 10' minimum street setback except where greater setbacks are required by the zone (see AMC Chapter 19.42, Form and Intensity Standards). |
Building entrances | Building entrances facing the street are encouraged. At a minimum, at least one building entry visible and directly accessible from the street is required. Where buildings are set back from the street, pedestrian connections are required from the sidewalk. |
Facade transparency | • For storefront buildings, see AMC 19.61.060(B) for transparency standards. • For other buildings within 10' of sidewalk, at least 30% of the transparency zone. ⮊ • For buildings set back more than 10' from the sidewalk, at least 10% of the entire facade must be transparent. ⮊ |
Weather protection | At least 3' deep over primary business and residential entries. |
Parking location and vehicle access | There are no parking lot location restrictions, except for required landscaping buffers in AMC 19.65.070. |
Landscaping | • The area between the street and any non-storefront building must be landscaped and/or private porch or patio space. • For setbacks adjacent to buildings with windows, provide low level landscaping that maintains views between the building and the street. • See AMC Chapter 19.65 for other landscaping standards. |
Sidewalk width | Where storefront buildings are proposed, sidewalks must meet storefront block frontage standards in AMC 19.61.060. Otherwise, see AMC 19.52.040, Street geometric design and streetscapes, for applicable sidewalk widths. |
D. DEPARTURE Criteria. Departures to the undesignated block frontage standards in Table 19.61.110(C) that feature the ⮊ symbol will be considered per AMC 19.20.220, provided the alternative proposal meets the purpose of the standards and the following criteria:
1. Facade Transparency. Reduced transparency is allowed where the design treatment of applicable landscaping and/or facade provide visual interest to the pedestrian and mitigates impacts of any blank wall areas. Up to a 50 percent reduction in the minimum amount of window transparency may be approved via departure. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Trails referenced in the block frontage designation maps in AMC 19.61.040 aligned adjacent to a street are subject to the applicable block frontage designation for the street. For trails referenced in the block frontage designation maps in AMC 19.61.040 that are not adjacent to streets, developments fronting such trails must comply with the undesignated block frontage standards in AMC 19.61.110.
Exception: Developments in the CM2, HM, and I zones are exempt from the building entrance and transparency standards. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose. Esplanade block frontages emphasize lively waterfront spaces that feature a combination of commercial storefronts and attractive landscaped frontages that orient towards the water.
B. Standards. Esplanade block frontages are subject to the mixed block frontage standards in AMC 19.61.080. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose. These corridors are intended to enhance pedestrian access in the area and strengthen the physical and visual connection to the water.
B. Standards. The CW corridors must be at least 20 feet wide and are subject to the mixed block frontage standards in AMC 19.61.080. Where buildings employ the landscaped block frontage design, the minimum building setbacks may be reduced, provided the design meets the purposes of the standards and all other applicable design standards. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Where a property fronts onto more than one street, each building frontage must comply with the standards for the block frontage upon which it fronts, with the following clarifications:
A. Where a conflict exists between frontage standards, the Director will apply the standards of a block frontage pursuant to the following order of preference:
1. Storefront;
2. Mixed;
3. Landscaped; then
4. Undesignated.
Subsections (B) through (E) below clarify how the order of preference works for particular frontage elements.
B. Building Location. For corner sites with landscaped block frontage on one street and storefront or mixed on another, a storefront frontage may wrap around the corner (on the landscaped block frontage side) for up to a half block or 120 feet (whichever is more).
C. Entrances. For corner sites, entrances on both streets are encouraged, but only one entrance is required. For corner sites with frontage on a storefront block frontage on one side, an entrance must be placed on the storefront block frontage side. For corner sites with a mix of designations that do not include a storefront block frontage, the entry must be placed on the order of preference identified above.
DEPARTURES may be considered, provided the location and design of the entry and block frontage treatments are compatible with the character of the area and enhance the character of the street.
D. Transparency. For corner sites—at least one block frontage must meet the applicable transparency standards (based on the order of preference above). For the second block frontage, the Director may approve a reduction in the minimum amount of transparency by 50 percent. For street corners with the same designations on both frontages, buildings must employ the full transparency on the dominant frontage (based on the frontage width or established neighborhood pattern).
E. Parking. Surface parking (including ground floor parking in a structure) adjacent to a street corner is not allowed, except:
1. Corner lots with undesignated frontages on both streets;
2. Other combination of block frontages, except those with a storefront block frontage designation, via a DEPARTURE and subject to the applicable departure criteria.
Figure 19.61.150
Clarifying block frontage standards on street corners.
![]() |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Where an individual property has a frontage with multiple block frontage designations, the following standards apply:
A. Storefront and any other block frontage designation: Storefront block frontage designation applies.
B. Mixed and landscaped block frontage designation: Mixed block frontage designation applies.
C. Landscaped and undesignated block frontage designation: Landscaped block frontage designation applies. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Description/Purpose. The high-visibility street corner requirements apply to those sites designated as such on the block frontage designation maps in AMC 19.61.040. The purpose is to accentuate designated street corners with high visibility to the public.
B. Standards. Sites located on high-visibility street corners must meet the following requirements:
1. The maximum building setback from the street corner (measured from the right-of-way edge at the corner) is 20 feet, except where a corner plaza (meeting the pedestrian-oriented space provisions of AMC 19.62.040(D)) or other decorative landscaping design meets the purpose of the standards.
2. At least one of the following special features must be included (Figure 19.61.170 below illustrates acceptable examples):
a. Corner plaza.
b. Cropped building corner with a special entry feature.
c. Decorative use of building materials at the corner.
d. Distinctive facade articulation.
e. Sculptural architectural element.
f. Other decorative elements that meet the purpose of the standards.
Figure 19.61.170
Acceptable high visibility street corner examples.
![]() Building 1 includes a corner tower. Building 2 features cropped building corners with decorative elements. Building 3 uses a decorative canopy. Building 4 uses a change in building materials and facade articulation at the corner. Building 5 incorporates a plaza at the corner. Image 6 shows a decorative landscaped area with a trellis and neighborhood gateway sign. |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Recently annexed or rezoned industrial or mixed-use properties along with strategic large sites necessitate a different approach to applying block frontage standards. The provisions below identify the purpose, applicable sites, block frontage designation options, and special standards for developing framework development plans.
A. Purpose.
1. To provide a thoughtful and fair process to plan for the development of large and new commercial and mixed-use sites in Anacortes consistent with the goals and policies of the comprehensive plan.
2. To promote the arrangement of streets, buildings, open space, parking and service areas that creates a strong sense of community and enhances the character of Anacortes.
3. To avoid uncoordinated patterns of development that waste valuable land, compromise vehicular and pedestrian access, and degrade the character of Anacortes.
B. Applicable Sites.
1. Sites shown in Figure 19.61.040(C).
2. Sites annexed after adoption of this section as a mixed-use or industrial zone and which are not addressed in the block frontage maps in this chapter.
3. Sites rezoned after adoption of this section to a mixed-use or industrial zone and which are not addressed in the block frontage maps in this chapter.
C. Block Frontage Designations Standards and Options.
1. Prior to site development of applicable sites, a framework development plan must be developed, approved and recorded for the property per the procedures in AMC 19.20.030 and 19.20.230. The plan must include:
a. New streets and internal roadways along with block frontage designations (types included in this section).
b. Any designated high-visibility street corners.
2. Framework development plans may utilize any existing block frontage designations within or bordering the site, or include an alternative block frontage designation type or types, subject to framework development plan approval.
3. Alternatively, site plan development may occur on applicable sites without an approved and recorded framework development plan, provided all block frontages comply with the designations shown on Figure 19.61.040(C) or the standards for mixed block frontages in AMC 19.61.080.
D. Approval Criteria. See AMC 19.20.230(E). (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. To promote thoughtful layout of buildings, parking areas, and circulation, service, landscaping, and amenity elements.
B. Enhance Anacortes’s visual character.
C. Promote compatibility between developments and uses.
D. Enhance the function of developments.
E. Meet stormwater infiltration requirements when feasible. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. The provisions of this chapter apply to all nonresidential and multifamily development. The following are exempt:
1. All development in the I, LM, AZ, CM2, and MS zones.
2. Developments in the HM and LM1 zones when not abutting State Route 20 right-of-way.
B. For clarification on the relationship between the provisions in this division and other documents and codes, see AMC 19.60.020(B).
C. For the application of building additions and remodels and site improvements, see AMC 19.60.020(C).
D. For clarification on how the provisions of this division are applied, see AMC 19.60.030. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To promote the functional and visual compatibility between developments.
2. To protect the privacy of residents on adjacent properties.
B. Balconies near Side and Rear Property Lines Adjacent to Property in Any Residential Zone. Balconies and rooftop decks above the ground floor within 15 horizontal feet of a side property line abutting a residentially zoned property must feature a railing system that is at least 50 percent opaque. Specifically, 50 percent of the area below the top edge of the railing must be a sight-obscuring structure.
DEPARTURES to this standard will be allowed if the balcony will not cause visual or privacy impacts due to its location, orientation, design or other consideration.
Figure 19.62.030(B)
Privacy standards for balconies within 15 feet of side or rear property lines.
![]() |
C. Light and Air Access and Privacy near Interior Side and Rear Property Lines. Buildings or portions thereof containing multifamily dwelling units whose only solar access (windows) is from the applicable side of the building (facing towards the interior side property line) must be set back from the applicable interior side or rear property lines at least 15 feet. See Figure 19.62.030(C).
DEPARTURES will be allowed where it is determined that the proposed design will not create a compatibility problem in the near and long term based on the unique site context.
Figure 19.62.030(C)
Light/air access and privacy standards for multifamily residential buildings along interior side and rear property lines.
![]() |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To create usable space that is suitable for leisure or recreational activities for residents.
2. To create open space that contributes to the residential setting.
3. To provide plazas that attract shoppers to commercial areas.
4. To provide plazas and other pedestrian-oriented spaces in commercial areas that enhance the employees’ and public’s opportunity for active and passive activities, such as dining, resting, people watching, and recreational activities.
5. To enhance the development character and attractiveness of commercial development.
B. Usable Residential Open Space.
1. All multifamily development, including multifamily portions of mixed-use development, must provide minimum usable open space equal to 100 square feet per dwelling unit for studio and one-bedroom dwellings and 150 square feet per dwelling unit for dwellings with two or more bedrooms. The required open space may be provided in a combination of ways:
a. Shared Open Space. All of the required open space may be in the form of shared open space available to all residents and meeting the requirements of subsection (B)(2) of this section.
b. Ground Level Individual Outdoor Space. All of the required open space for a unit may be provided by ground level outdoor space that is adjacent and directly accessible to the subject unit. Such open spaces must be:
i. Outdoor spaces may be located in the front, side, or rear yard, provided they are generally level, feature no dimension less than 10 feet, and are enclosed by a fence and/or hedge at least 32 inches in height to qualify.
DEPARTURES will be considered for this provision.
ii. Private porches may qualify as outdoor space, provided they are at least 36 square feet in area, with no dimension less than six feet.
iii. LID BMPs may be included in ground level individual outdoor space, provided the LID BMP design and maintenance requirements are consistent with the purpose of the space and do not affect usability.
Individual ground level open space that is in excess of minimum requirements must not be used in the calculations for determining the minimum usable open space requirements for other units in the development.
c. Balconies. Up to 50 percent of the required open space may be provided by private balconies, provided such spaces are at least 32 square feet in area, with no dimension less than four feet (not including railings), to provide a space usable for human activity.
d. Common Indoor Recreation Areas. For mixed-use buildings, up to 50 percent of the required open space may be provided by common indoor recreation areas meeting the following conditions:
i. The space must meet ADA standards and must be located in a visible area, such as near an entrance, lobby, or high traffic corridor.
ii. The space must be designed specifically to serve interior recreational functions and not merely be leftover unrentable space used to meet the open space requirement. Such space must include amenities and design elements that will encourage use by residents.
e. Shared Roof Decks. For multifamily buildings, up to 50 percent of the required open space may be provided by shared roof decks located on the top of buildings which are available to all residents and meet the requirements below. For mixed-use buildings, 100 percent of the required open space may be provided by shared roof decks. Design requirements:
i. Space must feature hard surfacing, and provide amenities such as seating areas and other features that encourage use.
ii. Space must integrate landscaping elements that enhance the character of the space and encourage its use.
iii. Space must incorporate features that provide for the safety of residents, such as enclosures, railings, and appropriate lighting levels.
2. Shared Open Space Design Requirements. Shared open space can include landscaped courtyards or decks, entrance plazas, gardens with pathways, children’s play areas, pools, and water features, provided they are accessible to all residents of the development. Accessible areas with native vegetation and areas used for stormwater retention, infiltration, or other multipurpose recreational and/or green spaces that meet the design criteria herein may qualify as shared open space.
Special requirements for shared open spaces include the following:
a. Shared open space must be located in centralized areas that are visible from units within the development.
b. Required setback areas must not count as shared open space unless the design of the space meets the standards herein.
c. Shared open space must feature no dimension less than 15 feet in order to provide functional leisure or recreational activity (unless otherwise noted herein).
d. Shared open space must feature paths or walkable lawns, landscaping, seating, lighting, and play structures, sports courts, or other pedestrian amenities to make the area more functional and enjoyable for a range of users.
e. Shared open space must be separated from ground level windows, streets, service areas and parking lots with landscaping, fencing, and/or other acceptable treatments that enhance safety and privacy for both the shared open space and dwelling units.
f. When possible, the space should be oriented to receive sunlight, facing east, west or preferably south.
g. Stairways and service elements located within or on the edge of shared open space must not be included in the open space calculations.
h. Shared porches may qualify as shared open space, provided they are at least eight feet in depth and 96 square feet in total area.
i. The space must be accessible to all residents of the development.
j. Shared open spaces may include LID BMPs, like rain gardens, in up to 25 percent of the required open space.
Figure 19.62.040(B)(2)(a)
Shared open space examples.
![]() The upper left example includes a combination of open lawn area for informal recreation plus pathways and decorative landscape areas to enhance the setting for residents. The upper right courtyard includes pathways, seating areas, landscaped beds, and decorative lighting to provide a visual and physical amenity for residents. |
![]() The left image above includes a covered gathering space with outdoor grills adjacent to a landscaped commons with a central pathway. The right image includes a pond area with boardwalk and seating areas. |
Figure 19.62.040(B)(2)(b)
Rooftop deck examples.
![]() |
C. Usable Commercial Open Space. New developments with nonresidential uses with more than 10,000 square feet of gross floor area in the C, CBD, and MMU zones must provide open space equal to at least two percent of the development site. The open space may be in the form of pedestrian-oriented open space per subsection (D) below, garden, play area and/or other open space feature that serves both as a visual amenity and a place for human activity. Portions of sidewalks that are wider than 12 feet and which meet the standards of pedestrian-oriented open space may be counted toward this requirement.
DEPARTURE: Open space area may be reduced to one percent of the development site if the Director finds the project includes exceptional design features and elements that meet the purpose of the standards. This includes open spaces that feature a combination of design (site materials, amenities, and configurations) and location/context that clearly exceed typical plaza designs found in the region.
Figure 19.62.040(C)
Example of site development integrating usable commercial open space.
![]() |
D. Pedestrian-Oriented Open Space Design Criteria. This subsection describes the requirements and desired characteristics of pedestrian-oriented open space (which may be used to meet the requirements of subsection C of this section).
1. Required Pedestrian-Oriented Open Space Features.
a. Visual and pedestrian access into the site from a street, private access road, or nonvehicular courtyard.
b. Paved walking surfaces of either concrete or approved unit paving. Form-in-place pervious concrete paving is allowed.
d. The spaces must be located in or adjacent to areas with significant pedestrian traffic to provide interest and security, such as adjacent to or visible from a building entry.
e. At least two feet of seating area (a bench or ledge at least 16 inches deep and appropriate seating height) or one individual seat per 60 square feet of plaza area or open space.
f. Landscaping components that add visual interest and do not act as a visual barrier. This could include planting beds, raised planters, and/or potted plants, or both.
2. Desirable Pedestrian-Oriented Open Space Features.
a. Pedestrian amenities, such as site furniture, artwork, drinking fountains, shade structures, kiosks, or other similar features.
b. Adjacent buildings with transparent windows and doors covering at least 50 percent of the facade between 30 inches and 10 feet above the ground level.
c. Pedestrian weather protection, alcoves, seating, or other features along building edges to allow for outdoor gathering.
d. Pedestrian-oriented open spaces may include LID BMPs, like rain gardens, in up to 25 percent of the required open space.
3. Features Prohibited within a Pedestrian-Oriented Open Space.
a. Asphalt pavement.
b. Adjacent service areas (e.g., trash areas, loading docks) that are not separated with landscaping, as required by AMC 19.62.070.
c. Adjacent chain-link fences.
d. Adjacent blank walls without blank wall treatment (see AMC 19.63.070).
e. Outdoor storage.
Figure 19.62.040(D)(1)
Example of a small pedestrian-oriented open space.
![]() |
Figure 19.62.040(D)(2)
Desirable examples of pedestrian-oriented open space.
![]() The left example above is a colorful plaza with outdoor seating, landscaping elements and direct access to adjacent retail uses. The upper right image is a commons area with adjacent covered areas. ![]() A covered outdoor gathering space (left) may be used to meet pedestrian-oriented open space requirements. In the right image, the widened sidewalk area may be counted as pedestrian-oriented open space. |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To improve the pedestrian and bicycling environment by making it easier, safer, and more comfortable to walk or ride among residences, to businesses, to the street sidewalk, to transit stops, through parking lots, to adjacent properties, and connections throughout the city.
2. To enhance access to on- and off-site open space areas and pedestrian/bicycle paths.
B. Access to Sidewalk. All buildings must feature pedestrian connections to a sidewalk per applicable block frontage standards in Chapter 19.61. See subsection (D) below for access design requirements.
Figure 19.62.050(B)
Examples of direct pedestrian access to buildings from the street.
![]() |
C. Internal Circulation.
1. For sites with multiple buildings in the C, CBD, and MMU zones, pedestrian paths connecting businesses and residential entries on the same development site must be provided. Routes that minimize walking distances must be utilized to the extent practical.
DEPARTURES will be allowed where an indirect route would enhance the design and/or use of a common usable open space. See subsection (D) below for pathway design standards.
Figure 19.62.050(C)(1)
Internal and external pedestrian connections are important.
![]() |
2. Sites with Residential Units. Provide direct pedestrian access between all ground related unit entries and a public street or to a clearly marked pathway network or open space that has direct access to a public street. Residential developments must provide a pedestrian circulation network that connects all main entrances on the site to other areas of the site, such as:
a. Parking areas.
b. Recreational areas.
c. Common outdoor areas.
d. Any pedestrian amenities.
For townhouses or other residential units fronting the street, the sidewalk may be used to meet this standard.
Figure 19.62.050(C)(2)(a)
Direct pathways between the street and dwelling units are required.
![]() The entries of the example on the left connect directly to a public sidewalk while the entries in the right example connect to a common path that extends to the sidewalk. |
Figure 19.62.050(C)(2)(b)
Examples of attractive pedestrian connection through a residential development.
![]() |
3. Crosswalks are required when a pathway crosses an on-site paved area accessible to vehicles. Crosswalks must contain contrasting material (such as concrete) and/or patterns (such as stamped asphalt), excluding painted surfaces.
4. Pedestrian Paths through Parking Lots. Large parking areas must include specially marked or paved sidewalks. At least one pathway must be provided every four rows of parking, or at a maximum spacing of 200 feet. The pathways must provide a safe connection to the building entrance and meet the pathway design standards in subsection D of this section. See examples below.
Figure 19.62.050(C)(4)
Parking area pathway standards and examples.
5. Barriers that limit future pedestrian access are prohibited. Gates that limit access to employees and residents are permitted. See subsection (D) below for pathway design standards.
D. Pathway Design.
1. All internal pedestrian pathways must have at least a minimum five-foot-wide unobstructed walking surface, except where otherwise required by the Anacortes engineering design standards.
2. All internal pedestrian pathways must be curbed and raised six inches above adjacent parking lot surface. Curbs may be cut to allow surface water runoff to enter low-impact development best management practices (LID BMPs). Ramps and other accessibility features must be provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 and the current ADA Standards for Accessible Design.
DEPARTURE: Alternative curbless designs may be approved where design features are included to make the pathways safe and welcoming while enhancing the visual character of the site. See the lower right example in Figure 19.62.060(C) as a good example of a curbless design.
3. Where a pedestrian pathway is adjacent to perpendicular or angled parking, an extra two feet of pathway width must be provided to accommodate parked vehicles overhanging the pathway unless wheel stops are installed to prevent parked vehicles from overhanging the curb.
4. Pedestrian walks must be separated from structures with at least three feet of landscaping except where the adjacent building facade meets the storefront block frontage standards per AMC 19.61.060.
DEPARTURE: Other landscaping and/or facade design treatments to provide attractive pathways will be considered. Examples include sculptural, mosaic, bas-relief artwork, or other decorative treatments that meet the purpose. Figure 19.62.050(D)(4) below provides one example.
Figure 19.62.050(D)(4)
Standards for internal pathways adjacent to buildings.
![]() Internal pathways adjacent to building walls that do not meet storefront facade standards must provide at least three feet of landscaping to enhance the character of the pathway. The Director will consider alternative treatments, such as decorative walls (right example). |
5. Pathways along facades containing primary tenant entries of multi-tenant commercial or mixed-use buildings, and which are 100 feet long or more and abut parking lots, must include the following:
a. Twelve-foot-wide sidewalk and eight feet minimum unobstructed width.
b. Trees, as approved by the reviewing authority, placed at an average of 50 feet on center and placed in grates or in planting strips as established in subsection (D)(5)(c) of this section.
DEPARTURE: Breaks in the tree coverage will be allowed near major building entries to enhance visibility.
c. Planting strips with trees may be used between any vehicle access or parking area and the pathway; provided, that the trees required in subsection (D)(5)(b) of this section are included, the pathway meets the applicable width standards herein, and the combined pathway and planting strip is at least 12 feet wide. Stormwater best management practices elements may be included in the planting strip.
Figure 19.62.050(D)(5)
Example of a successful pedestrian sidewalk between parking lot and storefront.
![]() |
e. See also AMC 19.62.060(C), Internal Roadway Design. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
The standards herein supplement the provisions of AMC Chapters 19.64, Parking, and 19.53, Private Driveways and Access. Where there is a conflict, these provisions herein apply.
A. Purpose.
1. To create a safe, convenient, and efficient network for vehicle circulation and parking.
2. To enhance the visual character of interior access roads.
3. To minimize conflicts with pedestrian circulation and activity.
B. Driveway Provisions. Driveways must meet the standards in AMC 19.53.030.
C. Internal Roadway Design.
1. To increase the function and appearance of internal roadways on large sites (greater than two acres) in the MMU zone, street trees and sidewalks must be provided on all internal access roadways, excepting access roads designed solely for the purpose of service (e.g., waste pick-up) and loading.
DEPARTURES will be allowed, provided the overall pedestrian circulation system and site landscaping meet the intent of the standards.
2. In some instances where traffic speed and volume are low, the reviewing authority may approve a street where vehicle, bicycle and pedestrian movement are mixed such as in a “woonerf” or “shared street.” Woonerf streets must feature traffic-calming and safety measures as well as landscape and amenity features as determined by the reviewing authority.
Figure 19.62.060(C)
Good internal roadway examples.
![]() The examples above include angled parking and planter strips with street trees. Pedestrian-scaled lighting also contributes to the character in the upper right image. |
![]() The above left image illustrates a thoroughfare lane with a row of street trees. A sidewalk is included on one side of the street to provide a strategic connection between businesses. The right image illustrates the curbless “woonerf” design where travel speeds are low and lanes are shared between pedestrians and vehicles. |
D. Drive-Through Facilities. Where allowed, drive through facilities (e.g., drive-up windows) must comply with the following:
1. Block Frontage Provisions. For the purpose of complying with the block frontage standards in AMC Chapter 19.61, drive-through lanes are considered a parking area.
2. Screening. Drive-through lanes must be screened from public streets, internal pathways, and adjacent residential uses with landscaping or architectural screens.
a. For drive-through lanes adjacent to the street, at least 10 feet of Type C landscaping (see AMC 19.65.060) must be provided between the sidewalk and the drive-through lane.
b. For drive-through lanes adjacent to internal pathways, at least five feet of Type C landscaping (see AMC 19.65.060) must be provided between the pathway and the drive-through lane.
c. For drive-through lanes adjacent to residential uses, at least five feet of Type A, B, or C landscaping (see AMC 19.65.060) must be provided.
DEPARTURE: Alternative screening schemes may be approved, provided they reduce the negative visual impacts of views from sidewalks, pathways, and adjacent residential uses and add visual interest.
3. Additional Drive-Through Lane Standards.
a. Drive-through lanes must not restrict pedestrian access between a public sidewalk and on-site buildings. Designated pathways must not be located within required stacking space.
b. Stacking spaces and the entrance and exit for the drive-through facility must be located to prevent any vehicles from extending onto the public right-of-way, or interfering with any pedestrian circulation, traffic maneuvering, or other parking space areas.
c. Sufficient stacking space must be provided for handling of motor vehicles using the drive-through facility during peak business hours of the facility.
d. A stacking space must be an area measuring eight feet by 20 feet with direct forward access to a service window of a drive-through facility.
e. Stacking spaces may not be counted as required parking spaces.
f. Noise from drive-through speakers must not be audible from adjacent residential properties. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To minimize adverse visual, odor, and noise impacts of mechanical equipment, utility cabinets and service areas at ground and roof levels.
2. To provide adequate, durable, well-maintained, and accessible service and equipment areas.
3. To protect residential uses and adjacent properties from impacts due to location and utilization of service areas.
B. Location of Ground-Related Service Areas and Mechanical Equipment.
1. Service areas (loading docks, trash dumpsters, compactors, recycling areas, electrical panels, and mechanical equipment areas) must be located for convenient service access while avoiding negative visual, auditory, olfactory, or physical impacts on the streetscape environment and adjacent residentially zoned properties. Service areas must be sited for alley access if available.
The Director may require evidence that such elements will not significantly impact neighboring properties or public areas. (For example, the Director may require noise-damping specifications for fans near residential zones.)
2. Exterior Loading Areas. Exterior loading areas for commercial uses must not be located within 20 feet of a residentially zoned property.
DEPARTURES may be allowed where such a restriction does not allow feasible development, and alternative design measures can successfully mitigate potential negative impacts. For example, areas and drives may be required by the reviewing authority to be separated from the residential lot by a masonry wall at least eight feet high.
3. Service areas must not be visible from the sidewalk and adjacent properties. Where the Director finds that the only option for locating a service area is an area visible from a street, internal pathway or pedestrian area, or from an adjacent property, the area must be screened with structural and or landscaping screening measures provided in subsection (C) below and AMC Chapter 19.65, Landscaping. Service elements accessible from an alley are exempt from screening requirements.
4. Design for Safety. Other provisions of this section notwithstanding, service areas used by residents must be located to avoid entrapment areas and other conditions where personal security is potentially a problem. The Director may require pedestrian-scaled lighting or other measures to enhance security.
5. Locate and/or shield noise-producing mechanical equipment, such as fans, heat pumps, etc., to minimize sounds and reduce impacts at property lines adjacent to residentially zoned properties.
6. Dumpster Storage Areas.
a. Dumpster storage areas must be provided for all nonresidential and multifamily development.
b. Dumpster storage areas must be on site and must not be located in the public right-of-way.
c. Dumpster storage areas must be sized to accommodate the minimum dumpster sizes (as provided by the Anacortes engineering design standards) for garbage, recycling, and composting.
Figure 19.62.070(B)
Service element location.
![]() Locate service elements to reduce impacts on the residential and pedestrian environment, and provide appropriate enclosure. |
C. Screening of Ground-Related Service Areas and Mechanical Equipment.
1. Where screening of ground level service areas is required (see subsection (B)(3) of this section), the following applies:
a. A structural enclosure must be constructed of masonry, heavy-gauge metal, or decay-resistant material that is also used with the architecture of the main building. The reviewing authority may allow materials other than those used for the main building if the finishes are similar in color and texture or if the proposed enclosure materials are more durable than those for the main structure. The walls must be sufficient to provide full screening from the affected roadway, pedestrian areas or adjacent use. The enclosure may use overlapping walls to screen dumpsters and other materials (see Figure 19.62.070(C) below).
b. Gates must be made of heavy-gauge, site-obscuring material. Chain-link or chain-link with slats is not an acceptable material for enclosures or gates.
c. Where the interior of a service enclosure is visible from surrounding streets, pathways, and buildings, an opaque or semi-opaque horizontal cover or screen must be used to mitigate unsightly views. The horizontal screen/cover should be integrated into the enclosure design (in terms of materials and/or design).
d. Collection points must be located and configured so that the enclosure gate swing does not obstruct pedestrian or vehicular traffic, or does not require that a hauling truck project into any public right-of-way. Ensure that screening elements allow for efficient service delivery and removal operations.
e. The service area must be paved.
2. The sides and rear of service enclosures must be screened with landscaping at least five feet wide in locations visible from the street, parking lots, and pathways to soften views of the screening element and add visual interest.
DEPARTURES to the provisions of subsections (C)(1) and (2) of this section will be considered per AMC 19.20.220, provided the enclosure and landscaping treatment meet the purpose of the standards and add visual interest to site users.
Figure 19.62.070(C)
Acceptable screening enclosures.
![]() | |
![]() | All three examples use durable and attractive enclosures with trees and shrubs to soften views of the enclosures from the side. The lower left example uses a trellis structure on top—a desirable example particularly where the top of the enclosures are visible from surrounding buildings, streets, and pathways (due to topography or building heights). |
D. Utility Meters, Electrical Conduit, and Other Service Utility Apparatus. These elements must be located and/or designed to minimize their visibility to the public. Project designers are strongly encouraged to coordinate with applicable service providers early in the design process to determine the best approach in meeting these standards. If such elements are mounted in a location visible from the street, pedestrian pathway, shared open space, or shared auto courtyards, they must be screened with vegetation and/or integrated into the building’s architecture.
Figure 19.62.070(D)
Utility meter location and screening—Good and bad examples.
![]() Place utility meters in less visible locations. The upper and lower left examples are successfully tucked away in a less visible location and/or screened by vegetation. The right images are poorly executed and would not be permitted in such visible locations. Such meters must be coordinated and better integrated with the architecture of the building. ![]() |
E. Location and Screening of Roof-Mounted Mechanical Equipment.
1. All rooftop mechanical equipment, including air conditioners, heaters, vents, and similar equipment, must be fully screened from public view at the street level. Screening must be located so as not to interfere with operation of the equipment.
Exception: Roof-mounted wind turbines, solar energy systems, and rainwater reuse systems do not require screening.
2. For rooftop equipment, all screening devices must be well integrated into the architectural design through such elements as parapet walls, false roofs, roof wells, clerestories, or equipment rooms. Screening walls or unit-mounted screening is allowed but less desirable. Wood must not be used for screens or enclosures. Louvered designs are acceptable if consistent with building design style. Perforated metal is not permitted.
3. The screening materials must be of material requiring minimal maintenance and must be as high as the equipment being screened.
4. Locate and/or shield noise-producing mechanical equipment such as fans, heat pumps, etc., to minimize sounds and reduce impacts to adjacent properties.
Figure 19.62.070(E)
Examples of how to screen roof-mounted mechanical equipment.
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
This section provides direction for the design of buildings consistent with the goals and policies of the Anacortes comprehensive plan. See the individual “purpose” statements for each section in this chapter. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. The provisions of this chapter apply to all nonresidential and multifamily development. The following are exempt:
1. All development in the I, LM, AZ, CM2, and MS zones.
2. Developments in the HM and LM1 zone when not abutting State Route 20 right-of-way.
B. For clarification on the relationship between the provisions in this division and other documents and codes, see AMC 19.60.020(B).
C. For the application of building additions and remodels and site improvements, see AMC 19.60.020(C).
D. For clarification on how the provisions of this division are applied, see AMC 19.60.030.
E. Public buildings may be exempted from building massing and articulation standards (see AMC 19.63.040), building details standards (see AMC 19.63.050), building materials provisions (see AMC 19.63.060), and blank wall treatment standards (see AMC 19.63.070), provided design treatments are integrated to meet the following objectives:
1. Enliven the pedestrian environment along the adjacent sidewalks.
2. Incorporate a prominent and inviting entry visible from the street.
3. Building design and materials should evoke a sense of permanence.
4. Site and building design stands out from the surrounding context as a distinct landmark and provides visual interest from all observable scales. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To promote buildings with an architectural character that reflects the region’s aesthetic and is based on human-scaled design details, durable high-quality materials, sustainable design measures, and responds uniquely to the site’s context.
2. To emphasize that high-quality design is most critical to Anacortes’s high-visibility sites and corridors.
3. To avoid generic, corporate architectural design that degrades the character and identity of Anacortes.
B. Architecture that is defined predominately by corporate identity features and is difficult to adapt to other uses is prohibited. For example, some franchise convenience uses have very specific architectural features (such as a distinctive roofline design that functions as a sign) that reinforce their identity. As tenants change in these types of buildings, these corporate identity features can negatively impact the character of the area and identity of new tenants. These features can also be very expensive to reconfigure and adapt to new uses. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To employ facade articulation techniques that reduce the perceived scale of large buildings and add visual interest from all observable scales.
2. To create clear and welcoming building entries.
B. Exemption. Buildings with less than 60 horizontal feet of facade are exempt from this section.
C. Facade Articulation. Nonresidential, mixed-use, and multifamily residential buildings must include facade articulation features at designated maximum intervals to create a human-scaled pattern. This standard applies to applicable building facades and other applicable building elevations facing parks, containing primary building entrances, and adjacent to lower intensity zones. Alley-facing building elevations not adjacent to a lower intensity zone are exempt.
1. The maximum horizontal length of intervals is:
a. MMU zone: 50 feet.
b. HM and LM1 zone (where applicable): 60 feet.
c. Buildings in all other applicable zones: 30 feet.
2. At least three of the following articulation features must be employed in compliance with maximum interval standards in subsection (C)(1) of this section:
a. Use of windows and/or entries.
b. Use of weather protection features.
c. Use of vertical piers/columns (applies to all floors of the facade, excluding upper-level stepbacks).
e. Change in building material, siding style, and/or window pattern (applies to all floors of the facade, excluding upper level stepbacks).
f. Vertical elements such as a trellis with plants, green wall, or art element that meet the purpose of the standard.
g. Providing vertical building modulation of at least 12 inches in depth if tied to a change in roofline per subsection (F) below or a change in building material, siding style, or color. Balconies may be used to qualify for this option if they are recessed or projected from the facade by at least 18 inches. Juliet balconies or other balconies that appear to be tacked on to the facade will not qualify for this option unless they employ high-quality materials and effectively meet the purpose of the standards.
h. Other design techniques that effectively reinforce a pattern of small facades compatible with the building’s surrounding context.
DEPARTURES will be considered, provided they meet the purpose of the standards and the design criteria in subsection (D) below. For example, a departure may propose a design with only two articulation features instead of three or the articulation features exceed the maximum articulation interval.
Figure 19.63.040(C-1)
Storefront facade articulation examples.
![]() The left image uses window patterns, awnings, and roofline modulation. The photo example to the right also includes window patterns and weather protection along with brick vertical piers to articulate the facade. The lower example illustrates how a multi-tenant retail building can successfully be articulated (windows, weather protection, vertical building modulation, and roofline changes). ![]() |
Figure 19.63.040(C-2)
Residential facade articulation examples.
![]() Below examples (except bottom right image) use a combination of vertical building modulation, window patterns, material changes, and roofline modulation. ![]() ![]() |
D. DEPARTURE Criteria Associated with Articulation Standards. Proposals must meet the purpose of the standards. The following criteria will be considered in determining whether the proposed articulation treatment meets the purpose:
1. Consider the type and width of the proposed articulation treatment and how effective it is in meeting the purpose given the building’s current and desired context (per Anacortes’s comprehensive plan).
2. Consider the applicable block frontage designation. Undesignated block frontages warrant more flexibility than block frontages designated as mixed or landscaped.
3. Consider the size and width of the building. Smaller buildings warrant greater flexibility than larger buildings.
4. Consider the quality of facade materials in concert with doors, windows, and other facade features and their ability to add visual interest to the street from a pedestrian scale and more distant observable scales.
E. Maximum Facade Width. Building facades and other building elevations facing lower intensity zone edge must include at least one of the following features to break up the massing of the building and add visual interest. This standard applies to applicable building elevations wider than 100 feet (wider than 150 feet in the MMU zone).
1. Provide vertical building modulation at least six feet deep and 15 feet wide. For multi-story buildings, the modulation must extend through at least one-half of the building floors.
2. Use of a contrasting vertical modulated design component featuring all of the following:
a. Utilizes a change in building materials that effectively contrast from the rest of the facade.
b. Component is modulated vertically from the rest of the facade by an average of six inches.
3. Facade employs building walls with contrasting articulation that make it appear like multiple distinct buildings. To qualify for this option, these contrasting facades must employ all of the following:
a. Different building materials and/or configuration of building materials.
b. Contrasting window design (sizes or configurations).
4. DEPARTURES to subsections (E)(1) through (E)(3) of this section will be considered, provided the design meets the purpose of the standards. Supplemental consideration for approving alternative designs:
a. Width of the facade. The larger the facade, the more substantial articulation/modulation features need to be.
b. Block frontage designation. Storefront designated block frontages warrant the most scrutiny while undesignated streets warrant more flexibility.
c. The type of articulation treatment and how effective it is in meeting the purpose given the building’s context.
Figure 19.63.040(E)
Illustrating maximum facade width standards and good and bad examples.
![]() Less than 100' wide: Meets standard. | ![]() More than 100' wide: Does not meet standard. |
![]() Building incorporates a courtyard along the facade (technique No.1 noted above) to effectively break it up into smaller components: Meets standard. | |
![]() The left building uses technique No. 1 (vertical building modulation at least six feet deep and 15 feet wide). The right building uses technique No. 2 (contrasting vertical modulated design component). Both examples are effective in breaking up the perceived scale of the building and adding visual interest. | |
F. Roofline Modulation. Roofline modulation is not required on all buildings. However, it can be used as one of the facade articulation features in subsection C of this section. In order to qualify as an articulation feature, rooflines must employ one or more of the following:
1. For flat roofs or facades with horizontal eave, fascia, or parapet, the minimum vertical dimension of roofline modulation is the greater of two feet or 0.1 multiplied by the wall height (finish grade to top of the wall) when combined with vertical building modulation techniques described in subsections above. Otherwise, the minimum vertical dimension of roofline modulation is the greater of four feet or 0.2 multiplied by the wall height.
2. A pitched roofline or gabled roofline segment of at least 20 feet in width. Buildings with pitched roofs must include a minimum slope of 5:12 and feature modulated roofline components at the interval required per the applicable standard above.
3. A combination of the above.
DEPARTURES will be considered, provided the roofline modulation design effectively reduces the perceived scale of the building and adds visual interest.
Figure 19.63.040(F)
Acceptable examples of roofline modulation.
![]() Roofline modulation examples for flat roofs. ![]() The left building illustrates a pitched roof example and the right building includes a combination of flat and gabled rooflines. |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To encourage the incorporation of design details and small-scale elements into building facades that are attractive at a pedestrian scale.
2. To integrate window design that adds depth, richness, and visual interest to the facade.
B. Facade Details—Nonresidential and Mixed-Use Buildings. All nonresidential and mixed-use buildings in the C, CBD, MMU, and CM zones and the MED-O overlay must be enhanced with appropriate details. This standard applies to applicable building facades and other building elevations facing parks and containing primary building entrances. All new buildings and additions and buildings associated with Level II and III improvements (see AMC 19.60.020(C)) must employ at least one detail element from each of the three categories below for each facade articulation interval (see AMC 19.63.040(B)). For example, a building with 120 feet of lot frontage with a facade articulated at 30-foot intervals will need to meet the standards for each of the three facade segments below.
1. Window and/or entry treatment, such as:
a. Display windows divided into a grid of multiple panes.
b. Transom windows.
c. Roll-up windows/doors.
d. Other distinctive window treatment that meets the purpose of the standards.
e. Recessed entry.
f. Decorative door.
g. Other decorative or specially designed entry treatment that meets the purpose of the standards.
Figure 19.63.050(B)(1)
Examples of decorative or specially designed windows and entries.
![]() ![]() Examples of decorative or specially designed windows and entries. A = openable storefront window. B = transom windows. C = openable window with decorative details. D = decorative window shades. E = decorative door. F = recessed entry. |
2. Building elements and facade details, such as:
a. Custom-designed weather protection element such as a steel canopy, cloth awning, or retractable awning.
b. Decorative building-mounted light fixtures.
c. Bay windows, trellises, towers, and similar elements.
d. Decorative, custom hanging sign(s) (option only available for building remodels).
e. Other details or elements that meet the purpose of these standards.
Figure 19.63.050(B)(2)
Examples of attached elements that enhance the visual intrigue of the building.
![]() ![]() Examples of elements attached to facades that enhance the visual intrigue of the building. A = retractable awning. B = custom hanging bike rack and repair station integrated as a storefront design element. C = decorative facade/sign lighting. D and E = custom decorative canopy. F = decorative tower. |
3. Building materials and other facade elements, such as:
a. Use of decorative building materials/use of building materials. Examples include decorative use of brick, tile, or stonework.
b. Artwork on building (such as a mural) or bas-relief sculpture.
c. Decorative kickplate, pilaster, base panel, or other similar feature.
d. Hand-crafted material, such as special wrought iron or carved wood.
e. Other details that meet the purpose of the standards.
Figure 19.63.050(B)(3)
Examples of building material details that enhance the visual intrigue of the building.
![]() ![]() Examples of decorative surface materials. A = decorative brick/design. B = decorative tile work and column pattern. C = decorative medallion. D = decorative mosaic tile work. E = decorative bulkhead. F = decorative materials and design. |
DEPARTURES for facade detail standards of this subsection (B) will be considered, provided the facade (at the overall scale and at the individual articulation scale) meets the purpose of the standards.
C. Window Design Standards.
1. All windows (except storefront display windows) must employ designs that add depth and richness to the building facade. At least one of the following features must be included to meet this requirement:
a. Recess windows at least two inches from the facade.
b. Incorporate window trim (at least three inches wide) around windows.
c. Incorporate other design treatments that add depth, richness, and visual interest to the facade.
2. Highly reflective glass must not be used on more than 10 percent of a building facade or other building elevations facing parks and containing primary building entrances.
Figure 19.63.050(C)
Acceptable and unacceptable window design examples.
![]() Recessed and/or trimmed windows. | |
![]() | This window lacks any other detail that adds visual interest. |
D. Cornice/Roofline Design. Buildings employing a flat roof must employ a distinctive roofline that effectively provides an identifiable “top” to the building. This could include a traditional cornice line or a contemporary interpretation of a traditional cornice line.
1. Such rooflines must be proportional to the size and scale of the building.
2. Understated cornice lines are permitted, depending on the materials and design of the base and middle elements in reinforcing the base/middle/top configuration.
Figure 19.63.050(D) below illustrates acceptable examples.
Figure 19.63.050(D)
Examples of buildings employing confident and distinctive rooflines.
![]() ![]() Building 1 uses a dramatic overhanging cornice at the corner. The left portion of Building 1 uses a very simple cornice line—to go with the upper level setback. Building 2 uses a traditional cornice line. Building 3 uses capped projecting columns along with an understated cornice line. Building 4 uses a very simple roofline—which is acceptable in this case due to the prominence of the wooden canopy. |
Rooftop solar units are permitted, provided the placement and design of units visible from the surrounding streetscape are carefully integrated into the overall design concept of the building.
E. Articulated Building Entries. The primary building entrance for an office building, hotel, apartment building, public or community-based facility or other multi-story commercial building must be designed as a clearly defined and demarcated standout architectural feature of the building. Such entrances must be easily distinguishable from regular storefront entrances on the building. Such entries must be scaled proportional to the building. See Figure 19.63.050(E) below for good examples.
Figure 19.63.050(E)
Acceptable building entry examples.
![]() |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To encourage the use of durable, high-quality, and urban building materials that minimize maintenance cost and provide visual interest from all observable vantage points.
2. To promote the use of a distinctive mix of materials that helps to articulate facades and lends a sense of depth and richness to the buildings.
3. To place the highest priority on the first floor in the quality and detailing of materials at the pedestrian scale.
B. Quality Building Materials. Applicants must use high-quality durable materials. This is most important for the base of buildings, particularly for commercial and mixed-use buildings where the facade is sited close to sidewalks. Stone, brick or tile masonry, architectural concrete or other similar highly durable materials must be used for at least the bottom two feet of the first-floor facade on nonresidential and mixed-use buildings (excluding window and door areas).
C. Special Conditions and Limitations for the Use of Certain Cladding Materials.
1. Concrete block (a.k.a. concrete masonry unit or CMU) may be used as a secondary cladding material on all street-facing building elevations if it is incorporated with other permitted materials.
DEPARTURES will be considered for alternative designs that use concrete block as the primary, but not the only, cladding material, provided the design incorporates a combination of textures and/or colors to add visual interest. For example, combining split or rock-facade units with smooth blocks can create distinctive patterns. The figures below illustrate acceptable concrete block use/designs.
Figure 19.63.060(C)(1)
Acceptable concrete block use/design.
![]() CMU is the primary cladding for the corner element above, but secondary to brick on the main facades. The corner element uses a combination of decorative split-faced CMU closer to the sidewalk and smooth-faced CMU that is colored to look more like traditional white terra cotta tiles. | ![]() The above facade illustrates an acceptable alternative example, as CMU is used as the primary cladding material. Note the use of split-facade CMUs above each of the awnings and coupled with the use of smooth-facade CMUs on the vertical columns (which employ black accent tiles for added interest). |
2. Metal siding may be used on all street-facing building elevations, provided it complies with the following standards:
a. It must feature visible corner molding and trim and does not extend to the ground level of nonresidential and mixed-use buildings and no lower than two feet above grade for residential buildings. Masonry, concrete, or other durable material must be incorporated between the metal siding and the ground plane.
b. Metal siding must be factory finished, with a matte, nonreflective surface.
c. Within the C and CBD zones, metal may only be used as a secondary cladding material if it is incorporated with other permitted materials.
DEPARTURES will be considered, provided the material’s integration and overall facade composition meet the purpose of the standards.
Figure 19.63.060(C)(2)
Acceptable metal siding examples.
![]() The use of metal siding in each example above is secondary to masonry. The left and right images are more contemporary in character, whereas the middle image is more rustic and industrial, with more refined windows. |
3. Standards for the Use of Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS). Such material/finishes may be used when it complies with the following:
a. EIFS is limited to no more than 20 percent of the total facade area and may not be the primary cladding material on nonresidential and mixed-use buildings in the CBD, C, MMU, and CM zones.
b. EIFS must feature a smooth or sand finish only.
c. EIFS must be trimmed in wood, masonry, or other material and must be sheltered from weather by roof overhangs or other methods.
d. EIFS must not be used on the ground floor of the following building elevations:
i. Ground level facades containing nonresidential uses in the CBD, C, MMU, and CM zones.
ii. Other ground level building elevations containing nonresidential uses in the CBD, C, MMU, and CM zones when facing parks or containing primary building entrances.
Concrete, masonry, or other highly durable material(s) must be used for the subject ground level building elevations to provide a durable surface where damage is most likely.
DEPARTURES will be considered, provided the material’s integration and overall facade composition meet the purpose of the standards.
Figure 19.63.060(C)(3)
Acceptable and unacceptable EIFS examples.
![]() Left image: Note the use of brick and decorative concrete block on the ground level and EIFS on the second floor. The window treatments visible on the second floor add depth and interest to the facade. Right image: EIFS is between the window and sidewalk—this design is prohibited. |
4. Cementitious wall board paneling/siding may be used, provided it meets the following provisions:
a. Cement board paneling/siding may not be used on ground level facades containing nonresidential uses.
b. Where cement board paneling/siding is the dominant siding material, the design must integrate a mix of colors and/or textures that are articulated consistent with windows, balconies, and modulated building surfaces and are balanced with facade details that add visual interest from the ground level and adjacent buildings.
DEPARTURES will be considered, provided the material’s integration and overall facade composition meet the purpose of the standards.
Figure 19.63.060(C)(4)
Acceptable and unacceptable cementitious wall board examples.
![]() The above building uses cementitious wallboard in different textures and colors to help articulate the facade. The white color replicates the board and batten style in the left image and green color in the right image effectively replicates horizontal wood siding. ![]() The wallboard board panels covering a large area in a single color would not meet the purpose of the standards. The right image is a better example and combines larger panels (dark maroon color) with horizontal wallboard board siding (beige color) as effective articulation features. Below is a similar acceptable example. | |
![]() | Another acceptable wallboard example replicating board and batten style with horizontal siding integrated with different colors and roofline modulation. |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To avoid untreated blank walls.
2. To retain and enhance the character of Anacortes’s streetscapes.
B. Blank Wall Definition. “Blank wall” means a ground floor wall or portion of a ground floor wall over 10 feet in height and with a horizontal length greater than 15 feet and does not include a transparent window or door.
Figure 19.63.070(B)
Blank wall definition.
![]() |
C. Blank Wall Treatment Standards. Untreated blank walls adjacent to a public street, pedestrian-oriented space, common usable open space, or pedestrian pathway are prohibited. Methods to treat blank walls can include:
1. Display windows at least 16 inches of depth to allow for changeable displays. Tack-on display cases (see Figure 19.63.070(C) below) do not qualify as a blank wall treatment.
2. Landscape planting bed at least five feet wide or a raised planter bed at least two feet high and three feet wide in front of the wall with planting materials that are sufficient to obscure or screen at least 60 percent of the wall’s surface within three years.
3. Installing a vertical trellis in front of the wall with climbing vines or plant materials.
4. Installing a mural as approved by the Director.
5. Special building detailing that adds visual interest at a pedestrian scale. Such detailing must use a variety of surfaces; monotonous designs will not meet the purpose of the standards.
For large visible blank walls, a variety of treatments may be required to meet the purpose of the standards.
DEPARTURES will be considered, provided the entire facade composition meets the intent of the standards for the context of the wall (e.g., walls along pathway corridors connecting parking areas to building entries might be granted more flexibility than street facades).
Figure 19.63.070(C)
Blank wall treatment examples.
![]() Acceptable and unacceptable blank wall treatments. Note in the far right example, the display cases don’t meet the 16'' depth requirement, nor does the design meet the purpose of the standards. |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
The purpose of this chapter is to:
A. Provide for adequate, convenient, and safe parking for cars and bicycles for all uses allowed in this code in all areas of the city.
B. Limit the overbuilding of parking, which has impacts on construction costs, land consumed, air and water quality, walkability, traffic congestion, and aesthetics.
C. Provide for alternative parking arrangements such as flexible minimum requirements, shared parking, and in-lieu fees.
D. Reduce demand for parking by encouraging walking, bicycling, public transit, and rideshare. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Off-street parking in conjunction with all land and building uses established after the enactment of the ordinance codified in this title must be provided prior to the issuance of a certificate of occupancy.
B. Off-street parking for nonresidential use must be either on the same lot or within 500 feet (walking distance) of the building it is intended to serve.
C. Residential off-street parking areas must consist of a parking lot, driveway, garage, carport, or a combination thereof and must be located on the lot they are intended to serve.
D. Any area once designated as required off-street parking must not be changed to any other use unless and until parking facilities are provided elsewhere, which conform to the requirements of this chapter.
E. Off-street parking existing at the effective date of the ordinance codified in this title in connection with the operation of an existing building or use must not be reduced to an amount less than hereinafter required for a similar new building or new use.
F. The required off-street parking area must be for occupants, employees, visitors, and patrons, and must be limited in use to parking, except for approved temporary uses per AMC 19.48.020(A).
G. Off-street parking meeting the minimum quantitative requirements of this chapter is not considered a principal use for the purpose of interpreting Tables 19.41.040 and 19.41.050.
H. Parking Studies. For the purposes of this chapter, a parking study is a document that provides sufficient information to determine the parking requirements for a specific use. The estimate may be based on scientific data, census data, transit service, academic studies, similar uses in the city or comparable cities, or other sources accepted by the Director. As required by this chapter, a parking study may be required for adjusting minimum and maximum quantitative requirements, determining times of peak parking demand, and determining impacts to on-street parking in the vicinity of the subject development site. All parking studies must be prepared by either a professional engineer with expertise in traffic and parking analyses or an equally qualified individual authorized by the Director.
I. Parking needs must be balanced with low-impact development planning that considers the reduction of impervious surfaces as a priority. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Number of Parking Spaces.
1. Off-street parking areas must contain at a minimum the number of parking spaces as stipulated in AMC 19.64.040, except for modifications allowed elsewhere in this chapter.
2. If the formula for determining the number of off-street parking spaces results in a fraction, the number of off-street parking spaces must be rounded to the nearest whole number with fractions of one-half or greater rounding up and fractions below one-half rounding down.
3. In the case of two or more uses on the same site, the total requirements for off-street parking must be the sum of the requirements for each use computed separately, except as permitted in AMC 19.64.080 pertaining to shared parking.
B. Guest Parking Requirements.
1. Guest parking is required for all residential developments in accordance with this subsection. Guest parking provided is above and beyond the minimum quantitative requirements elsewhere in this chapter.
2. Guest Parking Location and Accessibility Standards.
a. On-street parking areas within or directly adjacent to the subdivision or other development may be used to meet guest parking requirements, provided such areas are not already used for the purpose of meeting minimum parking requirements. One parking space is equivalent to 20 lineal feet of parallel on-street parking area.
b. Other off-street parking spaces within the subdivision/development that are above and beyond standard minimum parking requirements for the development may be used for guest parking.
c. Guest parking spaces must be available to guests of any residential unit in the development at all hours.
3. Minimum Guest Parking Ratios by Housing Type.
Table 19.64.030(B)
Minimum guest parking spaces required by housing type.
Housing Type | Minimum guest parking ratio |
Single-Family | 1 per 2 units |
Cottage | 1 per 4 units |
Duplex or Triplex | 1 per 4 units |
Townhouse | 1 per 4 units |
Multifamily | 1 per 8 units; 1 per 10 units if the multifamily use parking is provided entirely by structured parking; Where units average less than 700 square feet, 1 per 4,000 sq. ft. of net leasable floor area. |
4. Developments within the CBD zone are exempt from the guest parking requirements herein.
5. If the required number of guest parking spaces results in a fraction that requires less than one guest stall, no off-street guest parking space is required if on-street parking is available within 500 feet of the subject property.
C. Accessible Parking Requirements. Accessible parking spaces must be provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 and the current ADA Standards for Accessible Design. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. The minimum number of off-street parking spaces must be determined in accordance with Table 19.64.040.
B. Special cases are indicated by the term “Director decision,” in which case parking requirements must be established by the Director. For determination by the Director, the applicant must supply one of the following:
1. Documentation regarding actual parking demand for the proposed use.
2. Technical studies prepared by a qualified professional relating to the parking need for the proposed use.
3. Documentation of parking requirements for the proposed use from other comparable jurisdictions.
C. Where a cell in Table 19.64.040 is blank, there are no applicable requirements for the use.
D. For unclassified uses, refer to AMC 19.41.030(E). Where the Director finds that there is no similar use, the procedures for a “Director decision” under subsection B of this section apply.
Table 19.64.040
Off-street parking spaces required.
Use | Minimum Parking Spaces Required | Maximum Parking Spaces Allowed |
RESIDENTIAL | ||
Household Living, as listed below | ||
Single-family | 2 per unit | |
1 per unit | ||
See AMC 19.47.030(C)(8) | ||
Cottage housing | 1.5 per unit | |
Duplex or triplex | Same as multifamily (based on number of bedrooms) | |
Townhouse | Same as multifamily (based on number of bedrooms) | |
Multifamily dwelling, one bedroom or studio | 1.0 per unit | 1.5 per unit |
Multifamily dwelling, two bedrooms | 1.4 per unit | 2 per unit |
Multifamily dwelling, three or more bedrooms | 1.6 per unit | 2.5 per unit |
Multifamily dwelling, restricted | 25% reduction in base multifamily parking requirements above (based on number of rooms) | Same as multifamily uses above |
Live-work dwellings | Same as multifamily above plus: • Zero spaces for nonresidential uses with <500 sq. ft. nonresidential floor area. • One space for nonresidential uses with 500—1,000 sq. ft. nonresidential floor area. • Parking for nonresidential floor area >1,000 sq. ft. must meet applicable commercial use parking standards below. | |
Group Living, as listed below | ||
2 per home | ||
0.5 per unit | ||
0.33 per bed | ||
1 per rented room | ||
COMMERCIAL | ||
Day Care, as listed below | ||
Day care I facility | 2 per facility | |
Day care II facility | ||
General-Service, except as listed below | 3 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | 5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA |
Boat/marine equipment service | 1 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
Heavy service | 2 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
Water-oriented service use | ||
Medical, as listed below | ||
3 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | ||
Office | 2.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | 4 per 1,000 square feet of NFA |
Overnight Lodging | 1 per guest room | 1.5 per guest room |
Passenger Terminal | ||
Personal Service, as listed below | ||
Personal services, with fixed stations | 1.25 per station | 1.5 per station |
Personal services, without fixed stations | 2.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | 4 per 1,000 square feet of NFA |
Recreation, Indoor, except as listed below | ||
3 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | ||
Art gallery | 2 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
4 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | ||
1 per 5 fixed seats or 8 per 1,000 square feet of NFA if no fixed seats | 1 per 3 fixed seats or 12 per 1,000 square feet of NFA if no fixed seats | |
Recreation, Outdoor | ||
Restaurant/Bar | 5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | 14 per 1,000 square feet of NFA |
Retail Sales, as listed below | ||
3 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | 5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
3 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | 4 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
Heavy retail | 2 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | 4 per 1,000 square feet of NFA |
Wholesale | 1.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
Vehicle Sales/Rental | ||
INDUSTRIAL | ||
Heavy Industrial | 1 per employee plus 2.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
Light Industrial, except as listed below | 1.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | 1 per employee plus 2.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA |
Marijuana production | ||
Marijuana, processing | ||
Light Manufacturing, except as listed below | 1.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
2.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | ||
Research and Development | 2 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
Self-Service Storage | 0.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
Warehouse and Distribution | 0.05 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
Waste-Related Services | ||
Water-Oriented Industrial Uses | ||
Wholesale Trade | ||
PUBLIC, INSTITUTIONAL AND OPEN SPACE USES | ||
Agriculture | ||
Civic | ||
Parks, Plazas, Open Spaces, and Natural Areas | ||
Resource Extraction | ||
Utilities | ||
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Minimum Requirements. Parking space and aisle dimensions for parking facilities must meet the standards in Table 19.64.050.
Table 19.64.050
![]() The columns A—E below refer to the parking layout graphic above. Column A is measured in degrees and columns B—E are measured in feet. | ||||
A Parking Angle | B Space Width | C Space Length | D Aisle Width | E Curb Width |
0 (Parallel) | 8 | N/A | N/A | 23 |
30 | 9 | 18 | 11 | 18 |
45 | 9 | 20 | 13 | 12.7 |
60 | 9 | 21 | 18 | 10.5 |
90 (Perpendicular) | 9 | 19 | 26 | 9 |
B. Parking Space Length.
1. Parking spaces must be a minimum of 18 feet long and a maximum of 23 feet long.
2. Two feet of parking space length may overhang designated walking paths. See AMC 19.53.050(C)(1)(b) and 19.62.050(D)(3) for related walking path dimensional standards.
C. Compact Parking Spaces.
1. Up to 33 percent of required nonaccessible parking spaces may be designated as compact.
2. Compact parking spaces have a minimum space length of 15 feet and a minimum space width of eight feet.
3. Each compact parking space must be clearly identified by painting the word “COMPACT” in capital letters, a minimum of eight inches high, on the pavement at the base of the parking space and centered between the striping.
D. Alley Parking. When parking spaces located on a property are directly accessed from an alley, the alley right-of-way may be treated as the aisle per Table 19.64.050. The parking spaces must be located and angled to allow adequate turning space.
E. Large Vehicles. When parking lots may have substantial traffic by trucks or other large vehicles, the Director may establish larger minimum dimensions.
F. Alternative Standards. The Director may approve alternate designs not meeting these standards when a qualified transportation engineer demonstrates that the alternate design proposal meets current and accepted standards such as those maintained by the Institute of Transportation Engineers. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. For new development in the CBD zone, the minimum parking spaces required are 50 percent of that shown in Table 19.64.040.
B. Ground floor commercial uses in the CBD zone are exempt from the minimum parking requirements of this chapter.
C. Existing developments in mixed-use and industrial zones that change use or expand their net floor area by less than 50 percent are exempt from the minimum parking requirements of this chapter for the life of the building. Existing developments that expand their net floor area by 50 percent or more must meet the minimum requirements of this chapter. In no case may any new or expanded development exceed the maximum parking spaces allowed by this chapter, unless meeting the requirements of subsection (E) below.
D. Minimum off-street parking for uses in the C, MMU, LM, LM1, HM, MS, I, CM2, R3, R3A, and R4 zones may be reduced from the requirements of Table 19.64.040 with any of the following options:
1. The Director may allow up to a 50 percent reduction in minimum parking spaces if the reduction is supported by a parking study per AMC 19.64.020(H).
2. For nonresidential uses 5,000 gross square feet or larger, two parking spaces may be replaced by one space reserved for employee carpools. Use of this of provision is limited to a 10 percent reduction in total parking spaces as determined by the Director.
3. For nonresidential uses 5,000 gross square feet or larger, provide showers, changing rooms, and day-use lockers near long-term bicycle parking (see AMC 19.64.100 for related requirements). Use of this provision is limited to a five percent reduction in total parking spaces as determined by the Director.
4. For new residential uses with 20 or more dwelling units, three parking spaces may be replaced by one space reserved for a car-sharing provider. Use of this provision is limited to a 15 percent reduction in total parking spaces as determined by the Director. A long-term agreement between the property owner and a car-sharing provider must be approved by the Director. The agreement, along with a notice that the agreement is the basis for modified parking requirements under this chapter, must be recorded with the title to the property before a certificate of occupancy is issued.
5. The applicant may propose other transportation-related options that reduce parking demand in exchange for reduced minimum parking spaces if the Director determines they meet the purpose of this chapter.
E. Maximum off-street parking outside the CBD zone may be increased up to 25 percent from the requirements of Table 19.64.040 if the increase is supported by a parking study per AMC 19.64.020(H). For increases more than 25 percent, the Director may require any of the following as a condition of the increase:
1. For nonresidential uses 5,000 gross square feet or larger, provide spaces reserved for employee carpools.
2. For nonresidential uses 5,000 gross square feet or larger, provide showers, changing rooms, and day-use lockers near long-term bicycle parking (see AMC 19.64.100 for related requirements).
3. For nonresidential uses 5,000 square feet or larger, provide a designated passenger loading and unloading area. This area may be located on the street with approval of the Public Works Director or off street in conformance with the standards of AMC 19.62.060 and AMC Chapter 19.53, Private Driveways and Access.
4. For new residential uses with 20 or more dwelling units, provide spaces reserved for a car-sharing provider. A long-term agreement between the property owner and a car-sharing provider must be approved by the Director. The agreement, along with a notice that the agreement is the basis for modified parking requirements under this chapter, must be recorded with the title to the property before a certificate of occupancy is issued.
5. The applicant may propose other transportation-related conditions that reduce parking demand in exchange for increased maximum parking spaces if they meet the purpose of this chapter. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Applicability. Developments may pay a fee in lieu of off-street parking requirements established in AMC 19.64.040, provided the following conditions are met:
1. The city has adopted a parking fee-in-lieu plan with provisions for the rates, collection, and use of funds.
2. The development is new or an expansion of leasable area.
3. The development is in one of the following locations:
a. The CBD zone.
b. The OT zone east of M Avenue.
c. The C zone north of 12th Street.
d. The MS zone west of R Avenue.
e. The CM zone west of R Avenue.
B. Number of Spaces. Up to 50 percent of the minimum parking space requirements of this chapter may be waived if all provisions of this section are met. Additional reduction opportunities up to an additional 50 percent may be waived if supported by a parking study per AMC 19.64.020(H).
C. Fee Payment.
1. Rate. The fee in lieu per parking space must be set by the Director and be based upon the current market rates for acquiring, planning, designing, developing, financing, and maintaining public off-street parking facilities. The Director may maintain separate rate schedules based upon the different costs of surface parking facilities and structured parking facilities. The Director may apply the rate that is consistent with the city’s current public parking plan.
2. Timing. The fee must be paid prior to the issuance of a building permit.
D. Use of Fee.
1. Funds from the parking fee-in-lieu program must be deposited by the City of Anacortes Treasurer in a special fund to be designated the “Anacortes off-street parking cumulative fund.” The City Council may direct that other moneys be transferred into the fund to be used for the purposes of the fund.
2. The fund must be used exclusively for acquiring, planning, designing, developing, financing, and maintaining public off-street parking facilities by purchase or lease in the areas identified in subsection (A)(3) of this section. The number of parking spaces planned and provided must be at least equal to the number of parking spaces waived for private development under this section.
3. Parking facilities provided with this fee must be available for general public use at all times, including for long-term residential parking. Use of such parking facilities may require time-based fees, and other restrictions may apply, as determined by the city’s current parking plan. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Two or more buildings or uses may collectively provide the required off-street parking to achieve efficiency of vehicular and pedestrian circulation, economy of space, and a superior grouping of buildings or uses. Legally binding documents, such as a covenant or reciprocal easement agreement, or by participation in a local improvement district or parking cooperative or association, must be approved by the City Attorney and recorded with the Skagit County Auditor in the chain of title for the properties at expense of the applicant.
B. When cooperative parking facilities can be provided, the Director may reduce the on-site parking requirements based on the following criteria:
1. Peak demand occurs at distinctly different times as reported by the Institute of Transportation Engineers or found with a parking study per AMC 19.64.020(H).
2. The minimum required parking must be based upon the minimum amount necessary to satisfy the daily peak demand generated by the uses.
3. In no case may the minimum required parking for a multi-tenant facility be less than 60 percent of the total required for the individual uses.
C. Shared parking associated with multi-tenant retail and commercial facilities will be considered to be a shared parking facility. Lease agreements will satisfy the requirement for a sufficient legal document.
D. If any requirements for shared parking are violated, the affected property owners must provide a remedy satisfactory to the Director or provide the full amount of required off-street parking for each use, in accordance with the requirements of this chapter, unless a satisfactory alternative remedy is approved by the Director. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
When the city has received a shell building permit application, off-street parking requirements must be based on the possible tenant improvements or uses authorized by the zone designation and compatible with the limitations of the shell permit. When the range of possible uses results in different parking requirements, the Director must establish the amount of parking based on a likely range of uses. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Minimum Required.
1. The minimum number of short-term and long-term bicycle parking spaces required is in Table 19.64.100. For the purposes of this section, the Director must determine what use applies to the development.
2. If the formula for determining the number of bicycle parking spaces results in a fraction, the number of off-street parking spaces must be rounded to the nearest whole number with fractions of one-half or greater rounding up and fractions below one-half rounding down. If the formula results in a number less than one, then at least one bicycle parking space is required.
3. In the case of two or more uses on the same site, the total requirements for bicycle parking must be the sum of the requirements for each use computed separately.
Table 19.64.100
Bicycle parking spaces required.
Use | Minimum Short-Term Bicycle Parking Spaces Required | Minimum Long-Term Bicycle Parking Spaces Required |
|---|---|---|
Multifamily, group living | 0.5 per 10 dwelling units, and 2 minimum | 5 per 10 dwelling units, and 2 minimum |
Overnight lodging | 0.5 per 10 guest rooms, and 2 minimum | 0.3 per 10 guest rooms, and 2 minimum |
Place of assembly, civic, indoor recreation, day care | Fixed seats: 3 per 100 No fixed seats: 0.20 per 1,000 square feet of NLA 2 minimum | Fixed seats: 2 per 100 No fixed seats: 0.10 per 1,000 square feet of NLA 2 minimum |
Retail sales, general service, personal service | 0.25 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum | 0.10 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum |
Restaurant/bar | 0.5 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum | 0.10 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum |
Office | 0.10 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum | 0.20 per 1,000 square feet of NLA |
Medical | 0.05 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum | 0.05 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum |
Industrial, utilities | 0.05 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum | 0.05 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum |
Schools, pre-kindergarten and K-12 | 0.75 per 10 students of planned capacity, and 2 minimum | 1 per 10 employees and 1 per 20 students of planned capacity, and 2 minimum |
Colleges and universities | 1 per 10 students of planned capacity, and 2 minimum | 1 per 10 employees and 1 per 10 students of planned capacity, and 2 minimum |
B. Location.
1. Short-term bicycle parking spaces may be located in the areas described in subsections (B)(1)(a) and (b) of this section:
a. Indoors or outdoors on the development site.
b. On a public sidewalk or street outside the development, provided of all of the following requirements are met:
i. If on a sidewalk, the total sidewalk width (including any planting area or landscaped strip) is at least 12 feet wide in a mixed-use or industrial zone or at least eight feet wide in a residential zone.
ii. The bicycle parking spaces are within 100 feet of the development’s primary pedestrian entry.
iii. The Public Works Director certifies bicycle parking in the public right-of-way in the proposed location does not conflict with the transportation plan.
iv. The property owner maintains the bicycle parking in perpetuity per the terms of an encroachment permit recorded to the property title.
c. Short-term bicycle spaces on a public sidewalk or street for multiple businesses or properties are encouraged to be consolidated, where practical, to comply with the requirements of subsection (B)(1)(b) of this section.
2. Long-term bicycle parking spaces must be located on the development site.
C. Design.
1. The design of short-term and long-term bicycle parking spaces must substantially comply with the current “Essentials of Bike Parking,” maintained by the Association of Pedestrian and Bicycle Professionals, or similar standards approved for use by the Director.
2. Locating all bicycle parking spaces under weather protection cover is encouraged. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Parking Area Plans. Developments featuring new off-street parking areas must submit plans of such parking area(s) showing adjacent streets, proposed circulation of traffic, proposed stormwater management, lighting, landscaping, and fencing.
B. Parking Lot Access. Ingress and egress to the parking lot or area must be provided at locations approved by the City Engineer.
C. Surfacing and Grading. All required off-street parking area must be graded and surfaced to a standard comparable to the street which serves the parking area as determined by the City Engineer. Off-street parking areas must have dust-free, all-weather surfacing. Off-street parking areas must conform to city of Anacortes development standards.
D. Drainage. Drainage and erosion/sedimentation control facilities must be provided in accordance with city of Anacortes development standards.
E. Parking Space Markings. Asphalt- or concrete-surfaced parking areas must have parking spaces marked by surface paint lines or suitable substitute traffic marking material. Wheel stops or curbing are required where a parked vehicle would encroach on adjacent property, pedestrian access or circulation areas, right-of-way, or landscaped areas.
F. Traffic Control Devices. All traffic control devices such as parking strips, designated car stalls, directional arrow or signs, bull rails, curbs, and other developments must be installed and completed as shown on the approved plans. Hard-surfaced parking areas must use paint or similar devices to delineate car stalls and direction of traffic.
G. Curbing. All access and parking areas must use cast-in-place vertical curbs or functionally equivalent designs that provide pedestrian safety. Curbs may be cut to allow surface water runoff to enter low impact development best management practices. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. The property owner must maintain all off-street access and parking areas.
B. Maintenance must include:
1. Removal and replacement of dead and dying trees, grass and shrubs.
2. Removal of trash and weeds.
3. Repair and maintenance of traffic control devices, parking space striping, signs, light standards, fences, walls, surfacing materials, curbs, railings, landscaping, and stormwater best management practice elements.
4. Repair and maintenance of permanent stormwater best management practice elements. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Landscaping is necessary to provide a well-balanced, aesthetically pleasing environment for the residents of Anacortes. Specifically, these requirements are intended to accomplish the following:
A. Maintain and enhance property values.
B. Enhance the character and appearance of each neighborhood and the community.
C. Promote tree retention and the protection of existing native vegetation.
D. Implement tree and landscaping plans and programs adopted by the city.
E. Provide adequate buffers between differing land uses.
F. Define, break up, and screen parking areas to reduce potentially negative impacts on adjacent uses.
G. Improve the air quality and provide wildlife habitat.
H. Reduce erosion and stormwater runoff. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Applicability. This chapter applies to all required landscaping installed or altered on all properties.
B. For clarification on the relationship between the provisions in this division and other documents and codes, see AMC 19.60.020(B).
C. For the application of building additions and remodels and site improvements, see AMC 19.60.020(C).
D. For clarification on how the provisions of this division are applied, see AMC 19.60.030.
E. The Director may waive or relax these provisions in the HM, I, LM, MS, and CM2 zones depending on the type of use, number of anticipated employees and customers, and the site’s physical context. Greater numbers of employees and/or customers and higher visibility levels warrant a greater application of landscaping standards. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Minimum landscaped areas required in Tables 19.42.020 and 19.42.030 consist of grade level or elevated planting beds featuring trees, shrubs, flowers, ferns, groundcover, lawn grass, and other vegetation. Landscaped area may include xeriscape elements.
Exceptions and exemptions:
A. Developments on sites with a designated storefront block frontage are exempt.
B. Developments on sites featuring a building or buildings meeting storefront block frontage standards along the entire lot frontage are exempt.
C. Commercial or multifamily developments may use rooftop planting areas to provide required landscaped area, provided at least 50 percent of all required parking is located within and/or below the structure. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. A landscape plan is required for all new development containing landscaping, including landscaping within the adjacent right-of-way. The landscape plan must be submitted as part of the applicable review process within AMC 19.20.030.
B. Landscape plans must be completed by a Washington State licensed landscape architect or Washington certified professional horticulturalist (CPH) for multifamily and nonresidential developments with a development site area of 10,000 gross square feet or more.
C. Landscape plans must show the following elements:
1. Boundaries and dimensions of the site.
2. Location of existing and proposed streets, curbs, utility lines, sidewalks.
3. Location of buildings and structures, parking lots, driveways, loading areas, outdoor mechanical equipment, signs, refuse enclosures, overhead utilities, water meter location, grassy swales, parking lot lighting, and any plants or trees that are to remain on site.
4. The location and design of landscape areas to be preserved and planted, and plant list to include the location, number, size and type of plant material by botanical and common name.
5. North arrow and scale.
6. Irrigation system if a permanent or temporary system is proposed.
7. Planting details.
8. Name, address and phone number of the person preparing the plan.
9. Landscaping calculations in compliance with this chapter.
10. A maintenance plan for any infiltration-based stormwater best management practices (BMPs) built as part of the landscaping design, including the specifications and maintenance procedures of any soil amendments.
11. The location of existing trees to be preserved, or new trees to be planted, in conformance with AMC Chapter 16.50, Tree Preservation, when applicable.
D. No building permits or certificate of occupancy (CO) must be issued until a landscape plan is reviewed and approved and improvements installed per the approved landscape plan. A suitable guarantee may be provided if installation is not possible or advisable due to seasonal constraints. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Native and Naturalized Plant Species. New landscaping materials must include species native to the region or hardy, waterwise, and noninvasive species appropriate in the climatic conditions of the region (decorative annuals are an exception). Generally acceptable plant materials must be those identified as hardy in Zone 8b as described in the United States Department of Agriculture’s Plant Hardiness Zone Map. The selection of plant species should include consideration of soil type and depth, the amount of maintenance required, spacing, exposure to sun and wind, the slope and contours of the site, compatibility with existing native vegetation preserved on the site, water conservation where needed, soil infiltration capacity, and the impact of landscaping on visibility of the site for purposes of public safety and surveillance.
B. Tree Standards and Guidelines.
1. Tree heights may be called for within this chapter or elsewhere within this title:
a. Large tree: capable of growing 35 feet high or greater under normal growing conditions.
b. Medium tree: capable of growing over 15 feet high and less than 35 feet high under normal growing conditions.
c. Small tree: capable of growing up to 15 feet high under normal growing conditions.
2. Unless otherwise noted herein, required trees must meet the following standards at the time of planting:
a. Required deciduous trees (other than street trees) must be fully branched, have a minimum caliper of one and one-half inches (as measured six inches above the root ball), and a minimum height of six feet at the time of planting.
b. Required deciduous trees within parking areas must be a minimum caliper of one inch (as measured six inches above the root ball) and a minimum height of 10 feet at the time of planting.
c. Required evergreen trees must be fully branched and a minimum of six feet in height, measured from the treetop to the ground, at the time of planting.
C. Shrub Standard. Shrubs, except for ornamental grasses, must be a minimum of one-gallon size at the time of planting.
D. Groundcover Standards and Guidelines.
1. Groundcovers must be planted and spaced to result in total coverage of the required landscape area within three years, or as per recommendations by a Washington State licensed landscape architect or Washington certified professional horticulturalist as follows:
a. Four-inch pots at 18 inches on center.
b. One-gallon or greater sized containers at 24 inches on center.
c. A bed of flowers in place of groundcover plants. A reduction in the minimum size may be permitted if certified by a Washington State licensed landscape architect or Washington certified professional horticulturalist that the reduction must not diminish the intended effect or the likelihood the plants will survive.
2. Grass is acceptable as groundcover in landscaped areas, but generally not preferred for water conservation and maintenance purposes (lawn areas designed as play areas are an exception).
3. Groundcover areas must contain at least two inches of composted organic material at finished grade.
E. Tree and Plant Diversity.
1. If there are more than eight required trees, no more than 40 percent of them may be of one species.
2. If there are more than 24 required trees, no more than 20 percent of them may be of one species.
3. If there are more than 24 required shrubs, no more than 75 percent of them may be of one species.
F. Soil Augmentation and Mulching.
1. Existing soils must be augmented with a two-inch layer of fully composted organic material tilled a minimum of six inches deep prior to initial planting.
2. Landscape areas must be covered with at least two inches of mulch to minimize evaporation. Mulch must consist of organic materials such as bark chips and wood grindings or yard waste, sawdust, and/or manure that is fully composted. Washed rock can also be used as a mulch.
G. Landscape Installation Standards.
1. All required landscaping must be in-ground, except when in raised planters. Plant materials will be installed to current nursery industry standards.
2. Plant materials must be properly supported to ensure survival. Support devices such as guy wires or stakes must not interfere with vehicular or pedestrian movement. Where support is necessary, stakes, guy wires or other measures must be removed as soon as the plant can support itself.
3. Existing trees and plant materials to be retained must be protected during construction, such as by use of chain-link or other sturdy fence placed at the dripline of trees to be retained. Grading, topsoil storage, construction material storage, vehicles and equipment must not be allowed within the dripline of trees to be retained.
4. Installation of landscaping materials must take into consideration access to utility vaults, pedestals, and other public and private utility facilities.
5. Tree/Shrub Height and Location. The landscape plan should plan for the mature size of trees and major shrubs to avoid interference with windows, decks or lighting.
6. Trees must be protected by fencing until they are mature enough to withstand typical wildlife activity. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Below are the planting and design requirements for specific landscaping types. These landscaping types apply when required by different sections of code within this chapter and elsewhere in this division.
A. Type A Landscaping.
1. Purpose. Type A landscaping functions as a full screen and visual barrier. This landscaping is typically found between residential and nonresidential areas for screening unwanted views.
2. Screening Requirement. The selected plant materials and configuration must be able to screen 70 percent of the unwanted views within five years of planting and screen 100 percent of the unwanted views within six years of planting. This requirement must account for the size and characteristics of materials planted, their typical growth rate, and size at maturity.
3. Planting Requirements. Type A landscaping must minimally consist of the following:
a. Trees which are predominately evergreen (more than 50 percent).
b. Tree Size. A variety of tree sizes may be used, provided at least 70 percent are medium or large (see AMC 19.65.050(B)(1)). Trees must be planted at the following spacing standards (“on center” refers to the distance from other trees of any size):
i. Large trees must be spaced between 20 and 25 feet on center.
ii. Medium trees must be spaced between 15 and 20 feet on center.
iii. Small trees must be spaced between 10 and 15 feet on center.
c. Shrubs. Predominately evergreen provided at the rate of one shrub per 20 square feet of landscape strip.
d. Groundcover. Planted at a density to cover the buffer within three years.
e. Species Diversity. Trees and shrubs must comply with AMC 19.65.050(E).
DEPARTURES that vary from the planting requirements of this subsection (A)(3) will be considered, provided the proposal meets the screening requirement of subsection (A)(2) of this section.
Figure 19.65.060(A)
Type A landscaping standards.
![]() |
B. Type B Landscaping.
1. Purpose. Type B landscaping is a “filtered screen” that functions as a visual separator. This landscaping is typically found between differing types of residential development and used for screening unwanted views from the pedestrian environment.
2. Screening Requirement. The selected plant materials and configuration must meet the purpose of the standards within five years of planting. This requirement must account for the size and characteristics of materials planted, their typical growth rate, and size at maturity.
3. Planting Requirements. Type B landscaping must minimally consist of:
a. Trees which are at least 50 percent deciduous and at least 30 percent evergreen.
b. Tree Size. A variety of tree sizes may be used, provided at least 70 percent are medium or large (see AMC 19.65.050(B)(1)). Trees must be planted at the following spacing standards (“on center” refers to the distance from other trees of any size):
i. Large trees must be spaced between 20 and 25 feet on center.
ii. Medium trees must be spaced between 15 and 20 feet on center.
iii. Small trees must be spaced between 10 and 15 feet on center.
c. Shrubs. Provided at the rate of one shrub per 20 square feet of landscape strip and spaced no more than eight feet on center.
d. Groundcover. Planted at a density to cover the buffer within three years.
e. Species diversity: Trees and shrubs must comply with AMC 19.65.050(E).
DEPARTURES that vary from the planting requirements of this subsection (B)(3) will be considered, provided the proposal meets the screening requirement of subsection (B)(2) of this section.
Figure 19.65.060(B)
Type B landscaping standards.
![]() |
C. Type C Landscaping.
1. Purpose. Type C landscaping is a “see-through screen” that functions as a partial visual separator to soften the appearance of parking areas and building elevations. This landscaping is typically found along lot frontages or between multifamily developments.
2. Screening Requirement. The selected plant materials and configuration must meet the purpose of the standards within five years of planting. This requirement must account for the size and characteristics of materials planted, their typical growth rate, and size at maturity.
3. Planting Requirements. Type C landscaping must minimally consist of:
a. Trees which are at least 70 percent deciduous.
b. Tree Size. A variety of tree sizes may be used, provided at least 70 percent are medium or large (see AMC 19.65.050(B)(1)). Trees must be planted at the following spacing standards (“on center” refers to the distance from other trees of any size):
i. Large trees must be spaced between 20 and 25 feet on center.
ii. Medium trees must be spaced between 15 and 20 feet on center.
iii. Small trees must be spaced between 10 and 15 feet on center.
c. Shrubs. Provided at the rate of one shrub per 20 square feet of landscape strip and spaced no more than eight feet on center.
d. Groundcover. Planted at a density to cover the buffer within three years.
e. Species Diversity. Trees and shrubs must comply with AMC 19.65.050(E).
f. Maintain trees and shrubs to maximize pedestrian visibility (generally between three and eight feet above grade).
DEPARTURES that vary from the planting requirements of this subsection (C)(3) will be considered, provided the proposal meets the screening requirement of subsection (C)(2) of this section.
Figure 19.65.060(C)
Type C landscaping standards.
![]() |
D. Type D Landscaping.
1. Type D landscaping refers to all other landscaped areas that do not qualify as Type A, B, or C landscaping, a hedge, or a rain garden. While native and low-maintenance trees and shrubs are encouraged in these areas, lawn areas may be used for recreational or design purposes. These areas may also include flower beds and perennial beds.
2. Type D landscaping may include any combination of plant materials, provided they comply with the plant materials standards in AMC 19.65.050.
E. Type E Landscaping—Low Hedge. A low hedge is intended to function as an attractive visual divider of space rather than a visual buffer between uses and properties. To qualify as a hedge landscaping type, the planting must be at least 30 inches wide and 30 inches tall. The hedge includes plant materials that typically grow no taller than five feet at maturity or are maintained between 30 inches and 48 inches tall.
Figure 19.65.060(E)
Low hedge examples.
![]() |
F. Type F Landscaping—Rain Garden.
1. A rain garden is a nonengineered planted depression that collects, absorbs, and filters rain water runoff from impervious areas. They are sized to accommodate temporary ponding and are not meant to be permanent ponds. They can also function as an attractive visual divider of space. To qualify as a rain garden, the following elements must be included:
a. Garden is located and designed to capture impervious area runoff.
b. Six- to 12-inch ponding depth.
c. Two- to three-inch mulch layer.
d. Gradual side slopes (typically 2:1 maximum).
e. Overflow design elements with measures to prevent erosion.
f. Generous plantings of a variety of small trees, shrubs, groundcovers, and grasses. Select plants suitable for the planting zones within the garden and around the perimeter.
Refer to the current Rain Garden Handbook for Western Washington for further guidance on rain garden location, design, planting, construction, and maintenance. Compliance with the Stormwater Management Manual may alter these requirements.
2. The applicability of rain gardens in site design will be determined by project size and flow control exemptions based upon minimum requirement No. 5 of the Western Washington Phase II municipal stormwater permit.
Figure 19.65.060(F)
Rain garden example.
![]() |
(Ord. 4022 § 1 (Att. A), 2022; Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Required Buffer Standards. Screening between certain uses may be called for in Table 19.65.070(A) below or elsewhere in this title. Interpretation of Table 19.65.070(A):
1. Where mature trees and vegetation exist within the required buffer areas, the preservation of said mature trees and vegetation may be preferable to new plant materials. The Director may require any of the following to better ensure the survival of existing mature trees and vegetation:
a. Augment existing plantings with new plant materials to meet the purpose of the standards,
b. Require wider buffers to better ensure the survival of existing mature trees and vegetation. This must be accompanied by use of a buffer averaging approach in which the buffer may be reduced in other locations to achieve, on average, the minimum buffer width required in Table 19.65.070(A) or elsewhere in this title.
c. Other supplemental planting conditions.
2. The letters A, B, C, D, E, and F refer to the landscape types described in AMC 19.65.060. Where more than one buffer type is referenced in a cell, one of the subject buffer types is required. The term “all” means that any of the landscaping types may be used.
3. The term “fence” refers to the requirement of a six-foot-high sight-screening fence. Such fences must comply with the provisions of AMC Chapter 19.66, Fences, Walls, and Hedges.
4. Where the cells are empty, there are no landscaping buffer requirements for the particular situation.
5. The numbers refer to the minimum required width of the required landscaping buffer.
6. Where superscript numbers are included in a cell, see the corresponding note matching the number below the table.
7. The screening elements must extend along the entire property line between the uses/properties except where precluded by structures, driveways, or similar obstructions.
8. Where the developing use is across the street from an existing abutting use or zone, only the buffer type listed for the abutting street is required.
9. DEPARTURES. Alternative buffer treatments may be approved per AMC 19.20.220 for any of the buffer types required below, provided they meet the purpose of this chapter.
Table 19.65.070(A)
Required buffer types.
Developing use | Existing abutting uses and zones | |||||
Street | R1, R2, R2A zones1 | R3, R3A, R4, R4A and OT zones or Multifamily use | C, CBD, MMU and CM zones1 | HM, MS, CM2, I, LM and LM1 zones | P, parks and trails | |
Multifamily | Note2 | Fence plus BC—5' | Fence plus ABC—10' | |||
Low-intensity nonresidential use6 | Note2 | Fence plus ABC—5' | Fence or AB—5' | Note5 | ||
Moderate-intensity nonresidential use7 | Note2 | Fence plus ABC—10' | Fence plus ABC—5' | Note5 | ||
High-intensity nonresidential use8 | Note2 | Fence plus ABC—15' | Fence plus ABC—10' | Note5 | ||
Outdoor storage | Note2 plus A—10' | Fence plus ABC—10' | Fence plus ABC—10' | Fence or A—5' or B—10' | Fence plus ABC—5' or A—10' | |
Note2 | Fence plus ABC—20' | Fence plus ABC—20' | Fence plus ABC—5' or A—10' | Fence plus ABC—5' or A—10' | Fence plus ABC—10' or AB—20' | |
Notes:
1Where the abutting use meets the definition of multifamily, the developing use is subject to the landscape buffer type under the multifamily use column.
2For landscaping between developing uses and streets, see the applicable block frontage map for the property in AMC 19.61.040 and the corresponding block frontage standards in AMC Chapter 19.61, Block Frontage Standards. Multifamily uses in residential zones are subject to the landscape block frontage standards in AMC 19.61.070.
3A paved or gravel pathway separating the properties/uses. Landscaping planters at least three feet wide separating the pathway from buildings (or other effective visual transitions between the pathway and building as determined by the Director) are required.
4For developing multifamily uses adjacent to parks and trails, the Director may adjust requirements to emphasize buffer types that enhance visibility between the developing use or focus more on visual screening, depending on the context of the park or trail and type of developing use.
5See AMC 19.61.120 for trail block frontage standards.
6“Low-intensity nonresidential use” is a small-scale commercial use or development (as defined in AMC Chapters 19.44 through 19.46 ). This includes uses and/or developments with less than 25,000 square feet of gross floor area and containing no outdoor storage along a site edge requiring a landscape buffer in this section.
7“Moderate-intensity nonresidential use” includes uses and/or developments that are moderate in scale and intensity. This includes uses and/or developments that do not qualify as a low-intensity nonresidential use (either they are too large or have some outdoor storage areas along the site edge requiring a landscape buffer in this section) or a high-intensity nonresidential use (not large enough or do not meet the use qualifications).
8“High-intensity nonresidential use” includes uses and/or developments with over 120,000 square feet of gross floor area or are classified as an industrial use per AMC Chapter 19.45, Industrial Uses.
B. Supplemental Buffer Standards.
1. For screening requirements for service areas and mechanical equipment for nonresidential and multifamily development, see AMC 19.62.070.
2. Required buffer vegetation must be planted within the property boundaries. However, additional plantings above the minimum requirement may extend into the right-of-way per subsection F of this section.
3. The height of any screen material required by this chapter in the vicinity of a point of ingress and egress may not exceed two and one-half feet in height within the clear-vision triangle (AMC 19.69.070).
C. Trees and Block Frontage Landscaping.
1. Nonresidential and multifamily developments must include landscaping between the sidewalk and building or parking areas in conformance with this chapter. Exceptions are allowed for pedestrian and vehicular access, pedestrian-oriented space, utility elements, and permitted signage.
2. Where buildings are set back at least 15 feet from a street property line, trees must be planted at an average of 30 feet apart in such planting areas, with groundcover or shrubs used liberally.
DEPARTURES may be considered, provided alternative treatments meet the purposes of this chapter.
3. Trees utilized in these planting areas must minimize conflict with underground and overhead utilities. Trees to be utilized must be from the approved list of recommended plant materials or an approved equivalent.
D. Parking Lot Landscaping.
1. Purpose. The purpose of parking lot landscape development is to soften the visual effect created by large expanses of barren asphalt.
2. Required Area. Planting areas in new parking areas with 20 or more spaces or in upgraded or improved parking areas with 20 or more spaces must constitute at least five percent of the parking area.
3. Minimum Width and Length. Planting areas must have a minimum average width of 10 feet (measured inside the curb) and must be the same length as the parking stall or column.
4. Planting Type. Type C landscaping must be used in required planting areas. Rain gardens, or other vegetated LID BMPs, may be integrated into planting strips, provided they integrate the same number of trees as for Type C landscaping.
5. Distribution. Landscaped areas must be distributed throughout the parking lot.
6. Parking Lot Perimeters.
a. For parking lots adjacent to public streets, use Type C landscaping at a width equal to or greater than the minimum building setback specified for the applicable block frontage type specified in AMC Chapter 19.61, Block Frontage Standards.
DEPARTURES to this standard will be considered via AMC 19.20.220, provided they meet the purpose of the standards noted above.
b. For parking lots along internal lot lines, use Type A, B, or C landscaping at least 10 feet deep, except where a greater buffer width is required per the standards in subsections A and B of this section. Where recorded cooperative parking agreements are in place between adjacent properties, sites must be exempted from the subject parking lot landscaping buffer.
DEPARTURES to this standard will be considered via AMC 19.20.220, provided they meet the purpose of the standards noted above. Examples of acceptable departures may include decorative low walls with landscaping, decorative elevated planters, landscaping with a trellis, a shared-access drive, or a shared pathway.
Figure 19.65.070(D)
Examples of alternative parking lot landscaping buffers.
![]() |
![]() |
E. Existing Site Vegetation.
1. General. Applicants are encouraged to retain existing native vegetation, including indigenous shrubs and herbaceous plants, and significant trees on the subject property. “Significant tree” means deciduous or evergreen trees at least six inches in diameter at a point five feet above the ground.
2. Bonus for Retention. For each significant tree as defined in subsection (E)(1) of this section, the applicant may measure the canopy of the tree and receive a bonus of 200 percent of the square footage of the canopy to count as landscaped area for the purpose of complying with the standards for the applicable zone in AMC Chapter 19.42, Form and Intensity Standards; provided, that the soil within the dripline of the tree is undisturbed, root systems are protected from damage, and approved methods are utilized to ensure proper irrigation.
3. Required Review. The city will review the proposed retention of significant existing vegetation as part of the application for development. Any bonus for retention must be approved only after on-site inspection.
4. If any tree used for bonus credit is removed or lost, it must be replaced promptly with the same species, or an approved substitute under AMC 19.65.080(C), at a ratio of three replacement trees at least 12 feet in height for each bonus tree lost.
F. Use of Right-of-Way. In addition to the required planting areas above, landscaping of excess (unused) street and alley right-of-way and/or LID stormwater BMPs is encouraged.
1. Excess right-of-way is defined as the area of an undeveloped alley or street right-of-way, or the area between the property line and the street pavement, whether or not it contains a sidewalk.
2. All landscaping materials proposed to be installed in the right-of-way must be reviewed to ensure that traffic safety considerations are met and future sidewalks can be added if they do not currently exist.
3. Irrigation or sprinkling systems are subject to the standards in AMC 19.65.090.
4. Maintenance of landscaping in the right-of-way must be the responsibility of the adjacent property owner; provided, however, that nothing in this section must create or imply any interest of the property owner in the excess right-of-way; and provided further, that in the event the city must undertake to utilize the excess right-of-way, any landscaping must be removed by the property owner at their sole expense or, if not so removed, may be destroyed by the city.
G. Special Fire Department Standards.
1. Landscaping in the vicinity of any fire hydrant, Fire Department sprinkler connection or standpipe connection should not prevent such equipment from being immediately discernible nor in any other manner deter or hinder the Fire Department from gaining immediate access to the equipment. Subsections (G)(2) and (3) of this section are guidelines for the landscaping around the equipment, with final approval from the City Fire Marshal.
2. Fire Hydrants.
a. Fire hydrants must be free from obstruction on all sides by a minimum clearance of three feet.
b. Fire hydrants along streets, driveways, parking lots, fire access routes (fire lanes), or at intersections must be visible for at least 100 feet in all directions along such streets, driveways, access routes or intersections. No plants or shrubs with a height of over 18 inches and no tree with branches or foliage below five feet must be allowed in this sight visibility area.
3. Sprinkler and Standpipe Connections.
a. Fire Department connections for sprinklers and standpipes must be free from obstructions on all sides by a minimum clearance of three feet.
b. When a Fire Department connection is over 25 feet from a street, driveway, parking lot or fire access route, there must be maintained a clear path with minimum width of three feet between the Fire Department connection and the street, driveway, parking lot or fire access route.
H. Stormwater detention ponds must have at least 10-foot setbacks from adjacent property lines and must be landscaped in compliance with this chapter. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. The owners of the property and their agents, heirs, or assigns must be responsible for maintaining all required landscaping and screening areas in a healthy, growing condition.
B. All landscaping and screening areas must be maintained reasonably free of weeds and trash, must be treated for pests/diseases in accordance with the approved landscape plan, and must be maintained so as to prevent mulch, straw, dirt, or other materials from washing onto streets, sidewalks, and adjoining properties.
C. Any dead, unhealthy, or missing vegetation, or vegetation disfigured by severe or excessive pruning, unusual weather occurrence or natural catastrophe, or other natural occurrence such as damage by wild or domestic animals must be replaced with equivalent vegetation that conforms to the plant materials and installation standards in AMC 19.65.050, other applicable standards of this title, and the approved site and/or subdivision plan.
D. Any engineered soil amendments must be maintained and replaced as needed to continue the original function of stormwater best management practices. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
The purpose of this standard is to ensure that plants will survive the critical establishment period when they are most vulnerable due to lack of watering.
All required landscaped areas in the city must comply with at least one of the following:
A. A permanent built-in irrigation system with an automatic controller will serve the proposed landscape area, and the system will be installed and operational before the city grants an occupancy permit or final inspection for the development.
B. A temporary irrigation system will serve the proposed landscape area, provided the applicant can successfully demonstrate that the proposed temporary irrigation system will provide sufficient water to ensure that the plant materials to be planted will survive installation and, once established, will survive without watering other than natural rainfall.
C. A permanent or temporary irrigation system will not serve the proposed landscape area, provided:
1. The Director finds the landscape area otherwise fulfills the requirements of this section; and
2. The applicant submits all of the following with the site plan application:
a. A statement from a Washington State licensed landscape architect or Washington certified professional horticulturalist (CPH) certifying that the materials to be planted will survive without watering other than natural rainfall.
b. A plan for monitoring the survival of required vegetation on the approved site plan for at least one year and for detection and replacement of required vegetation that does not survive with like-kind material or other material approved by the reviewing authority.
c. A statement from the applicant agreeing to install an irrigation system if the reviewing authority finds one is needed to ensure survival of required vegetation, based on the results of the monitoring plan. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
In the event that landscaping improvements cannot be installed prior to a formal certificate of occupancy, a cash deposit, letter of credit or other assurance acceptable to the city equal to 150 percent of the estimated construction costs must be required. Such deposit must be accompanied by a letter which stipulates completion of all landscape development no later than the next autumn planting season following issuance of the certificate of occupancy or date of final approval, whichever is later. If these conditions are not met, the city may use the deposit to install the landscaping. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
The purpose of this chapter is to:
A. Protect life and secure property while protecting the public from hazardous fences and walls.
B. Increase visibility in appropriate circumstances by using the principles of Crime Prevention Through Environmental Design (CPTED) to increase public safety and to deter crime.
C. Promote and enhance Anacortes neighborhoods as walkable places and reduce impacts on the pedestrian experience that may result from taller fences and walls. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Height and Design Standards by Location.
1. Table 19.66.030 provides height and transparency standards for fences, walls, and hedges for residential uses and zones. Figure 19.66.030(A) provides clarification on the location of fences, walls, and hedges associated with the standards in Table 19.66.030.
Figure 19.66.030(A)
Clarification on the location of fences, walls, and hedges associated with the standards in Table 19.66.030.
![]() |
Table 19.66.030
Height standards for fences, walls, and hedges in residential zones by location.
Location | Maximum height | Maximum height for homes with accessory day care uses | |
|---|---|---|---|
Front | Within the street setback | 42'' | 54'', and any portion above 42'' must be at least 50 percent transparent |
Elsewhere between the facade and street property line | 7' See subsection (A)(2) of this section for exceptions for lots on the north side of Oakes Avenue between D Avenue and Ferry Terminal Road. | 7' | |
Side | Corner lot—side fence, within 5' of any street property line | 42'' | 54'', and any portion above 42'' must be at least 50 percent transparent |
Corner lot—side fence, more than 5' from any street property line | 7' | 7' | |
Along/near any internal side property line | 7' | 7' | |
Rear | Along/near rear property line with or without an abutting alley | 7' | 7' |
Through lots—within 5' of a street property line | 42'' | 54'' within 5' of the property line, and any portion above 42'' must be at least 50 percent transparent | |
Through lots—5' or more from street property line | 7' See subsection (A)(2) of this section for exceptions for lots on the north side of Oakes Avenue between D Avenue and Ferry Terminal Road. | 7' | |
2. The following standards apply to all lots created after adoption of this section on the north side of Oakes Avenue between D Avenue and Ferry Terminal Road. Fences, walls, and hedges are limited in height to 42 inches for the entire street setback or rear setback for through lots where such lots abut Oakes Avenue. Exceptions may be made to the height and design of landscaping hedges through the subdivision approval process, provided the design allows for visual access to the water from Oakes Avenue. Notes must be placed on the final plat indicating the applicable fence standard and any applicable exceptions.
Figures 19.66.030(B) through (D) below provide acceptable and unacceptable examples of fences, walls, and hedges.
Figure 19.66.030(B)
Acceptable fences, walls, and hedges for the street setback for residential zones.
![]() The left image uses a picket fence. The right image uses a low wrought iron fence. |
![]() The left image uses a low masonry retaining wall and the right image uses a low hedge. |
Figure 19.66.030(C)
Unacceptable fences, walls, and hedges for the street setback for residential zones.
Figure 19.66.030(D)
Acceptable and unacceptable side fences on corner lots in residential zones or along through lots where the rear setback abuts a street.
![]() The left example is a low picket fence. Taller fences like that in the middle image are acceptable along the side and rear setback, but are not allowed within five feet of a property line. The right image shows an acceptable example where the fence is set back from the sidewalk to allow space for landscaping. |
B. Fences for Accessory Recreational Uses and Nonresidential Uses in a Residential Zone. Fences or walls used in conjunction with an accessory to a residential use must meet the following requirements:
1. Fences that are used to enclose recreational facilities accessory to multifamily uses may be up to 12 feet in height, provided they are not built within the minimum required setbacks.
2. The Director may allow taller fences (than referenced in Table 19.66.030) for permitted nonresidential uses in residential zones, provided they are necessary for security purposes and the design of the fences meets the purposes of the standards. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Fences within the Street Setback.
1. Fences within the street setback area are subject to applicable block frontage standards in AMC Chapter 19.61, Block Frontage Standards.
2. Supplemental Street Setback Standards. Fences less than 10 feet from a property line are limited to 42 inches in height. Exceptions:
a. Day care uses are allowed fences up to 54 inches tall in this area, provided the portion of the fence above 42 inches is at least 30 percent transparent.
b. Within the industrial zones, this provision only applies to sites across the street from the CBD zone or a residential zone.
B. Fences may be required along the side and/or rear property lines as a required buffer feature, depending on the proposed use and existing abutting uses and zone per Table 19.65.070(A).
C. The maximum height for fences and walls is seven feet. The Director may allow taller fences, provided they are necessary for functional and security purposes and the design of the fences meets the purposes of the standards. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Fence, wall, hedge, and rockery height must be measured from the finished grade to the top of the fence as shown in Figure 19.66.050. Where fence, walls or hedges feature varying heights of finished grade on opposite sides of the fence, wall or hedge, then the height must be measured from the side with the lower grade. Fence posts may exceed the height of the top rail by up to 12 inches. For sloped sites, the average height between posts may be used, provided no portion of the fence exceeds the height limit by one foot.
Figure 19.66.050
Height measurements of fences and walls on sloped sites.
![]() | For sloped sites, the average height between posts may be used, provided no portion of the fence exceeds the height limit by 12 inches. |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. No fence, wall, or other such structure, or hedge over 36 inches in height, may be placed within three feet of any dwelling unit where such fence, wall, or hedge substantially interferes with access to such dwelling unit for fire and public safety purposes or substantially impairs the ability of an occupant of a dwelling unit to use windows and doors as emergency exits.
B. Where a fence, wall, or hedge forms a complete enclosure of an area adjacent to a dwelling or dwelling unit, a gate must be provided for emergency egress. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Chain-link fences are prohibited in the following areas:
1. All nonindustrial zones within 10 feet of a street right-of-way.
2. Industrial zones when across the street from the CBD zone or residential zones and within 10 feet of a street right-of-way.
3. Between a street right-of-way and the front of any residential building.
DEPARTURES to subsections (A)(1) and (2) of this section per AMC 19.20.220 will be allowed where the design of the fence and landscape buffer treatment meets the purposes of the standards.
B. Electric fences are prohibited in all zones except R1 zones and may be allowed only by the Director for the purpose of containing animals in a permitted area. No electric fence may be allowed or maintained which does not conform to state electrical codes.
C. Barbed wire and razor wire fences are prohibited in all zones.
Exceptions may be granted in the following conditions:
1. When barbed wire fences are preexisting and are used to contain animals kept on a property continuously since 1999. In such cases, at such time as animals are not kept in the fenced area for 90 days or more, the right to maintain these existing fences must be considered extinguished, and these fences must be removed within 30 days.
2. For sensitive public facilities operated by public agencies. The facility operator must demonstrate security needs cannot be reasonably met with other fence types. The Director must consider the facility’s location, hours of operation, volume of public visitors, and neighboring uses. Higher visitor volumes and visibility to the general public warrant greater application of the prohibition. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Building Permit. A building permit is required for retaining walls or rockeries not exempted from permit by Section 105.2 of the International Building Code or the International Residential Code, AMC Chapter 19.14, International Codes.
B. Drainage Control. Drainage control must be provided for the area behind retaining walls and rockeries.
C. Retaining Wall and Rockery Terracing Standards.
1. This subsection (C) applies to any combination of constructed retaining walls or constructed rockeries located within a required setback and used to protect a cut or cuts or used to raise grade and protect a fill slope.
2. If the total height of the retaining wall or rockery exceeds five feet, the retaining wall or rockery must be terraced as shown in Figure 19.66.080(C).
DEPARTURES for alternative terracing dimensions will be considered where natural topographic or geologic features make compliance with this section infeasible.
3. The Director may require the retaining walls or rockeries to be designed by a structural engineer if drainage issues, unstable soils, or other structural concerns are present.
Figure 19.66.080(C)
Terracing standards for retaining walls and rockeries.
![]() Terraced retaining wall example |
D. Standards for Fences on and near Retaining Walls and Rockeries.
1. Retaining Walls or Rockeries Less Than Five Feet in Total Height.
a. Fences may be located on top of retaining walls or rockeries, provided the maximum fence height complies with Table 19.66.030.
2. Retaining Walls or Rockeries Five Feet in Total Height or Greater.
a. In required rear and side setbacks only, a fence may be placed on top of retaining walls and rockeries, provided the total combined height of the retaining wall or rockery and the fence is less than 12 feet.
b. In all required setbacks, the total combined height of the retaining wall or rockery and the fence may be 12 feet or greater, provided the fence is set back at least five feet from the edge of the retaining wall or rockery.
Figure 19.66.080(D)
Standards for fences on and near retaining walls.
![]() |
E. Standards for Large-Scale Manufactured Blocks Used for Retaining Walls (e.g., Ecology Blocks or Jersey Barriers).
1. Such blocks are prohibited for construction of retaining walls in all residential zones, the CBD zone, and the C zone.
2. In all other zones, such blocks may be used for retaining walls, provided retaining walls greater than four feet in height incorporate decorative materials, stamped patterns, or other treatments which create visual interest approved by the Director. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
The purpose of this chapter is to:
A. Regulate the number, size, placement and physical characteristics of signs and sign structures.
B. Promote and protect the public health, welfare, and safety by regulating existing and proposed outdoor signs of all types.
C. Promote economic development of the city’s business districts and corridors.
D. Ensure that signs are compatible with the desired character of Anacortes and its various districts and corridors.
E. Enhance and protect property values, the local economy, and the quality of life by preserving and enhancing the appearance of the streetscape.
F. Recognize free speech rights by regulating signs in a content-neutral manner.
G. Promote the free flow of vehicular traffic and protect pedestrians and motorists from injury and property damage caused by, or which may be fully or partially attributable to, cluttered, distracting, and/or illegal signage.
H. Prevent property damage, personal injury, and litter from signs which are improperly constructed, poorly maintained, or of flimsy materials.
I. Provide consistent sign design standards. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Applicability. This chapter applies to all signs erected or altered after the effective date of the ordinance codified in this chapter, except for those signs provided in subsection C of this section.
B. Interpretation.
1. This chapter is not intended to, and does not, restrict speech on the basis of its content, viewpoint, or message.
2. Any classification of signs in this chapter that permits speech by reason of the type of sign, identity of the sign owner, or otherwise must also be interpreted to allow noncommercial speech on the sign.
3. No part of this chapter may be construed to favor commercial speech over noncommercial speech.
4. To the extent any provision of this chapter is ambiguous, the term must be interpreted not to regulate on the basis of the content of the message.
C. Exemptions. The following signs are exempted from the regulations of this chapter:
1. Traffic signs, signals, wayfinding signs, and other traffic control devices erected by the city or other public authority.
2. Public notices pertaining to public health or safety issues, or for notification of legal or legislative action erected by the city or other public authority.
3. Permanent commemorative or memorial plaques and building nameplates less than six square feet in size, cornerstones, and other building identification markings carved into the building materials and which are integral parts of the structure. Signs that advertise the name of the building and not associated with the name of any individual business are addressed in AMC 19.67.090(A)(5).
Figure 19.67.020(C)(3)
Building nameplate example.
![]() |
4. Signs within buildings, provided they are not legible from a distance of more than three feet beyond the building on which the sign is located.
5. Incidental signs intended for public information or convenience and which consist of no more than two square feet per sign face. These may include restroom signs, hours of operation signs, address numbers, help wanted signs, credit card signs, and similar.
6. The American flag, state of Washington flag, and other political or special purpose flags that are not intended to contribute to a commercial advertising display.
7. Wall graphics of an artistic nature and that do not conform to the definition of “sign.”
8. Noncommercial speech signs meeting the provisions in AMC 19.67.100.
9. Signs not readable from public or private right-of-way or waterway.
10. Signs intended for general public information, such as a bulletin board/kiosk, that accommodate changeable copy such as private or public notices, special event information, and other short-term messages at a scale suitable for pedestrians and not intended to be read by passing motorists, and not for commercial advertising purposes.
11. Holiday and community special event decorations that do not display a commercial message.
12. Signs on athletic fields and scoreboards intended for on-premises viewing.
13. Signs located in public parks, public trails and designated public open space, including any such parks, trails and open space open to the public, whether owned and maintained by the city or by another entity.
14. Signs located on any other city-owned property not specifically addressed in this chapter.
15. Point-of-purchase advertising displays such as product dispensers.
16. Any sign on a vehicle, unless such vehicle is regularly parked in any prominently visible location from the public right-of-way or other public space for the primary purpose of attracting public attention to the sign, which is prohibited pursuant to AMC 19.67.040(A)(8). (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
“A-board” means a temporary, portable, double-sided sign of basic self-supporting design. A-board signs may also be referred to as “A-frame” or “sandwich board” signs.
“Advertise” means to describe or draw attention to a product, service, or event in a public medium in order to promote sales or attendance.
“Building-mounted sign” means a sign affixed to a building, painted directly on a wall, or erected against the wall of a building.
“Conforming sign” means a sign which meets the specifications of this chapter.
“Copy” means the graphic content or message of a sign.
“Feather sign” means a temporary and portable sign made of lightweight materials that is prone to move in the wind, and that contains a harpoon-style pole or staff that is driven into the ground or supported by means of an individual stand. This definition includes such signs of any shape including flutter, bow, teardrop, rectangular, shark, and U-shaped.
“Freestanding sign” means a permanent sign anchored directly to the ground or supported by one or more posts, columns, or other vertical structures or supports, and not attached to or dependent for support from any building.
“Incidental sign” means a sign depicting products, services, or activities directly related to the business within. These are permitted, provided the incidental sign is not on an A-board or a sign on the marquee or a sign under the marquee.
“Internal wayfinding sign” means a type of freestanding sign used to aid customers in circulation within parking lots of commercial uses. These signs could come in the form of monument, pylon, post and arm, or wall sign types.
“Marquee/awning sign” means a type of building-mounted sign that is either attached to, affixed to, or painted on a marquee, awning, or canopy.
“Monument sign” means a type of freestanding sign which is attached to the ground by means of a wide base of solid appearance.
“Permanent sign” means a stationary sign permanently attached to the ground or to a structure.
“Pole sign” means a type of freestanding sign supported by one vertical pylon, and subject to the same regulations as a freestanding sign.
“Portable sign” means a nonpermanent, easily movable sign.
“Post and arm sign” means a type of freestanding sign supported by a post and arm.
“Projecting sign” means a type of building-mounted sign extending outward from the face of the building.
“Pylon sign” means a type of freestanding sign mounted on two posts.
“Real estate signs” means signs used for the purpose of marketing real property as opposed to identifying place of business.
“Sign” means any communication device, structure, or fixture which is intended to identify a building, use, business, or event; or to promote the sale of products, goods or services using graphics, letters, figures, symbols, trademarks or written copy. Painted wall designs or patterns which do not represent a product, service or registered trademark, and which do not identify the user, are not considered signs.
“Sign copy” means any graphic, word, numeral, symbol, insignia, text, sample, model, device or combination thereof which is primarily intended to advertise, identify, or notify.
“Standing sign” means a double-sided, portable sign mounted on a pedestal.
“Temporary signs” means conforming signs permitted for a specified period of time.
“Under-canopy sign” means a type of building-mounted sign attached to the underside of an awning, canopy, balcony or arcade.
“Wall sign” means a type of building-mounted sign painted directly on the wall, attached to, or erected against the wall of a building or structure with the exposed face of the sign parallel to the plane of such wall.
“Window sign” means a sign that can be observed by the general public as displayed in or applied to the transparent or translucent window and door areas of a building. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Sign Location Restrictions. Except where specifically authorized by this chapter, signs are prohibited in the locations described below. Prohibited signs are subject to removal (except nonconforming signs as defined by this chapter) by the city at the owner’s expense.
1. Any temporary or permanent freestanding sign located within or projecting over a city right-of-way or within five feet of a city right-of-way, unless otherwise noted in this chapter.
2. Any sign attached to any public utility pole, structure or street light, tree, fence, fire hydrant, bridge, curb, sidewalk, park bench, statue, memorial, or other location on public property, except those signs approved as part of a special event permit on city property or banner signs permitted by the city on light poles in certain zones within the city. Nothing in this section must be construed to prohibit a person from holding a sign while located on public property so long as the person holding the sign is located on public property determined to be a traditional public forum and does not block ingress to and egress from buildings or create a safety hazard by impeding travel on sidewalks, bike and vehicle lanes, and trails.
3. Any sign which, by reason of its location, will obstruct the view of any authorized traffic sign, signal, or other traffic control device or which by reason of shape, color, or position interferes with or could be confused with any authorized traffic signal or device.
4. Any sign which is placed so as to prevent or inhibit free ingress to or egress from any door, window, or any exit way required by the building and/or fire code currently in effect.
5. Any commercial, advertising, or business sign that is not located on the premises of the business to which it refers.
7. No portable or temporary sign may be placed on the front or face of a building or on any premises except as authorized in AMC 19.67.110, Temporary sign standards.
8. Placement on private property for more than 10 days in any 90-day period of any truck, boat, trailer or other vehicle or vehicle part which has affixed thereto any commercial advertising message not pertaining to the legally permitted use carried on within such property is prohibited.
B. Sign Display Restrictions.
1. Purpose. The purpose of this subsection is to regulate the manner in which signs convey their messages by specifying prohibited display features that create distractions to the traveling public and create visual clutter that mars the natural and architectural aesthetics of the city.
2. Applicability. The display features described below are prohibited. Prohibited signs are subject to removal (except legal nonconforming signs as defined by this chapter) by the city at the owner’s expense.
a. Any sign or lighting device, whether on the exterior of a building or on the inside of a window which is visible beyond the boundaries of the lot or parcel, or from any public right-of-way, with intermittent, flashing, rotating, blinking or strobe light illumination.
b. Any sign with an exposed light source, except for neon incorporated into the design of the sign.
c. Any sign which emits sound, odor, smoke, laser or hologram lights, or other visible matter, including any sign that uses motion picture projection.
d. Any sign animated by any means, including fixed aerial displays, balloons, pennants, spinners, strings of flags, streamers, tubes, or other devices affected by the movement of the air or other atmospheric or mechanical means, except for:
i. Signs exempted from this chapter as established in AMC 19.67.020.
ii. Temporary signs as provided for in AMC 19.67.110.
e. Any sign in which the sign body or any portion of the sign rotates, moves up and down, or any other type of action involving a change in position of the sign body or any portion of the sign, whether by mechanical or any other means, except for signs exempted from this chapter as established in AMC 19.67.020.
f. Digital and other changeable copy signs, except as provided for in Table 19.67.040(C)(2) and AMC 19.67.080(D) for certain freestanding signs.
g. Mannequins holding a sign or displaying advertising, whether stationary or animated, except within a building as part of a window or interior display.
C. Sign Illumination.
1. General Illumination Standards.
a. Indirect sign illumination must be no further away from the sign than the height of the sign.
b. Externally illuminated signs must be arranged so that no direct rays of light are projected from such artificial source into residences, businesses or any street right-of-way.
c. External sign light fixtures must complement the design of the sign and building facades or structures associated with the sign.
d. External sign lighting must be “full cutoff” and must not result in direct illumination of the sky and adjacent properties and structures, and must be designed to minimize reflected glare to adjacent properties and structures.
2. Permitted Sign Illumination Types. Table 19.67.040(C)(2) below specifies permitted sign illumination types by zone.
Table 19.67.040(C)(2)
Permitted sign illumination types.
Illumination Type | Permitted Zones | Other Requirements | |
Channel letter. Light is emitted through the front or face of the letters. | ![]() | All mixed-use and industrial zones, except CBD | May be incorporated into a permitted wall, pole, or monument sign |
Reverse channel letter. Letter faces are opaque and light source provides halo effect through backlighting. | ![]() | All mixed-use and industrial zones and the MED-O zone | May be incorporated into a permitted wall, pole, or monument sign |
Push-through. Letters are cut out of opaque sign face. Interior light shines through letter faces only. | ![]() | All mixed-use and industrial zones and the MED-O zone | May be incorporated into a permitted wall, pole, or monument sign |
Neon. | ![]() | All mixed-use and industrial zones | May be incorporated into a permitted wall, projecting, window, pole, or monument sign |
Internally illuminated cabinet signs. Sign face is illuminated through translucent casing. This includes internally illuminated changeable copy signs. | ![]() | LM, LM1, MS, I and HM | May be incorporated into a permitted wall, pole, pylon, or monument sign |
Digital message signage. | ![]() | All mixed-use and industrial zones, except CBD | Only allowed to be integrated on permitted monument and pole signs per AMC 19.67.080(D) |
Internally illuminated awning signs. Awning face is illuminated through awning material. | ![]() | Not allowed in any zone | |
Externally illuminated sign. | ![]() | All zones | Illumination techniques must focus the light on the sign and avoid glare to the sky, streets, sidewalks, and other public spaces, and adjacent uses |
D. Sign Materials, Structural, and Electrical Restrictions.
1. Except flags, temporary, and portable signs, and window signs conforming in all respects with the requirements of this chapter, all signs must be constructed of durable materials and must be permanently attached to the ground, a building, or another structure by direct attachment to a rigid wall, frame, or structure.
2. All attached signs and sign support frames must be mounted and attached to a building or the ground in a secure manner and must be maintained in good repair for safety and appearance.
3. All wiring, fittings, and materials used in the construction, connection, and operation of electrically illuminated signs must be in accordance with the provisions of the National Electric Code or the local electric code in effect. All such signs require an electrical permit and inspection by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industry, Electrical Division, or equivalent inspection.
E. Sign Maintenance and Inspection.
1. Maintenance. All signs, including signs heretofore installed, must be constantly maintained in a state of security, safety, appearance and repair. If any sign is found not to be so maintained or is insecurely fastened or otherwise dangerous, it is the duty of the owner and/or occupant of the premises on which the sign is fastened to repair or remove the sign within five days after receiving notice from the Director. The premises surrounding a freestanding sign must be free and clear of rubbish and the landscaping area must be maintained.
2. Inspection. All sign owners must permit the periodic inspection of their signs by the city upon city request. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Sign area for all sign types is measured as follows:
A. The area of painted signs, individual letter signs, and other indirectly illuminated signs is calculated on the basis of the smallest rectangle, circle or spherical figure that will enclose the entire copy area of the sign. Any such calculation must include the areas between letters and lines, as well as the areas of any devices, illuminated or nonilluminated, which are intended to attract attention.
B. Where signs are placed on a display board attached to a wall or weather protection feature, the entire display board must be included in the sign area calculations. Where the display board includes a visible frame, only the area inside the frame must be included in the sign area calculations.
C. For freestanding signs, the entire display board must be included in the sign area calculations. Where the display board includes a visible frame, only the area inside the frame must be included in the sign area calculations.
D. Multiple-faced signs must have each face measured separately. The sign area allotment for each sign type applies to just one side of the sign. For example, if the maximum size for a certain monument sign is 25 square feet, then each face of the monument sign may be up to 25 square feet.
E. Four or more faced signs, spherical, free-form, sculptural or other nonplanar sign area is measured as 50 percent of the sum of the areas using only the four vertical sides of the smallest four-sided polyhedron that will encompass the sign structure, as shown in Figure 19.67.050(2). Signs with greater than four polyhedron faces are prohibited.
Figure 19.67.050(1)
Clarifying sign area measurement.
![]() |
Figure 19.67.050(2)
Clarifying 3D sign area measurement.
![]() |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Table 19.67.060(A)
Freestanding sign types and standards.
Sign type | Location and street setback | Maximum quantity | Maximum height above existing grade | Maximum sign area |
Pole sign A sign supported by one vertical post. ![]() | Only allowed in LM1 and HM zones within 100' of SR-20 right-of-way 5' minimum setback | 1 pole sign per 400' of SR-20 lot frontage | 30' | 1 sq. ft. per linear foot of SR-20 frontage, up to a maximum of 160 sq. ft. |
Monument sign A sign which is attached to the ground by means of a wide base of solid appearance. See AMC 19.67.080(B) for supplemental design standards. ![]() | 5' minimum street setback | 1 monument, pylon, or post and arm sign/lot frontage, except: 1 such freestanding sign per 150' of lot frontage where speed limit less than 35 mph 1 such freestanding sign per 200' of lot frontage where speed limit 35 mph or greater | See Table 19.67.080(B)(4) In LM1 and HM zones within 100' of SR-20 right-of-way, maximum height is 30' | See Table 19.67.080(B)(4) In LM1 and HM zones within 100' of SR-20 right-of-way, 1 sq. ft. per linear foot of SR-20 frontage, up to a maximum of 160 sq. ft. |
Pylon sign A sign mounted on two posts. ![]() | 5' minimum street setback | 1 monument, pylon, or post and arm sign/lot frontage, except: 1 such freestanding sign per 150' of lot frontage where speed limit less than 35 mph 1 freestanding sign per 200' of lot frontage where speed limit 35 mph or greater | Monument sign standards apply per Table 19.67.080(B)(4) except pylon signs are limited to 8' in height In LM1 and HM zones within 100' of SR-20 right-of-way, maximum height is 30' | Monument sign standards apply per Table 19.67.080(B)(4) In LM1 and HM zones within 100' of SR-20 right-of-way, 1 sq. ft. per linear foot of SR-20 frontage, up to a maximum of 160 sq. ft. |
Post and arm sign A small sign supported by a post and arm. ![]() | 5' minimum street setback | 1 such monument, pylon, or post and arm sign/lot frontage, except: 1 freestanding sign per 150' of lot frontage where speed limit less than 35 mph 1 freestanding sign per 200' of lot frontage where speed limit 35 mph or greater | 5' | 10 sq. ft. |
Internal wayfinding sign A sign used to aid customers in circulation within parking lots of commercial uses. These signs could come in the form of monument, pylon, post and arm, or wall sign types. See AMC 19.67.080(C) for supplemental design standards. ![]() | May be located in landscaped areas or on pathways, provided the sign does not inhibit pedestrian movement. When such sign types are mounted on buildings, they must be oriented to a pathway. | Appropriate number of signs to provide directional assistance given size of site and circulation pattern as determined by the Director. | 8' | 15 sq. ft. When such sign types are mounted on buildings, they are limited to a maximum of 10 sq. ft. |
Table 19.67.060(B)
Building-mounted sign types and standards.
Sign type | Location | Maximum quantity | Maximum sign area | Maximum sign height |
Wall sign A sign painted directly on the wall, attached to, or erected against the wall of a building or structure with the exposed face of the sign parallel to the plane of such wall. See AMC 19.67.090(A) for supplemental design standards. ![]() | See AMC 19.67.090(A)(2) | 1 sign per tenant facade that is visible from an adjacent street, customer parking lot, or alley One wall sign is allowed per facade facing a waterfront, provided the requirements of the Shoreline Master Program are met See AMC 19.67.090(A) for additional quantity standards | See Table 19.67.090(A)(3) | Signs must not extend above the building parapet, soffit, or eave line of the building |
Projecting sign A sign attached to and extending outward from the face of the building. See AMC 19.67.090(B) for supplemental design standards. ![]() | Minimum 8' vertical clearance above sidewalk or pathway, and minimum 14' vertical clearance when within 5' of a roadway Must not be located directly over windows or in conflict with other signs or architectural features of the building | 1 sign per facade that is visible from a street or customer parking lot | See AMC 19.67.080(B)(1) | Signs must not extend above the building parapet, soffit, or eave line of the building |
Marquee/awning sign A sign that is either attached to, affixed to, or painted on a marquee, awning, or canopy. See AMC 19.67.090(C) for supplemental design standards. ![]() | Minimum 8' vertical clearance above sidewalk or pathway May be placed on the front, above, or below the marquee Signage must not exceed two-thirds of individual awning or marquee width | 1 sign per marquee, awning, or canopy that is visible from a street or customer parking lot | Same as wall sign standards, see Table 19.67.090(A)(3) | See AMC 19.67.090(C)(1) |
Under-canopy sign A sign attached to the underside of an awning, canopy, balcony or arcade. See AMC 19.67.090(D) for examples. ![]() | Minimum 8' vertical clearance above sidewalk or pathway Minimum 1' horizontal clearance from the building and canopy edge | 1 sign per entrance that is visible from a street or customer parking lot | None | 2' |
Window sign A sign that is applied to or attached to the exterior or interior of a window or located in such manner within a building that it is visible from the exterior of the building through a window, but excludes merchandise in a window display. See AMC 19.67.090(E) for window sign examples. ![]() | Windows include glass doors | None | 30% of total tenant window area/facade | None |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. In mixed-use and industrial zones, all sign types are permitted unless otherwise noted in AMC 19.67.060.
B. Table 19.67.070 illustrates the types of signs that are allowed for different development/use types in residential zones. The letter “P” indicates permitted sign types. A blank cell indicates the particular sign type is not permitted.
Table 19.67.070
Signs permitted in residential zones.
Conditions:
1 Single-Family Subdivisions and Mixed-Residential or Multifamily Complex: One monument sign is permitted per entrance from an access street, provided said signs do not exceed 18 square feet in sign area each and five feet in height. Such signs can be low-profile monument or fence-mounted and can be placed anywhere on the property along access streets, not necessarily at entrances.
2One nonilluminated wall sign or window sign up to two square feet is permitted for a home occupation.
3 Other Nonresidential Uses:
aMonument signs are permitted for those permitted nonresidential uses that exceed 10,000 square feet in gross floor area. One monument sign is permitted per lot frontage, provided said sign does not exceed 18 square feet in sign area each and five feet in height. Such signs can be low-profile monument or fence-mounted and can be placed anywhere on the property along access streets (not only at entrances).
bPylon and post and arm signs are limited to six feet in height and 16 square feet in area.
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Location and Landscaping.
1. Freestanding signs are prohibited on block frontages that are designated storefront per maps in AMC 19.61.040. All business signs along such frontages must be building-mounted (see AMC 19.67.090).
2. Landscaping. The base of all freestanding signs must be enhanced with one square foot of landscaped area per one square foot of sign area.
B. Monument Signs.
1. Sign Form. At least 40 percent of the total sign width must meet the ground plane.
Figure 19.67.080(B)(1)
Minimum ground anchoring provisions for monument signs.
![]() |
2. Materials and Design. Monument signs located in the CBD, C, MMU, CM, and residential zones must be designed as an integrated architectural feature of the site. Specifically:
a. Framing. Monument signs must include design elements that effectively frame the sign on both faces. Alternatively, signs that have a substantial framing element on one side will meet this provision.
DEPARTURES per AMC 19.20.220 will be considered, provided the design meets other provisions herein, and integrates a distinctive, one-of-a-kind design that contributes to the visual character of the area.
Figure 19.67.080(B)(2)(a)
Good examples of monument signs with framing elements on one side.
![]() |
b. Materials and Design. Monument signs must include durable high-quality materials such as stone, brick, concrete, or steel and a design that relates to and/or complements the design of on-site buildings and/or is coordinated with other site design elements (such as distinctive lighting, monuments, wayfinding signs).
c. Top/Middle/Bottom. Monument signs must integrate a top, middle, and bottom element. The top could include a distinctive sign cap and/or include the name of a multi-tenant center. The middle can include a consistent framing technique for an individual sign or multiple signs in a multi-tenant center. The bottom could include a distinctive base design with special materials and/or design. See the figures below for examples that meet this requirement.
Signs less than six feet tall are exempt from this provision.
Figure 19.67.080(B)(2)(c-1)
Acceptable and unacceptable monument sign examples.
![]() The left image utilizes clearly identifiable top, middle, and bottom elements and meets the framing provision. The middle image includes a base, but insufficient top or framing element. The shorter sign to the right includes framing but is exempt from the top, middle, and bottom elements. |
Figure 19.67.080(B)(2)(c-2)
Good examples of monument signs with top/middle/bottom elements.
Figure 19.67.080(B)(2)(c-3)
Unacceptable examples of monument signs.
![]() |
3. Minimum Base Height. The copy of all signage must be at least one foot above grade.
Figure 19.67.080(B)(3)
Minimum base height for sign copy.
![]() |
4. Maximum Size and Height. Table 19.67.080(B)(4) illustrates the maximum allowable sign area and height for all monument signs.
Table 19.67.080(B)(4)
Maximum allowable sign area and height for monument signs.
Total ROW Frontage of Parcel (on each street) | Allowable Sign Area | Maximum Height |
Less than 80 feet | 16 sq. ft. | 5 feet |
80—119 feet | 24 sq. ft. | 6 feet |
120—199 feet | 30 sq. ft. | 7 feet |
200—299 feet | 40 sq. ft. | 8 feet |
300—399 feet | 50 sq. ft. | 9 feet |
400 feet or more | 70 sq. ft. | 10 feet |
C. Internal Wayfinding Signs.
1. Purpose. To aid visitors in finding the location of a business, use, or building on large commercial development sites.
2. Sign Content. Signs may include only the name of the business, use, or building together with the directional guidance information.
3. Sign Types. Internal wayfinding signs may come in the form of monument, pylon, or post and arm sign types, except that signs placed along pathways may be placed on buildings.
4. Design. Signs must designed in a uniform manner (within individual subdivision or center) using consistent background and typeface colors. Dark background colors with light-colored text are required. See Figure 19.67.080(C) for an example.
Figure 19.67.080(C)
Internal wayfinding sign examples.
![]() Note the consistent design themes using dark backgrounds with light-colored text. |
D. Digital and Changeable Copy Signage Integration. Digital and changeable copy signage elements may be integrated into any pole or monument sign permitted in this section, subject to the following provisions:
1. Up to 50 percent of allowed sign copy area may be used for digital or changeable copy directory purposes.
2. Up to 33 percent of allowed sign copy area may be used for changing message purposes. For single tenant signs, up to 50 percent of the allowed sign copy area may be used for changing message purposes.
3. Where both a digital directory and changing message signage are included on one freestanding sign, such elements may collectively be used for up to 67 percent of the total allowed sign copy area.
4. Digital or internally lit changeable copy signs are not allowed in residential zones.
Figure 19.67.080(D)
Example of integrating digital signage.
5. Any form of technology may be used for the sign elements described herein, provided they meet the following provisions:
a. Maintain a 10-second minimum dwell time for the directory and any images. Changes in directory and images must be instantaneous and not faded. Animation, movement, or video imaging is prohibited.
b. Brightness Limits.
i. Integrate automatic dimming capability that adjusts to the brightness of ambient light at all times of the day and night.
ii. Daytime: 5,000 maximum nits.
iii. Nighttime: 150 maximum nits.
c. Light Trespass Standard. Maximum 0.1 foot-candles at the property line of any park or residential property. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Building-mounted signs include wall signs, projecting signs, marquee/awning signs, under-canopy signs, and window signs.
A. Wall Signs.
1. Permitted Number of Signs. See Table 19.67.060(B). Supplemental standards:
a. In multi-story buildings, businesses above the ground floor are limited to one sign per business, except that a business with frontage on more than one street may have one sign facing each street. Each sign must consist only of lettering and/or a logo painted on or applied to the surface of one window in a manner that allows light to pass between and around the individual letters. The area of the sign may not exceed 12 square feet.
b. In a multi-tenant building with businesses on upper floors and/or in interior spaces having no street facade on which to place a sign, a building directory listing businesses in the building, and not exceeding 12 square feet, may be located on the building wall at each primary entrance. This directory may be in addition to the sign area permitted for the building.
2. Location and Design.
a. Wall signs must be proportional to the facade and are limited to two-thirds of individual facade width dimension. This standard also applies to upper-level businesses.
b. Wall signs may not cover windows, building trim, an existing building name sign, or special ornamentation features. Preferred areas for installation of wall signs include blank areas above marquees, areas between vertical piers or columns, blank areas on a gabled roof, or upper reaches of a false-fronted building.
c. Stacked words on wall signs are permitted. Generally, the primary business name is encouraged to be provided on one line, with additional text on rows above and/or below providing supporting information about the business in smaller fonts.
Figure 19.67.090(A)(2)
Illustrating wall sign standards.
![]() |
3. Maximum Size for Individual Tenants that Occupy Space on the Building Facade. Table 19.67.090(A)(3) below provides standards for the maximum amount of wall, canopy, or awning signage on each tenant’s facade. For building elevations that include signage for upper-level businesses, the standards apply to the entire building elevation.
Table 19.67.090(A)(3)
Sign area standards for wall, canopy, or awning signs for each tenant’s facade.
Tenant facade area | Maximum sign area (for tenant’s facade) | |
Sign with internal lighting | Sign without internal lighting | |
Below 200 sq. ft. | 15% of the facade | 25% of the facade |
200—349 sq. ft. | 14% of the facade | 22.5% of the facade |
350—499 sq. ft. | 13% of the facade | 20% of the facade |
500—999 sq. ft. | 12% of the facade | 17.5% of the facade |
1,000—1,499 sq. ft. | 11% of the facade | 15% of the facade |
1,500—1,999 sq. ft. | 10% of the facade | 12.5% of the facade |
Over 2,000 sq. ft. | 10% of the facade | 10% of the facade |
Figure 19.67.090(A)(3-1)
Clarifying the calculations of maximum sign area for tenant wall, canopy, or awning signs.
![]() |
Figure 19.67.090(A)(3-2)
Acceptable wall sign examples.
![]() |
![]() Note the different styles of signs and use of stacked (both left images) and supplemental text (lower left). |
![]() More acceptable wall sign examples. In the right image, the signs are centered on the articulation elements of the facade. |
Figure 19.67.090(A)(3-3)
Unacceptable wall sign example.
![]() Most or all of these signs clearly exceed two-thirds of the width of their respective individual storefronts. |
4. Mounting.
a. Wall signs should be mounted plumb with the building, with a maximum protrusion of one foot plus a four-inch mounting, unless the sign incorporates sculptural elements or architectural devices.
b. The sign frame must be concealed or integrated into the building’s architectural character in terms of form, color, and materials.
5. Building Name Signs.
a. Signs that advertise the name of the building and not associated with the name of any individual business are exempt from the sign area standards in Table 19.67.090(A)(3) above, provided they are designed and sized in proportion to the facade (see Figure 19.67.090(A)(5) for an example).
b. Signs must be placed near the top of the facade and generally centered on the architectural features of the building.
c. DEPARTURES per AMC 19.20.220 will be considered, provided the sign is located in a place that is independent from individual businesses on the building and helps to provide identity for the particular building.
Figure 19.67.090(A)(5)
Acceptable building name sign.
![]() |
B. Projecting Signs. Projecting signs meeting the following conditions are allowed for commercial uses adjacent to and facing a street. They may be used in addition to wall, marquee, and/or awning signs provided they meet the applicable standards below.
1. Sign Area. Projecting signs are not based on sign area standards, but on the dimensional standards below. Projecting signs may be either vertically or horizontally oriented. Projecting banner signs must all be vertically oriented.
a. Projection.
i. Horizontally oriented signs: no more than eight feet.
ii. Square or vertically oriented signs: no more than three feet.
iii. Signs may project into public right-of-way for storefront buildings, but must not extend over the curb into the travel lane.
b. Height.
i. Horizontally oriented signs: no more than three feet.
ii. Vertically oriented signs: must not extend above the building parapet, soffit, the eave line or the roof of the building.
Figure 19.67.090(B)(1)
Dimensional standards for horizontally (left) and vertically oriented (right) projecting signs.
![]() |
c. DEPARTURES per AMC 19.20.220 to the provisions in subsections (B)(1)(a) and (b) of this section will be considered, provided the sign design is compatible with the design of the building in terms of location, scale, and design elements, does not create a public safety hazard, and provides a positive contribution to the streetscape.
Figure 19.67.090(B)(4)
Acceptable and unacceptable projecting sign examples.
![]() |
The example on the right includes two complementary projecting signs that are separated enough that they don’t conflict or cause visual clutter. The second sign is smaller and advertises the lounge that is within the restaurant. |
![]() Both examples include signs that project over the roofline. In the right example there are far too many signs that visually conflict and create unwanted sign clutter. |
C. Marquee/Awning Signs. Marquee or awning signs may be used in place of permitted wall signs provided they meet the following conditions:
1. Sign Form and Size.
a. Signs consisting of individual letters placed on the outside edge of the marquee or above the marquee are limited to 200 percent of the height of the vertical dimension of the marquee. For example, if the vertical dimension of the marquee is 12 inches, the letters may be up to 24 inches high. Such signs are limited to two-thirds of individual marquee width dimension or no more than 20 feet, whichever is less.
b. Sign boards may be placed on the vertical edge of a canopy, provided the height of the sign board is no more than 200 percent the height of the vertical dimension of the marquee. For example, if the vertical dimension of the marquee is 12 inches, the sign board may be up to 24 inches high. Such signs are limited to two-thirds of individual marquee width dimension or no more than 20 feet, whichever is less.
c. Signs placed on the vertical edge of awnings are limited to 80 percent of the height of the vertical edge of the awning. Where signs are placed on the sloping portion of the awning, they must be sized proportional to the architectural features of the building and are limited to two feet in height. The width of awning signs are limited to two-thirds of individual awning width dimension or no more than 20 feet, whichever is less.
2. Number of Signs. For individual facades that include multiple awnings or marquees, secondary business signage may be included on the additional signs. For example, where the primary sign might advertise the name of a bakery, the secondary signs could advertise coffee, ice cream or other types of products sold by the business.
Figure 19.67.090(C)
Marquee and awning sign examples and standards.
![]() |
![]() |
D. Under-Canopy Signs. Under-canopy signs are placed under awnings, marquees or canopies and placed perpendicular to the storefronts and thus oriented to pedestrians on the sidewalk or an internal pathway.
Figure 19.67.090(D)
Under-canopy standards and example.
![]() |
E. Window Signs.
Figure 19.67.090(E)
Window sign standards and examples.
![]() Signs in windows are limited to 30 percent of the total tenant window area. The coffee shop in the upper right image uses a variety of window signs, but meets the 30 percent limit. The lower right image clearly exceeds the 30 percent limit and effectively minimizes the transparency of this storefront. | ![]() |
![]() |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Noncommercial speech signs express noncommercial speech such as public community events, religious, political, social, or other philosophical messages.
Noncommercial speech signs do not promote commercial products or services. The content of such signs is not regulated, but is subject to the following requirements:
A. The maximum sign area and height of noncommercial speech signs must be consistent with the monument sign standards (regardless of sign type) set forth in Table 19.67.080(B)(4) based on the total right-of-way frontage of the applicable parcel (on each street).
B. Noncommercial speech signs that do not comply with the requirements of this section must be subject to the permit requirements, sign area, setback and other provisions of this chapter. All noncommercial speech signs must comply with general sign requirements per AMC 19.67.040, General requirements. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Applicability. All temporary signs are subject to the placement, size, and height requirements of this chapter, and the requirements in the underlying zone. Additionally, the following requirements apply:
B. Permitting. A sign permit is not required for temporary signs.
C. Location Requirements.
1. Generally.
a. Temporary signs may be located on private property with the property owner’s permission.
b. Temporary signs attached to building walls must not be placed in a manner that obstructs any door, Fire Department sprinkler connection, or street number sign.
c. Temporary signs must not be placed on the roof of a building, or affixed to a permanent sign or its structure, tree, utility pole, or street sign.
d. No part of a temporary sign may overhang a paved roadway, bicycle path, parking space, driveway, loading area, or wheelchair access.
e. Temporary signs must not be permanently attached to the ground, a building, or to any other structure, other than what is necessary to secure the sign to prevent theft, wind damage, or safety problems.
f. Temporary signs must not be placed in any public park, trail, open space, or other public space, except for those signs placed by the city.
2. Only Type 4 temporary signs may be placed within the public right-of-way. Such signs are subject to the standards in subsection H of this section.
3. Only Type 4 temporary signs may be placed on a sidewalk or other pedestrian pathway. Such signs are subject to the standards in subsection H of this section.
D. Materials. Temporary signs may be made of any durable material, and the sign face may be of rigid or flexible construction.
E. Illumination Prohibited. Temporary signs may not be directly illuminated or be provided with any electric service.
F. Noncommercial Temporary Signs. Noncommercial signs do not promote commercial products or services. The content of such signs is not regulated, but is subject to the following requirements:
1. Noncommercial temporary signs are subject to the requirements of Table 19.67.110(F).
Table 19.67.110(F)
Size and duration of noncommercial temporary signs.
Non-A-board sign in the public right-of-way | A-board sign in the public right-of-way | Any temporary sign on private property | |
Sign area, maximum | 4 square feet | See subsection (H)(4) of this section for A-board (Type 4 temporary sign) standards | 12 square feet |
Height above grade, maximum | 3 feet | 8 feet | |
Duration, maximum | 180 days per calendar year unless otherwise limited by the temporary sign type | 180 days per calendar year unless otherwise limited by the temporary sign type | |
Location requirements | See subsection (H)(4)(f) of this section | See subsection (C)(1) of this section | |
2. Community banner signs up to 100 square feet in size and 20 feet above grade in height may only be located on public banner poles erected by the city for that use. Community banner signs may not be illuminated.
3. Signs Advertising a Public Event. Maximum duration must be from one month before the event to five days after the event.
G. Commercial Temporary Signs.
1. Construction Signs. On properties with active construction, temporary signs must meet the following requirements:
a. Number. One nonilluminated, double-faced temporary sign is permitted for each lot frontage.
b. Sign Area. Maximum size of 24 square feet.
c. Height. Maximum height of eight feet above grade.
d. Permitted Sign Types. Types 2 and 3.
e. Duration. Temporary signs must be removed by the date of first occupancy of the property or one year after placement of the sign, whichever occurs first.
2. Exterior event signs, such as grand opening signs, sale signs, promotional signs, exhibitions, quitting business signs, and other nonpermanent exterior signs used to advertise an event.
a. Number. There is no limit to the number of exterior event signs that may be displayed at any one time for any one business or tenant.
b. Applicability/Location. Businesses in mixed-use and industrial zones may display exterior event signs.
c. Sign Area. Exterior event signs are limited to 20 square feet in size, except for building-mounted Type 2 temporary signs, which are subject to the area standards in subsection (H)(2) of this section.
d. Height. Based on height limits of allowed temporary sign types in subsection (H) below.
e. Permitted Sign Types. Types 1 through 5.
f. Duration. Exterior event signs (individual signs and/or groups of signs) may be displayed for no more than 60 cumulative days per calendar year per business or tenant.
3. Residential Real Estate. Signs associated with residential properties for sale or rent must comply with the following:
a. On-Site Residential “For Sale,” “For Rent” and “Sold” Signs.
i. Number. Limited to one sign per lot frontage on the subject property.
ii. Sign Area. Maximum size of six square feet.
iii. Height. Maximum height of six feet above grade.
iv. Permitted Sign Types. Type 1.
v. Duration. Must be removed within five days of the final sale or rental.
b. Off-Site Residential “For Sale” and “For Rent” Signs.
i. Location. No further from the subject property than the nearest arterial street intersection.
ii. Quantity. No more than one “For Sale” or “For Rent” sign may be used at any street intersection for any one developer, broker, seller or owner.
iii. Sign Area. Maximum size of two square feet.
iv. Height. Maximum height of six feet above grade.
v. Permitted Sign Types. Type 1.
vi. Duration. Must be removed within five days of the final sale or rental.
4. Commercial and Industrial Real Estate. Signs associated with commercial and industrial properties for sale or rent must comply with the following:
a. Location and Quantity. Limited to one sign per lot frontage on the subject property.
b. Sign Area. Maximum size of 16 square feet.
c. Height. Maximum height of eight feet above grade for properties adjacent to State Route 20 in the LM1 or HM zone and six feet above grade in all other areas.
d. Permitted Sign Types. Types 1 through 3.
e. Duration. Must be removed within five days of the final sale or rental.
5. Commercial Temporary Signs in a Residential Zone. Permitted commercial temporary signs in residential zones are limited to:
a. Residential real estate signs as established in subsection (G)(3) of this section.
b. Home occupation signs as established in Table 19.67.070.
c. Signs associated with permitted nonresidential uses are subject to the standards of this section.
H. Temporary Sign Requirements by Sign Type. Below are standards for a wide variety of temporary sign types that may be allowed based on the site’s zoning, land use, or context. Where the provisions of subsection F or G of this section conflict with the provisions of this subsection H, the provisions of subsection F or G of this section apply.
Figure 19.67.110(H)
Summary of temporary sign types.
![]() |
1. Type 1 Temporary Signs. Signs in this category consist of small, temporary yard signs that are typically associated with (but not limited to) the advertisement of real estate, political campaigns, and event announcements.
a. Location. Type 1 temporary signs may be located in any zone.
b. Quantity.
i. For developed property, one sign may be displayed per dwelling unit and per business. For undeveloped and vacant property, one sign may be displayed per one-quarter acre of land.
ii. The provisions of subsection (H)(1)(b)(i) of this section are suspended during the 60-day period before any primary or general election scheduled by Skagit County. Following the end of such period, the provisions of subsection (H)(1)(b)(i) of this section are in force until the following period of suspension.
c. Size. Maximum sign area is six square feet (per side if dual-sided) per sign. Signs placed in windows are subject to the size standards of AMC 19.67.090(E).
d. Height. Maximum height of the sign, including supports, is six feet above grade (except for noncommercial signs located in a public right-of-way per subsection F of this section).
e. Material. If outdoors, the sign face must be composed of a rigid material.
f. Mounting. Outdoor signs may be only mounted and supported by posts or stakes which are attached to the ground.
g. Duration. No limit unless otherwise specified in this section for the particular location, use, or context.
2. Type 2 Temporary Signs. Signs in this category are typically referred to as “banners” that are typically associated with (but not limited to) the announcement of community events. These may be freestanding (supported by posts on either end) or building-mounted signs.
a. Location. Type 2 temporary signs are permitted in the mixed-use and industrial zones, on any property owned by a public agency, and on any property owned by a nonprofit corporation organized under Section 501(c)(3) of the United States Internal Revenue Code.
b. Quantity. One sign may be displayed per property.
c. Size. Maximum sign area for freestanding Type 2 signs is 18 square feet (per face of dual-sided signs). The maximum sign area for Type 2 signs attached to buildings is the same as sign area for wall signs (with internal lighting) as established in Table 19.67.090(A)(3) based on the size of the facade.
Exception: Lesser maximum sign area may be allowed for the particular use per subsection F or G of this section.
d. Height. Maximum height of any freestanding signs, including supports, is six feet above grade (except for noncommercial signs located in a public right-of-way per subsection F of this section). Type 2 signs attached to a building must not be placed on or above the roof of a building and must not be placed over any windows.
e. Material. The sign face must be composed of a flexible material.
f. Mounting. Freestanding signs may be only mounted and supported by posts or stakes which are attached to the ground.
g. Duration. For each property, Type 2 signs may be displayed for a maximum 30 calendar days per year. A maximum of six separate displays are permitted each year, with a minimum of 10 calendar days of separation between displays.
3. Type 3 Temporary Signs. Signs in this category are large signs typically associated with (but not limited to) the advertisement of land sales, construction activity, and commercial and industrial buildings for rent.
a. Location. Type 3 temporary signs may be located in any zone under the following conditions:
i. The parcel upon which the sign is displayed has a minimum of 100 feet of lot frontage.
ii. The parcel does not contain a permanent freestanding sign with digital or changeable copy.
b. Quantity. One sign may be displayed per property.
c. Size. Maximum sign area is 24 square feet (per face of dual-sided signs) unless lesser maximum sign area applies for the particular use per subsection F or G of this section.
d. Height. Maximum height of the sign, including supports, is eight feet above grade unless lesser maximum height applies for the particular use per subsection F or G of this section.
e. Material. The sign face must be composed of a rigid material.
f. Mounting. Signs may be only mounted and supported by posts or stakes which are attached to the ground.
g. Duration. Unless otherwise specified in this section for the particular location, use, or context:
i. Type 3 temporary signs may be displayed without limit to duration on properties that are undeveloped or vacant.
ii. In all other cases, signs may be displayed a maximum of one year, with a minimum of 60 calendar days of separation between displays. The minimum separation period applies regardless of whether the previous display reached the maximum duration of display.
4. Type 4 Temporary Signs. Signs in this category must only include A-board and standing signs as defined by AMC 19.67.030. Signs in this category are typically associated with (but not limited to) the advertisement of retail businesses and announcement of public events.
a. Location. Type 4 temporary signs may only be displayed in the mixed-use, industrial, and overlay designations, provided they comply with the standards herein.
b. Quantity.
i. Commercial Use. One sign may be displayed per customer entrance, and no more than two signs may be displayed per business.
ii. Noncommercial Use. Two signs per lot may be displayed for each single noncommercial purpose.
c. Size. Maximum sign area is six square feet (per face of dual-sided signs).
d. Height. Maximum height of the sign when placed in its display position, including supports, is four feet above grade (except for noncommercial signs located in a public right-of-way per subsection F of this section).
e. Material. The sign face must be composed of a rigid material.
f. Placement Standards.
i. Signs for a commercial use must be located within 15 feet of a customer entrance.
ii. Signs must maintain at least 25 feet of separation from other Type 4 temporary signs.
iii. Signs placed on a pathway or sidewalk must be placed to one side of the sidewalk or pathway and provide a minimum of four feet of unobstructed sidewalk or pathway width. Signs must not be placed on sidewalks or pathways less than four feet in width.
iv. Signs must not be located within center medians, traffic circles, traffic islands, and roundabouts.
g. Duration. Signs may only be displayed during the period beginning 30 minutes prior to the daily opening and ending 30 minutes following the daily closing of the business displaying the sign.
Figure 19.67.110(H)(4)
Examples of Type 4 temporary signs.
![]() The sign above illustrates a proper location for a Type 4 temporary sign, whereas the sign(s) below are placed in the middle of the sidewalk where it obstructs pedestrian traffic. | ![]() Type 4 temporary signs may come in the A-board form (upper left example) or in a standing form (as above). |
![]() | |
5. Type 5 Temporary Signs. Signs in this category are feather signs. Feather signs are prohibited except where used for an exterior event sign (see subsection (G)(2) of this section) or for multi-tenant centers meeting the criteria below.
a. Location. Type 5 temporary signs may only be displayed in properties in a mixed-use or industrial zone.
b. Quantity. One sign may be displayed per site/property. For site/properties with more than 100 feet of block frontage, multiple signs are allowed, provided there is at least 100 feet of separation between signs.
c. Size. Maximum height of feather signs is 13 feet.
d. Design. Signs must designed in a uniform manner, including consistent size and shape, where more than one sign is permitted.
e. Duration. Type 5 temporary signs associated with an exterior event are subject to the duration provisions of subsection (G)(2) of this section. Type 5 temporary signs associated with an existing on-site tenant may be displayed without limit to duration.
6. Type 6 Temporary Signs. Signs in this category include fixed aerial displays, balloons, pennants, spinners, strings of flags, streamers, tubes, or other devices affected by the movement of the air or other atmospheric or mechanical means. Such signs are prohibited except where used for an exterior event sign (see subsection (G)(2) of this section).
I. Special Community Event Signage. The purpose of this provision is to provide for a periodic increase in the number of temporary signs that may be displayed for special community events which promote economic activity in Anacortes.
1. Qualifying Events. Events sponsored by the city, nonprofit agencies, and/or multiple Anacortes-based businesses that are intended to attract tourism activity in Anacortes.
2. Period of Applicability. Beginning 10 days prior to the date of the event (or beginning date of a multiday event) and ending 24 hours following the conclusion of the event.
3. Additional Temporary Signs Permitted. An unlimited number of temporary signs may be displayed in the CBD, C, CM, I and LM1 zones during the period of applicability.
4. Other Regulations Remain in Effect. During the period of applicability, all other temporary sign regulations remain in effect. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Side and Rear Setbacks. Signs and advertising structures where permitted must be erected or placed in conformity with the side and rear setback requirements of the district in which they are located except that no sign or advertising structure in a nonresidential zone must be erected or placed closer than 50 feet of a side or rear lot line in any adjacent residential zone.
B. Industrial Zone. In the I zone east of “R” Avenue and between 22nd and 34th Streets, the sign setback must be 30 feet from the curb at the east side of “R” Avenue. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A nonconforming sign is a sign that was validly installed under laws or ordinances in effect prior to the effective date of the ordinance codified in this chapter or subsequent revisions, but is in conflict with the provisions of this chapter. Nonconforming signs may remain in use only under the following conditions:
A. No such sign may be changed in any manner that increases the nonconformance of any such sign.
B. The burden of establishing a sign to be legally nonconforming under this section rests upon the person or persons, firm or corporation claiming legal status for a sign.
C. Changes to the sign copy or the replacement of a sign face on a nonconforming sign is permitted.
D. When a sign is structurally altered, it ceases to be a nonconforming sign and must conform with the provisions of this chapter. Structural alteration means any action that changes the height, size, or shape of the sign or any action that affects the base or support(s) of the sign.
E. When the footprint of a building containing a business or activity associated with a nonconforming sign is enlarged 200 percent or more, then such sign must be brought into conformity with this chapter.
F. When a business or activity containing a nonconforming sign changes the type of the business, then such sign must be brought into conformance with this chapter.
G. Such signs may be removed for maintenance for periods not to exceed 60 days. If removed for a longer period they must comply with provisions of this chapter upon reinstallation. This does not apply to existing billboards, but once removed for more than 60 days billboards cannot be replaced.
Figure 19.67.130
Acceptable and unacceptable changes to nonconforming signs.
![]() |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
In case any sign must be installed, erected, constructed or maintained in violation of any of the terms of this title, the Director must notify in writing the owner or lessee thereof to alter such sign so as to comply with this title. Failure to comply with any of the provisions of this chapter must be deemed a violation and must be punishable under AMC Title 20.
Signs on public property and in public right-of-way deemed to be in violation of this chapter may be removed by the city upon notice of the violation. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. If any section, sentence, clause, phrase, word, portion, or provision of this chapter is held invalid or unconstitutional by any court of competent jurisdiction, such decision must not affect, impair, or invalidate any other section, sentence, clause, phrase, word, portion, or provision of this chapter which can be given effect without the invalid provision.
B. The invalidation of the application of any section, sentence, clause, phrase, word, portion, or provision of this chapter to a particular property or structure, or any particular properties or structures, by any court of competent jurisdiction must not affect the application of such section, sentence, clause, phrase, word, portion or provision to any other property or structure not specifically included in said invalidation. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
The purposes of this chapter are as follows:
A. Establish development regulations consistent with the city’s Comprehensive Plan;
B. Protect property values and promote tourism through protection of scenic vistas of the mountains, tree-covered hillsides, the waterfront, and tourist-related zones and areas;
C. Facilitate the use of public property and structures for wireless service facilities to reduce the impact of such facilities upon residential and other property;
D. Maintain the quality of life associated with the aesthetic character of the city’s surroundings;
E. Provide adequate sites for locating wireless service facilities in areas where the adverse impact on the community is minimal;
F. Provide facilities and infrastructure to provide wireless communications service to city residents, businesses, and others when in Anacortes;
G. Encourage optimal colocation and sharing of new and existing facilities, and minimize the total number of towers throughout the community;
H. Encourage use of most appropriate technology and prompt removal of outdated or abandoned wireless service facilities;
I. Encourage the location of wireless service facilities upon alternative support structures;
J. Require that the design of wireless service facilities incorporate camouflage, disguise, screening and concealment technology so that such facilities blend into their surroundings;
K. Avoid the potential damage to adjacent properties from tower failure by engineering and careful siting of tower structure;
L. Enhance the ability of the providers of wireless services to provide such services to the community quickly, effectively, and efficiently; and
M. Provide a level, nondiscriminatory, competitive environment, thereby encouraging increased competition among providers of functionally equivalent wireless services. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Except as otherwise provided herein, the placement of any wireless service facility at any location within the city is subject to the provisions of this chapter.
B. The standards and process requirements of this chapter supersede all other review process and approval criteria, setback, height or landscaping requirements of this title.
C. Except as provided herein, all wireless telecommunication service facilities must comply with the provisions of this chapter. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. A Definitions.
“Antenna” means any exterior transmitting or receiving device mounted on a tower, building or structure and used in communications that radiates or captures electromagnetic waves, digital signals, analog signals, radio frequencies (excluding radar signals), wireless telecommunications signals or other communication signals.
B. B Definitions.
“Base station” means a structure or equipment at a fixed location that enables FCC licensed or authorized wireless communications between user equipment and a communications network. The term does not encompass a tower or any equipment associated with a tower.
1. The term includes, but is not limited to, equipment associated with wireless communications services such as private, broadcast, and public safety services, as well as unlicensed wireless services and fixed wireless services such as microwave backhaul.
2. The term includes, but is not limited to, radio transceivers, antennas, coaxial or fiber-optic cable, regular and backup power supplies, and comparable equipment, regardless of technological configuration (including distributed antenna systems and small-cell networks).
3. The term includes any structure other than a tower that supports or houses equipment that has been reviewed and approved under the applicable zoning or siting process, or under another state or local regulatory review process, even if the structure was not built for the sole or primary purpose of providing such support.
4. The term does not include any structure that does not support or house equipment for wireless telecommunications services.
C. C Definitions.
“Camouflage” means a palette of techniques used to disguise, hide and conceal a wireless service facility from public view by blending its appearance into elements of the visual background. The term connotes the use of paint, landscaping, building materials and artificial screens in patterns that merge with the elements in the background environment.
“Colocation,” for the purposes of eligible facilities requests, means the placement or installation of wireless facilities on existing structures that include a wireless facility or a wireless support structure, including water towers and other buildings or structures. The term includes the placement, replacement, or modification of wireless facilities within an approved equipment compound.
“Colocation,” for the purpose of applications to site small wireless facilities and other wireless facilities, excluding eligible facilities requests, means:
1. Mounting or installing an antenna facility on a preexisting structure; and/or
2. Modifying a structure for the purpose of mounting or installing an antenna facility on that structure.
D. D Definitions.
“Director” means the Director of Planning, Community, and Economic Development.
E. E Definitions.
“Electrical transmission tower” means a structure that physically supports high-voltage overhead power lines. The term does not include a utility pole.
“Eligible facilities request” or “EFR” means any request for modification of an existing tower or base station that does not substantially change the physical dimension of such tower or base station, involving:
1. Colocation of new transmission equipment;
2. Removal of transmission equipment; or
3. Replacement of transmission equipment.
“Eligible support structure” means any tower or base station; provided, that it exists at the time the relevant EFR application is filed with the state or local government.
“Equipment cabinet” means an enclosure that is mounted above base flood elevation or placed on a concrete slab that contains improvements, personal property, and facilities to operate its wireless services, including: radio receivers, transmitters, related facilities, and/or related cables and utility lines, location-based power sources, the electrical meter and any other necessary equipment.
“Equipment shelter” means an enclosed structure, shed or box at the base of a mount to store improvements, personal property, and facilities to operate its wireless services, including: radio receivers, transmitters, related facilities, and/or cabinets, related cables and utility lines, location-based power sources, the electrical meter and any other necessary equipment.
“Existing.” Any tower or base station is existing for purposes of this chapter if it has been reviewed and approved under the applicable zoning or siting process, or under another state or local regulatory review process; provided, that a tower that has not been reviewed and approved because it was not permitted when it was built, but was lawfully constructed, is existing for purposes of this chapter.
F. F Definitions.
“Facilities” means all of the towers, equipment, fixtures, antennas, equipment cabinets, equipment shelters, and other appurtenances necessary to furnish and deliver wireless services, including but not limited to utility poles and monopoles with cross arms or without cross arms, wires, lines, conduits, cables, communication and signal lines and equipment, braces, guys, anchors, vaults, and all attachments, appurtenances, and appliances necessary or incidental to the distribution and use of wireless services. Facilities include “small wireless facilities” as defined in subsection S of this section.
“FCC” or “Federal Communications Commission” means the federal agency, or its lawful successor, authorized to regulate and oversee wireless telecommunications carriers, services and providers.
L. L Definitions.
“Lattice tower” means a type of mount that is self-supporting with multiple legs and cross bracing of structural steel.
M. M Definitions.
“Monopole” means a type of mount that is self-supporting with a single shaft of wood, steel or concrete and a platform or racks for panel antennas arrayed at the top. A monopole includes self-supporting mounts that provide light (or light poles).
P. P Definitions.
“Public street” means any highway, street, road, alley or other public way for motor vehicle travel within the city and under the jurisdiction and control of the city which has been acquired, established, dedicated or devoted to street purposes.
R. R Definitions.
“Right(s)-of-way” means all public streets and associated property granted or reserved for, or dedicated to, public use for street purposes, together with public property granted or reserved for, or dedicated to, public use for walkways, sidewalks, bikeways and horse trails, whether improved or unimproved, including any air rights, subsurface rights or easements related thereto.
S. S Definitions.
“Service provider” means every corporation, company, association, joint stock association, firm, partnership, person, city, town, or other legal entity owning, operating, or managing any facilities used to provide and providing wireless telecommunications services for hire, sale, or resale to the general public. Service provider includes the legal successor to any such corporation, company, association, joint stock association, firm, partnership, person, city, town, or other legal entity.
“Site” means the current boundaries of the leased or owned property surrounding the facility and any access or utility easements currently related to the site, and for other eligible support structures, further restricted to that area in proximity to the structure and to other transmission equipment already deployed on the ground.
“Small wireless facility” encompasses facilities that meet the following conditions:
The facilities—
1. Are mounted on structures 50 feet or less in height, including their antennas;
2. Are mounted on structures no more than 10 percent taller than other adjacent structures; or
3. Do not extend existing structures on which they are located to a height of more than 50 feet or by more than 10 percent, whichever is greater;
Each antenna associated with the deployment, excluding associated antenna equipment, is no more than three cubic feet in volume;
All other wireless equipment associated with the structure, including the wireless equipment associated with the antenna and any preexisting associated equipment on the structure, is no more than 28 cubic feet in volume;
The facilities do not require antenna structure registration under federal law;
The facilities are not located on tribal lands, where tribal lands means all lands within the exterior boundaries of any Indian reservation and all dependent Indian communities; and
The facilities do not result in human exposure to radio-frequency radiation in excess of the applicable safety standards specified under federal law pertaining to wireless facilities.
“Stealthing” means designing facilities to be architecturally incorporated into the surrounding community’s environs while minimizing aesthetic impacts. Examples of stealthing include, but are not limited to, steeples, windmills, water towers, flagpoles, light poles, or chimneys.
T. T Definitions.
“Telecommunications” means the transmission, between or among points specified by the user, of information of the user’s choosing, without change in the form or content of the information as sent and received.
“Tower” means any structure that is designed and constructed primarily for the purpose of supporting one or more antennas for telephone, radio, and similar communication purposes, including self-supporting lattice towers, guyed towers, or monopole towers. The term includes radio and television transmission towers, microwave towers, common-carrier towers, cellular telephone towers, alternative tower structures, and the like. The term includes the structure and any support thereto.
“Transmission equipment” means equipment that disseminates information by wire, radio, optic cable, electromagnetic, or similar means for any FCC licensed or authorized wireless telecommunication service, including, but not limited to, radio transceivers, antennas, coaxial or fiber-optic cable, and regular and backup power supply. The term includes equipment associated with wireless telecommunications services including, but not limited to, private, broadcast, and public safety services, as well as unlicensed wireless services and fixed wireless services such as microwave backhaul.
U. U Definitions.
“Utility pole” means a pole privately owned or installed by a utility company for the purpose of electrical transmission.
W. W Definitions.
“Wireless” means communications using radio frequency or optical emissions to complete one or more communications paths in whole or in part among originating and receiving points without other tangible physical connection, including, without limitation, radio and unguided optical waves, and the apparatus used for such transmission.
“Wireless support structure” means a freestanding structure that is designed to support or is capable of supporting wireless facilities. The term does not include a utility pole, monopole, or tower.
“Wireless telecommunications service” or “wireless service” means the transmission of information by wire, radio, optic cable, electromagnetic, or similar means for hire, sale or resale to the general public. For the purpose of this subsection, “information” means knowledge or intelligence represented by any form of writing, signs, signals, pictures, sounds, or any other symbols. For the purpose of this chapter, “wireless telecommunications service” excludes the over-the-air transmission of broadcast television or broadcast radio signals and excludes “cable services,” “cable communications systems” and “CATV systems” as defined in Chapter 5.44. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. New Facilities. A wireless service facility (WSF) permit or wireless conditional use permit (WCUP) is required prior to the site preparation, construction, or installation of any new wireless service facility. The permit required in each zone is specified in AMC 19.68.190.
B. Colocating Facilities. A wireless service facility (WSF) permit or wireless conditional use permit (WCUP) is required in every zone prior to the colocation of any wireless service facility and is required for modifications that qualify as a substantial change. Colocations involving modifications under subsection (C) of this section are exempt from this requirement.
C. Nonsubstantial Change. A modification to an existing facility that involves the addition, removal, and/or replacement of transmission equipment that meets the criteria for a nonsubstantial change as set forth in AMC 19.68.060 must submit an eligible facility request application. A WSF or WCUP will not be required for these types of modifications.
D. Substantial Change. A modification to an existing facility that involves the addition, removal, and/or replacement of transmission equipment that is a substantial change as defined in AMC 19.68.050 is subject to the requirements for new facilities or colocations as applicable.
E. No wireless service facility permit may be issued under this chapter unless the applicant demonstrates compliance with the terms, conditions and performance standards set forth in this chapter. Any WCUP must also meet the criteria for said use permits set forth in AMC 19.68.130.
F. A building permit is also required for any new wireless facility or colocating facility. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. “Substantial change” for purposes of this chapter means a modification to an existing facility that meets any of the following criteria:
Criteria 1.
a. For towers outside of public rights-of-way, if the modification increases the height of the tower by the greater of: (a) more than 10 percent, or (b) by the height of one additional antenna array, with separation from the nearest existing antenna not to exceed 20 feet; or
b. For those towers in the rights-of-way and for all base stations, if the modification increases the height of the tower or base station by the greater of: (a) 10 percent, or (b) 10 feet.
Criteria 2.
a. For towers outside of public rights-of-way, if the modification involves adding an appurtenance to the body of the tower that protrudes from the edge of the tower the greater of: (a) 20 feet, or (b) the width of the tower structure at the level of the appurtenance; or
b. For other eligible support structures, if the modification protrudes from the edge of the structure more than six feet.
Criteria 3.
a. For any eligible wireless support structure, if the installation includes more than the standard number of new equipment cabinets, not to exceed four; or
b. For towers in the public rights-of-way and base stations, if the modification involves installation of any new equipment cabinets on the ground if there are no preexisting ground cabinets associated with the structure, or else involves installation of ground cabinets that are more than 10 percent larger in height or overall volume than any other ground cabinets associated with the structure.
Criterion 4. For any eligible support structure, if the modification entails any excavation or deployment outside the current site.
Criterion 5. For any eligible support structure, if the modification defeats the existing concealment elements of the tower, base station, or any other wireless support structure.
Criterion 6. For any eligible support structure, if the modification violates any of the conditions of approval (besides modification allowed under criteria Nos. 1 through 5 associated with prior approval(s)). (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. “Nonsubstantial change” means a modification that meets all of the following criteria:
Criteria 1.
a. For towers outside of public rights-of-way, if the modification does not increase the height of the tower by the greater of: (a) more than 10 percent, or (b) by the height of one additional antenna array, with separation from the nearest existing antenna not to exceed 20 feet; or
b. For those towers in the rights-of-way and for all base stations, if the modification does not increase the height of the tower or base station by the lesser of: (a) 10 percent or (b) 10 feet.
Criteria 2.
a. For towers outside of public rights-of-way, if the modification does not protrude from the edge of the tower by the greater of: (a) 20 feet, or (b) the width of the tower structure at the level of the appurtenance; or
b. For those towers in the rights-of-way and for all base stations, if the modification does not protrude from the edge of the structure more than six feet.
Criteria 3.
a. For any eligible support structure, if the installation includes new equipment cabinets, the modification does not include the installation of more than four equipment cabinets; or
b. For towers in the public rights-of-way and base stations, if the modification does not involve the installation of any new equipment cabinets on the ground if there are no preexisting ground cabinets associated with the tower, and does not involve the installation of ground cabinets that are more than 10 percent larger in height or overall volume than any other ground cabinets associated with the tower.
Criterion 4. For any eligible support structure, if the modification does not entail any excavation or deployment outside the current site.
Criterion 5. For any eligible support structure, if the modification does not defeat the existing concealment elements of the tower or base station or other wireless support structure.
Criterion 6. For any eligible support structure, if the modification does not violate any of the conditions of approval (besides modification allowed under criteria Nos. 1 through 5 associated with prior approval(s)). (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. An optional pre-application may be submitted up to 30 days prior to the submission of an eligible facilities request application, or a permit application associated with a small wireless facility or other wireless facility. The information submitted along with a pre-application may include the following information:
1. The name and address of the applicant.
2. Identification of all carriers using the facility.
3. The type of facility proposed.
4. If the applicant is not the owner or person in control of the eligible support structure or site, an attestation that the owner or person in control of the eligible support structure and/or site has consented to the proposed facility modification. If the eligible support structure is to be located within a public right-of-way, the applicant must also attest that the applicant has authorization to install, maintain, and operate transmission equipment in, under and above the public right-of-way.
5. A stamped report by a state of Washington registered professional engineer demonstrating compliance with existing structural, electrical, and safety codes, and describing the general structural capacity of the eligible facility, small wireless facility, or other wireless facility.
6. Detailed site plan and drawings.
7. Dimensioned elevation drawings of the existing tower or structure showing the existing and proposed antennas, and equipment structures (at 1/8" = 1' or comparable scale).
8. Copies of the land use or building permit approval that authorized the original installation of the tower or wireless facilities on the structure.
9. If new equipment cabinets, generators, or any other ground equipment components are being proposed, an assessment of noise that shows compliance with city and/or federal noise standards.
10. A description of compliance with the applicable visibility and performance standards set forth in AMC 19.68.200.
11. A stamped report by a state of Washington registered professional engineer demonstrating compliance with radio-frequency emissions standards. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. For the purposes of this section, a complete application includes:
1. The name and address of the applicant.
2. Identification of all carriers using the facility.
3. An assertion that the proposed facilities modification is subject to review under Section 6409 of the Spectrum Act.
4. If the applicant is not the owner or person in control of the eligible support structure or site, an attestation that the owner or person in control of the eligible support structure and/or site has consented to the proposed facility modification. If the eligible support structure is to be located within a public right-of-way, the applicant must also attest that the applicant has authorization to install, maintain, and operate transmission equipment in, under and above the public right-of-way.
5. If the proposed modification will alter the exterior dimensions or appearance of the eligible support structure, the applicant shall include a detailed visual simulation depicting how the eligible support structure will appear after the proposed modification is complete, and particularly, how concealment or stealth will be extended with the modification. The visual simulation shall depict to scale the eligible support structure in relation to the trees, landscaping and other structures adjacent to, or in the immediate vicinity of, the eligible support structure.
6. If the applicant proposes a modification to a tower, an attestation that the proposed modifications will comply with existing structural, electrical, and safety codes, and a description of the general structural capacity of the tower with the proposed modification.
7. If the applicant proposes a modification to a base station, an attestation that the proposed modifications will comply with existing structural, electrical, and safety codes.
8. If the applicant proposes a modification requiring alteration to the eligible support structure, excavation, installation of new equipment cabinets, or other activities impacting or altering the land, existing structures, fencing or landscaping the applicant must submit a detailed site plan and drawings, showing the point of true north, and an appropriate scale depicting:
a. The location, elevation, and dimensions of the existing eligible support structure;
b. The location, elevation, and dimensions of the existing transmission equipment;
c. The location, elevation and dimensions of the transmission equipment, if any, proposed to be colocated or that will replace existing transmission equipment;
d. The location, elevation and dimensions of any proposed new equipment cabinets and the intended use of each;
e. Any proposed modification to the eligible support structure;
f. The location of existing structures on the site, including fencing, screening, trees, and other significant site features; and
g. The location of any areas where excavation is proposed showing the elevations, depths, and width of the proposed excavation and materials and dimensions of the equipment to be placed in the area excavated.
9. If excavation or deployment is proposed outside the current site of the tower or base station, a description of the boundaries of the site together with a scale drawing based on an accurate traverse, with angular and lineal dimensions showing the tower or base station with respect to the site. The city may require a survey by a land surveyor licensed in the state of Washington when, in the judgment of the approval authority, a survey is reasonably necessary to verify the boundaries of the site.
10. If the applicant proposes a modification that will protrude from the edge of a non-tower eligible support structure, record drawings, as-built plans, or the equivalent, showing at a minimum the edge of the eligible support structure at the location of the proposed modification.
11. Copies of the land use or building permit approval that authorized the original installation of the tower or wireless facilities on the structure, or any subsequent approval(s) granting modification to the tower or wireless facilities on the structure, if available.
12. If new equipment cabinets, generators, or any other ground equipment components are being proposed, an assessment of noise that shows compliance with city and/or federal noise standards.
13. A stamped report by a state of Washington registered professional engineer demonstrating compliance with federal radio-frequency emissions standards for wireless facilities.
B. Waiver of Submittal Requirement. The approval authority may waive any submittal requirement upon determination that the required submittal, or part thereof, is not reasonably related to the nonsubstantial change criteria. A waiver, to be effective, must be in writing and signed by the approval authority.
C. Eligible facilities for review under this section include nonsubstantial changes to the physical dimensions of the base structure or tower, involving (a) colocation of new transmission equipment; (b) removal of transmission equipment; or (c) replacement of transmission structure.
D. Within the applicable time frame for review set forth in AMC 19.68.150, the city must approve the application unless it determines that the application involves a substantial change. If the city determines that the application involves a substantial change, the applicant must submit the appropriate permit application required, if any, under the requirements in AMC 19.68.100. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Application. A complete application for a wireless service facility permit or wireless conditional use permit must include the following information and materials on a form provided by the Director. Applications for small wireless facilities may be submitted in batches of applications, which may encompass up to five separate applications filed at the same time, each for one or more sites, or a single application covering up to five sites, unless the city agrees to a larger number based upon its capacity to review additional applications. For the purposes of this section, a complete application includes:
1. The name and address of the applicant.
2. Identification of all carriers using the facility.
3. If the applicant is not the owner or person in control of the eligible support structure or site, an attestation that the owner or person in control of the eligible support structure and/or site has consented to the proposed facility modification. If the eligible support structure is to be located within a public right-of-way, the applicant must also attest that the applicant has authorization to install, maintain, and operate transmission equipment in, under and above the public right-of-way.
4. An attestation that the permittee will comply with existing structural, electrical, and safety codes, and a description of the general structural capacity of the new small wireless facility or the facility upon which the small wireless facility is to be colocated.
5. A description of compliance with the applicable visibility and performance standards set forth in AMC 19.68.200. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. A scaled site plan clearly indicating the location, type and height of the proposed facility, or colocation, on-site land uses and zoning, adjacent land uses and zoning, comprehensive plan classification of the site, proposed means of access, setbacks from property lines, spacing between tower(s) and other wireless facilities, elevation drawings of the proposed tower and any other structures, topography of the site, and proposed parking;
b. If the proposed small wireless facility siting involves a colocation that will alter the exterior dimensions or appearance of an existing facility, applicant shall include a detailed visual simulation depicting how the existing facility will appear after the proposed modification is complete, and particularly, how concealment or stealth will be extended, if applicable. The visual simulation shall depict to scale the existing facility with any colocation in relation to the trees, landscaping and other structures adjacent to, or in the immediate vicinity of, the eligible support structure;
c. Legal description of the parent tract and leased parcel (if applicable);
d. If new equipment cabinets, generators, or any other ground equipment components are being proposed:
i. An assessment of noise that shows compliance with city and/or federal noise standards;
ii. A description of the method of concealment of equipment components, such as: whether such components will be located within an existing building, within an architecturally compatible addition to an existing building, or within a new building which is architecturally compatible with other buildings on the site and adjoining properties; located underground; or within an equipment cabinet or shelter;
iii. If equipment is proposed to be concealed within an equipment cabinet or shelter that will be located aboveground, a description of the landscaping and screening, if technically feasible;
e. Any engineering report(s) required to show feasibility of meeting the applicable criteria in this section as applicable.
6. A stamped report by a state of Washington registered professional engineer or an assessment demonstrating compliance with federal radio-frequency emissions standards applicable to wireless facilities.
B. Waiver of Submittal Requirement. The approval authority may waive any submittal requirement upon determination that the required submittal, or part thereof, would materially inhibit wireless service. A waiver, to be effective, must be in writing and signed by the approval authority.
C. Fee. Every application for a small wireless service facility permit or wireless conditional use permit must be accompanied by an application fee, which will be set by the City Council in its unified fee schedule, to reimburse the city for the costs of reviewing the application, including any third-party review required by the city, and fees equal to a reasonable approximation of the objectively reasonable costs for the attachment to or use of property owned or controlled by the city. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Application. A complete application for a wireless service facility permit or wireless conditional use permit for wireless facilities other than small wireless facilities and eligible support structures or EFRs must include the following information and materials on a form provided by the Director. For the purposes of this section, a complete application includes:
1. The name and address of the applicant.
2. Identification of all carriers using the facility.
3. If the applicant is not the owner or person in control of the eligible support structure or site, an attestation that the owner or person in control of the eligible support structure and/or site has consented to the proposed facility modification. If the eligible support structure is to be located within a public right-of-way, the applicant must also attest that the applicant has authorization to install, maintain, and operate transmission equipment in, under and above the public right-of-way.
4. A description of compliance with the applicable visibility and performance standards set forth in AMC 19.68.200. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. A scaled site plan clearly indicating the location, type and height of the proposed facility, or colocation, on-site land uses and zoning, adjacent land uses and zoning, comprehensive plan classification of the site, proposed means of access, setbacks from property lines, spacing between tower(s) and other structures, elevation drawings of the proposed tower and any other structures, topography of the site, and proposed parking;
b. Legal description of the parent tract and leased parcel;
d. Method of fencing, the finished color and/or the method of camouflage and illumination.
5. A description of compliance with the additional requirements in this chapter for colocating and/or for conditional uses, if applicable.
6. If new equipment cabinets, generators, or any other ground equipment components are being proposed: (a) an assessment of noise that shows compliance with city and/or federal noise standards.
7. A stamped report by a state of Washington registered professional engineer demonstrating compliance with radio-frequency emissions standards as set forth in AMC 19.68.240.
B. New Facilities. In addition to the application materials delineated in subsection A of this section, an application for a new wireless facility must provide:
1. A notarized statement by the applicant as to whether construction of a new facility will accommodate colocating of additional antennas for future users.
2. An explanation of how the proposed new facility at the proposed location is necessary to do one of the following: fill a significant gap in service, to introduce new services, to densify a network, or to otherwise improve service capabilities.
3. A description of the suitability of the use of existing facilities, including towers or other structures to provide the services to be provided through the use of the proposed new facility.
4. Any other engineering report(s) required to show feasibility of meeting the applicable criteria in subsections A and/or B of this section as applicable;
C. Third-Party Review. The city may require the applicant to submit its materials to a third party for review, as may be reasonably necessary to determine compliance with this chapter, such as an engineer or architect, by way of example only.
D. Fee. Every application for a wireless service facility permit or wireless conditional use permit must be accompanied by an application fee, which will be set by the City Council in its unified fee schedule, to reimburse the city for the costs of reviewing the application, including any third-party review required by the city, and fees equal to a reasonable approximation of the objectively reasonable costs for the attachment to or use of property owned or controlled by the city. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Wireless Service Facility Permit (WSF). The review process for wireless service facility permit applications is that for a Type 1 (Administrative Ministerial Action) as delineated in Table 19.20.030-1.
B. Wireless Conditional Use Permit (WCUP). The review process for wireless conditional use permit applications is that for a Type 3-HE review, delineated in Table 19.20.030-1. The criteria for a conditional use permit as set forth in AMC Chapter 19.36 do not apply.
C. The only applicable sections of AMC Chapter 19.20 for the purposes of this chapter are AMC 19.20.140 (Application—Notice), 19.20.150 (Application—Department review), 19.20.160 (Public hearings and meetings), 19.20.170 (Public hearing—Notice), and 19.20.190 (Decision—Notice). The appeal section in this chapter supersedes the appeal sections in AMC Chapter 19.20.
D. This permit approval process does not apply to eligible facility requests. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. In evaluating a permit application under this chapter, the decision-maker must examine the following criteria:
1. Whether all requisite licenses, certificates, and authorizations from applicable federal, state, and local agencies have been obtained by the applicant;
2. Whether the applicant has shown that its proposed facility or colocation meets the standards and criteria set forth in this chapter, including the visibility and performance criteria set forth in AMC 19.68.200;
3. Whether the applicant has shown that its proposed facility meets any additional requirements in this chapter for colocating and/or wireless conditional uses, if applicable.
B. For a new wireless facility or a new small wireless facility, whether it is necessary to introduce new services, to densify a network, or to otherwise improve service capabilities.
C. Decision. After considering all information submitted, and the record on file and from any hearing, the decision-maker will decide whether to grant, deny, or grant the permit with conditions, and must issue a written decision containing findings of fact supported by substantial evidence, based on the criteria above.
D. Issued Permit. Any wireless service facility permit that is issued under this chapter must contain the location, nature, and extent of approved use, together with all conditions that are imposed. A copy of the permit will be kept on file and reviewed annually by the administering city official. If, at any time, the use no longer complies with the stated conditions, the owner will be declared in violation of this chapter. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. In addition to the general criteria for approval uses set forth in this chapter, the following criteria apply to all permits denominated as conditional uses:
1. The applicant must demonstrate that visual, noise, and other impacts associated with the proposed facility have been minimized to the maximum extent possible using existing concealment technology, site design, noise abatement techniques, concealment, disguise, camouflage, and/or the use of architecturally compatible improvements to existing structures where permitted, and/or underground placement of ancillary equipment. In evaluating the site design, consideration will be given to whether the facility will blend into the surrounding topography, tree coverage, foliage, and other natural features and whether locating the facility in alternative locations upon the subject property, or reasonably available properties, would better conceal the facility through use of existing natural and built features;
2. The applicant must demonstrate compatibility of the proposed structure with the height and mass of existing buildings and structures in the area;
3. The applicant must demonstrate that the design of the proposed facility complies with the purpose and intent of this chapter, including, but not limited to, the visibility and performance standards set forth in AMC 19.68.200 which most closely match the proposed facility;
4. The applicant must demonstrate that alternative locations, including other colocations and alternative support structures, are not available for the proposed facility;
5. The applicant must demonstrate that the proposed facility is not in conflict with the health and safety of the community;
6. The applicant must demonstrate that the proposed facility will be supported by adequate public facilities or services and will not adversely affect public services to the surrounding area or conditions can be established to mitigate adverse impacts on such facilities.
B. In evaluating any proposed wireless service facility denominated as a conditional use, the Director may, at the expense of the applicant, retain an outside consultant to review the technical, design and other materials submitted by the applicant in conjunction with the proposal. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Completeness Review. Applications must be reviewed for completeness within 30 days of receipt, except for applications to site small wireless facilities, which must be reviewed for completeness within 10 days of receipt. If the application is not reviewed for completeness within the applicable time frame, it will be deemed complete.
B. Tolling. For applications to site small wireless facilities, the review period resets once an applicant submits its additional materials. For all other applications deemed incomplete, the review period is tolled for up to 60 days. Once an applicant submits additional materials, the review time frame begins to run again. If the applicant does not submit the required materials, the city may deny the application.
C. Submittal of Additional Materials. If an applicant submits additional materials, the Director must provide notice within 10 days as to any additional materials identified in the original notice that were not provided with the supplemental materials. Second or subsequent notices of incompleteness may not specify missing documents or information that was not delineated in the original notice of incompleteness. For second or subsequent notices of incompleteness, the review time frame will be tolled for all applications including for siting small wireless facilities. If the applicant does not submit the required materials, the city may deny the application.
D. Failure to Act. If the decision-maker fails to approve or deny a request seeking approval for either a wireless service facility permit or wireless conditional use permit within the applicable time frame for review, accounting for any tolling, the request is deemed granted. The deemed grant does not become effective until the applicant notifies the applicable reviewing authority in writing after the review period has expired that the application has been deemed granted. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
The time frame for review of an application for a wireless facility permit or wireless conditional use permit begins to run when an application is submitted, not when the application is deemed complete.
Modifications that Are Not Substantial | Colocating Wireless Facilities | New Wireless Facility | Colocating Small Wireless Facilities | New Small Wireless Facility | |
Time Frame | Approval required within 60 days from receipt of submission of application. | Written decision due within 90 days from submission of application. | Written decision due within 150 days from submission of application. | Written decision due within 60 days from submission of application. | Written decision due within 90 days from submission of application. |
Notes | If the city finds that the application involves a substantial change, the city may process the application as one for a new facility or deny the application. | This provision does not apply to small wireless facilities. | This provision does not apply to small wireless facilities. |
(Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Construction within Two Years. Construction or substantial progress toward construction of a facility for which a permit has been issued pursuant to this chapter must be undertaken within two years after approval of the permit. Substantial progress toward construction includes, but is not limited to, the letting of bids, making of contracts, and purchase of materials involved in development.
B. Tolling. In determining whether the two-year period has run, time during which litigation has been pending related to the construction of the facility must not be included.
C. Extension and Termination. The city may, at its discretion, extend the two-year period for a reasonable time, based on factors including the inability to expeditiously obtain other required governmental permits prior to the commencement of construction. If a facility for which a permit has been granted has not been completed within three years after the approval of a permit, the city must review the permit upon the expiration of three years, and upon a showing of good cause for the delay, either (1) extend the permit for one year; or (2) terminate the permit. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
Appeals may be commenced on an action by the decision-maker on a permit application, within 30 days of such act or failure to act, in any court of competent jurisdiction. This section supersedes the city’s administrative appeal process set forth in AMC 19.20.210. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Lattice and guyed wire towers are not permitted in any zoning district.
B. Commercial advertising, including billboards and business identification signs, may not be used as alternative antenna support structures. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
New wireless service facilities, which include new small wireless facilities, are permitted as follows, with the type of permit indicated. For those facilities located within a right-of-way, a master permit and construction permit for such use is required under the provisions of AMC Chapter 5.38. The zones referred to below are defined in the city’s general zoning code.
Type of Facility | Residential Zones (R1, R2, R2A, R3, R3A, R4, R4A, OT) | Mixed Use Zones (CBD, C, MMU, CM, CM2, P) | Industrial Zones (LM, LM1, MS, HM, I, AZ) |
Monopole | Permitted with WCUP | Permitted with WSF, except permitted with WCUP in P and except not permitted in CBD | Permitted with WSF |
Utility Poles | Permitted with WCUP | Permitted with WSF, except permitted with WCUP in P, and except not permitted in CBD | Permitted with WSF |
Electric Transmission Towers | Permitted with WSF, except permitted with WCUP in OT | Permitted with WSF, except permitted with WCUP in P and except not permitted in CBD | Permitted with WSF |
Water Tank Mounted | Permitted with WSF, except permitted with WCUP in OT | Permitted with WSF | Permitted with WSF |
Playfield, Ball Field and Stadium Light Mounted Facilities | Permitted with WCUP | Permitted with WSF | Permitted with WSF |
Building Attached | Permitted with WSF, only on buildings with nonresidential uses, and except permitted with WCUP in OT | Permitted with WSF | Permitted with WSF |
Stealth Support Structure | Permitted with WSF, except permitted with WCUP in OT | Permitted with WSF, except permitted with WCUP in P | Permitted with WSF |
Small Wireless Facility on an Existing or Replacement Structure | Permitted with WSF | Permitted with WSF | Permitted with WSF |
Other Types Not Listed | Permitted with WCUP | Permitted with WCUP | Permitted with WCUP |
(Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
All wireless service facilities locating within Anacortes must comply with the following standards:
A. Standards for all types of facilities:
General | 1. All portions of the facility must be the minimum size necessary to support operation of the facility, as certified by the provider’s licensed engineer. Where multiple facilities are proposed to be located in close proximity, they may be required to be consolidated in one equipment housing structure. 2. Owners and operators must provide information regarding the opportunity for the colocation of facilities. Provision for future colocation may be required if technically feasible and where opportunities for smaller facilities with fewer impacts are limited due to topography, lack of existing aboveground structures or other circumstances. |
Antennas (including small wireless facilities) | 1. In general, an antenna array must either be flush mounted within 12 inches of the support structure, or within 12 inches of the face of the building it is attached to; or be contained in a canister that is a continuation of the support structure and is centered on top of the support structure; or be placed pursuant to the city’s adopted design standards, subject to the concealment requirements below. 2. All antennas or arrays must be a color and material that matches the support structure. 3. Roof-mounted installation is permitted when the city’s adopted design and the Appearance and Screening requirements below have been met. The antennas, mounting brackets and any concealment structures are exempt from the height limit of the underlying zone to the extent that the total height of such facilities does not increase the overall building height by 18 feet, or 50 percent of the original building height, whichever is less. |
Equipment Cabinets, Shelters, and Undergrounding | 1. All equipment necessary for the operation of the facility must be concealed, either within an existing building, within an architecturally compatible addition to an existing building, or within a new building which is architecturally compatible with other buildings on the site and adjoining properties; or located underground with exceptions as stated in AMC Chapter 19.59, and excepting equipment cabinets and shelters, which may be located aboveground, and landscaped and screened pursuant to the city’s typical landscaping requirements. 2. This section does not apply to antennas or other facilities that are required to remain aboveground in order to be functional, or if it would otherwise materially inhibit wireless service. 3. Underground shelters are not allowed where such shelters would interfere with existing uses of public land including, but not limited to, public rights-of-way. Equipment enclosures less than or equal to five cubic feet, with no single dimension over three feet, may be mounted directly on a monopole or utility pole. These dimension limitations do not apply to small wireless facilities. 4. Equipment cabinets and shelters are permitted upon abutting private property and may be located within public rights-of-way, pursuant to the applicable requirements and obtaining the appropriate permits specified in AMC Chapter 5.38. 5. The size of equipment cabinets and shelters must be minimized to the greatest extent possible. 6. Prefabricated concrete and metal structures for equipment enclosures are not permitted unless treated with a facade giving the appearance of masonry or wood siding and are compatible with the existing neighborhood and surrounding setting. |
Appearance and Screening | The following standards must be met to ensure the facility minimizes its visual impact: 1. Design and configurations must be compatible with the existing neighborhood, blend in with the surrounding setting, and/or be screened from surrounding uses and properties. 2. Design and configurations must minimize visual intrusion of the facility on surrounding uses and properties. Such techniques may include, for example: containing transmission and power cables and other conduit within any support structure, locating facilities underground, or otherwise screening the facility; minimizing the lateral projection of antenna arrays to the greatest extent technically feasible; and integrating antenna arrays into the design of any structure to which they are attached. 3. Facilities on private property must be screened through the use of mature trees that are a minimum of 20 feet tall and planted to screen at least 80 percent of the area around the facility, if technically feasible. 4. For stealth supported structures, the structure must be designed to resemble an object that would be commonly found in the area, including, but not limited to, a flagpole, a clock or bell tower, a tree that is a native conifer species, or a silo. Antennas, to the maximum extent feasible, must be concealed by the stealth support structure, or must not be easily recognized. To determine feasibility, the applicant must submit an engineer’s report regarding the feasibility of concealing the antennas. |
Noise | Noise reduction measures must comply with the city and/or federal noise regulations, whichever demonstrates the least amount of noise impact for the nearest residential dwelling(s) at any time of day or night, as measured from the closest point from the exterior of the dwelling to the wireless facility. Such requirements are exempt during testing of alternative power sources (i.e., power generators or similar emergency power sources). |
1. Facilities and/or equipment cabinets must be surrounded with a minimum of four-feet-wide landscaping, in the applicable zones set forth in the city’s general zoning provisions, if technically feasible. 2. Towers must be landscaped with a buffer of plant materials that effectively screen the view of the tower compound from properties used for residences, if technically feasible. In some cases, natural growth around the property perimeter may provide a sufficient buffer. 3. Existing mature tree growth and natural land forms on the site must be preserved to the maximum extent possible. | |
1. In residential zones, towers, antennas, monopoles, and other wireless facilities and equipment pertaining thereto must not be closer than the greater of 20 feet or 100 percent of the tower height from the adjoining lot line. 2. In nonresidential zones, facilities must comply with the setback requirements set forth in the applicable zoning code, AMC Title 17, and meet or exceed the city or federal noise regulations, whichever demonstrates the least amount of noise impact for the nearest residential dwelling(s), as measured from the closest point from the exterior of the dwelling to the facility. 3. The setback may be reduced if the applicant uses noise abatement techniques, such as decorative noise walls, to achieve equivalent or greater reduction of visual and noise impacts from the facility. 4. For colocations, new equipment associated with the facility must be placed no closer to existing residential uses than any existing equipment enclosure on the subject property. 5. These setback requirements do not apply to SWFs in the ROW. | |
Spacing | 1. In residential zones, towers and their antennas must not be closer than 200 feet or 100 percent of the tower height from the nearest residential dwelling(s), as measured from the closest point from the exterior of the dwelling to the facility. 2. In nonresidential zones, there are no spacing requirements. 3. The minimum spacing requirements herein will not apply if they have the effect of materially inhibiting wireless service. |
B. Standards for specific types of facilities:
New Monopoles (including small wireless facilities) and Stealth Wireless Support Structures | Any wireless service provider that proposes to construct a new monopole or stealth supported facility must provide, as part of its permit application, written findings from a qualified engineer which demonstrate that: 1. Either there are no other facilities reasonably available for colocation; or 2. Any existing facilities reasonably available are not technologically suitable for use by the applicant; and 3. The proposed monopole has been designed in a manner that will allow for the colocation of at least one additional antenna array on the structure, if technically feasible. 4. The height of the monopole may not exceed 120 feet or the height of similar structures permitted in the zone within which it is located, whichever is greater. |
Colocating Monopoles or Utility Poles within Public Rights-of-Way | 1. More than one facility may be colocated on any monopole, subject to the permits and technical feasibility. 2. Monopoles located within public rights-of-way must be located a minimum of 500 feet apart; a shorter distance may be approved if the applicant submits an engineering analysis and equipment specifications that demonstrate the reduced distance is necessary to provide adequate coverage and/or capacity. 3. Where a utility located upon a monopole requires vertical separation between its facilities and the antenna(s), the structure/pole and antenna may be raised or replaced with a taller structure to accommodate the minimum separation requirement, not to exceed 20 feet in the public right-of-way. Any additions must be constructed of similar materials, and have surface treatments which match the color and texture of the original facility. |
Electric Transmission Towers or Utility Poles Outside Public Rights-of-Way | Where a utility located upon the support structure (such as an electric transmission tower) requires vertical separation between its facilities and the antenna(s), the structure/pole and antenna may be raised by a mount or replaced with a taller structure to accommodate the minimum separation requirement, not to exceed 30 feet. Any additions must be constructed of similar materials, and have surface treatments which match the color and texture of the original facility. |
Playfield, Ball Field and Stadium Light Mounted Facilities | Only one facility is permitted on any playfield, ball field, or stadium light. Where lighted signs and illuminated areas are permitted, such illuminating devices must be shaded and directed so as not to be visible from any residentially zoned property. |
Building Attached | The equipment for roof-mounted antennas within the OT zone must be located within the same building on which the antennas are located. This provision will not apply to small wireless facilities if it has the effect of materially inhibiting the provision of service. |
(Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. All wireless facilities colocating within the city of Anacortes must meet the following standards. This section does not apply to eligible facilities requests.
B. Colocations (as defined in AMC 19.68.030(C)) are permitted on existing monopoles and stealth support structure facilities, so long as the colocation maintains the appearance of the existing structure, and does not interfere with the city’s placement of cameras or other public safety uses.
C. The height of the existing facility may be increased by the minimum vertical separation necessary between the facilities, not to exceed 20 feet, except for towers and utility poles outside public rights-of-way, the height of which may be increased by up to 30 feet to accommodate the minimum separation requirement. The height of the existing facility with all increases in height due to colocations may not exceed the general height limitation for similar structures or buildings within the zone in which it is permitted or 120 feet, whichever is greater.
D. Existing monopoles and antenna support structures may be replaced to accommodate colocation. Monopoles and stealth support structures must, to the maximum extent feasible, be located within 20 feet of the existing structure within the public right-of-way, or within 30 feet of the existing structure outside of the public right-of-way, and maintain the design of the original structure, including any stealth or camouflage components. To determine feasibility, the applicant must submit an engineer’s report regarding the feasibility of a proposed replacement.
E. All antenna support structures permitted pursuant to the terms of this chapter or otherwise located within the city of Anacortes must be made available for use by the owner or initial user thereof, together with as many other wireless service providers as can be technically colocated thereon. The owner of an antenna support structure may charge a reasonable fee for the colocation of additional facilities upon said structure which does not exceed the fair market value for the space occupied by said colocated facilities. If the city is the owner, it may not charge a fee that exceeds a reasonable approximation of the objectively reasonable costs associated with siting a small wireless facility on the antenna support structure.
F. Colocating facilities must meet all other visibility and performance standards in AMC 19.68.200. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
All modifications to wireless service facilities to the existing facility, including small wireless facilities, that are nonsubstantial must comply with the following standards:
A. No modification may violate the city or federal noise regulations.
B. No modification may violate the federal radio-frequency emission standards.
C. No modification may violate setback or other lot coverage or height requirements in this chapter. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
The owner and/or operator of all wireless service facilities must maintain their facilities in a good and safe condition and in a manner which complies with all applicable federal, state, and local requirements. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. All wireless service facilities must comply with applicable Federal Communications Commission (FCC) regulations regarding radio-frequency emissions. All tests must be performed by or under the supervision of a professional engineer competent to perform such testing and interpret the data gathered.
B. Reports or similar support documents must be submitted for all facilities confirming compliance with all applicable FCC regulations. Compliance reports are required when requested by the Director.
C. If at any time radio-frequency emission tests show that a facility exceeds any of the standards established by the FCC, the owner or operator thereof must immediately discontinue use of the facility and notify the Director. Use of such facilities may not resume until the owner or operator demonstrates that corrections have been completed which reduce the radio-frequency emissions to levels permitted by the FCC. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. The owner or operator of a wireless service facility must conduct tests necessary to demonstrate compliance with all applicable local regulations regarding the noise emissions of the facility when notified in writing by the Director that a noise complaint has been received regarding the facility. All such tests must be performed by or under the supervision of a licensed environmental noise consultant competent to perform such tests and interpret the data gathered.
B. When such a report is required, a report, certified by a licensed environmental noise consultant, setting forth the observed noise levels at the property line of the property upon which the facility is located must be submitted. The report must account for background noise and other noise sources and demonstrate the noise levels emitted by the facility, including any air conditioning or ventilation equipment contained therein. Such report must address standards set forth within noise reduction measures within noise provisions in AMC 19.69.020 or the standards set forth with the Federal Interagency Committee on Urban Noise, whichever demonstrates the least amount of noise impact for the nearest residential dwelling(s), at any time of day or night, as measured from the closest point from the exterior of the dwelling to the wireless facility.
C. The Director may retain a technical expert in environmental noise measurement to verify the noise measurements and certification. The cost of such a technical expert must be borne by the owner or operator of the facility, if said facility fails to comply with applicable state or local noise standards.
D. This section does not apply during the testing of alternative power sources (i.e., power generators). (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
All wireless service facilities must be protected from unauthorized entry. The perimeter of all wireless service facilities, other than small wireless facilities in the ROW which include an antenna support structure must be secured with security fencing which does not exceed seven feet in height. Wireless service facilities that do not include an antenna support structure must be protected from unauthorized entry through appropriate means approved by the Director or his or her designee on a case-by-case basis consistent with the purpose of protecting the public health, safety, and welfare. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
Any antenna support structure that has had no antennas mounted upon it for a period of six months, or if the antennas mounted thereon are not operated for a period of six months, will be considered abandoned, and the owner thereof must remove such structure and any accompanying equipment and enclosure within 90 days after receipt of a notice from the Director to do so. The Director may extend this time period to a maximum of six additional months. The owner or operator of all wireless service facilities must, when requested by the Director, submit a written report, signed under penalty of perjury, which demonstrates whether or not there has been a cessation in use of the facility for a period of six months during the prior year. If a facility and associated equipment are not removed within 90 days after receipt of a notice from the Hearing Examiner requiring said removal, the Hearing Examiner may seek and obtain a court order directing such removal and imposing a lien upon the real property upon which such wireless service facility is situated in an amount equal to the cost of removal. In the event that more than one wireless service provider is using the antenna support structure, the antenna support structure will not be considered abandoned until all such users cease using the structure as provided in this section. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Except as approved as part of a plan to conceal, disguise, or camouflage a wireless service facility, no signs, symbols, flags, banners, or similar devices must be placed on, attached to, painted, or inscribed upon any antenna support structure or alternative antenna support structure. Notwithstanding the foregoing, an applicant and/or landowner may place not more than four signs measuring 12 by 18 inches upon or near a wireless service facility which:
1. State that trespassers will be prosecuted;
2. List the names and telephone numbers of persons to be contacted in the event of an emergency;
3. Identify the applicant and/or landowner or person responsible for operating the wireless facility; and/or
4. Contain information necessary and convenient for the person operating the wireless service facility to identify the wireless service facility.
B. Nothing in this section may be construed to prohibit the placement of safety or warning signs upon any portion of the wireless service facility which are required by law or which are designed to apprise emergency response personnel and the employees and agents of wireless service providers of particular hazards associated with equipment located upon the wireless service facility. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
Except as specifically required by Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) or FCC regulations, antenna support structures cannot be illuminated. However, equipment enclosures may be illuminated for security reasons when compatible with the surrounding neighborhood. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
Integration of Environmental Review. An application for a wireless service facility permit or wireless conditional use permit that is subject to the State Environmental Policy Act (SEPA) must be reviewed per AMC Chapter 18.04 concurrently with the review of the permit reviewed under this chapter, except where exempted by that chapter. If there is a conflict between this chapter and development regulations in other chapters, the provisions of this chapter will apply. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Provide clear standards for development projects in Anacortes.
B. Preserve and protect the public health, safety, and welfare of the citizens of Anacortes.
C. Promote and accomplish the goals, policies, and objectives of the Anacortes comprehensive plan. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Noise levels are not to exceed those standards as established by the state pursuant to Chapter 70.107 RCW, and contained in Chapter 173-60 Washington Administrative Code (WAC).
B. The following sections of Chapter 173-60 of the Washington Administrative Code as they now exist or may hereafter be amended or recodified are hereby adopted by reference as a part of the Anacortes Municipal Code which is established in all respects as though such sections were set forth herein in full; and further provided, the inclusion of section captions is for convenience in identifying the subject of code sections only, and any error therein must not affect the validity of the adoption by reference of the section so adopted:
WAC
173-60-010, Authority and purpose.
173-60-020, Definitions.
173-60-030, Identification of environments.
173-60-040, Maximum permissible environmental noise levels.
173-60-050, Exemptions.
173-60-060, Nuisance regulations not prohibited.
173-60-070, Reserved.
173-60-080, Variances and implementation schedules.
173-60-090, Enforcement policy.
173-60-100, Appeals.
173-60-110, Cooperation with local government.
173-60-120, Effective date. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
The following types of air pollutants must be subject to the provisions of applicable Northwest Clean Air Agency regulations, regulating:
A. Smoke and gas.
B. Dust, dirt, or fly ash.
C. Noxious and odorous matter.
D. Other pollutants that may subsequently be added by state law. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Exterior lighting in all zones must be installed so that the light is directed downward onto the property upon which it is located. All light sources must be shielded to direct light away from the sky and from residential uses. See Figure 19.69.040 for an illustration of appropriate light shielding.
Figure 19.69.040
Appropriate light shielding.
![]() |
B. Exterior lighting is encouraged to follow the color, temperature, timing, intensity, technology, and other recommendations of the International Dark Sky Association and the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Any operation producing intense glare or heat must be performed within an enclosure so as to completely obscure such operation from view from adjacent residential property. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Uses, processes, equipment employed, and goods stored or sold must not inflict upon neighboring zones smoke, cinders, fumes, dirt, noise, vibrations, odor, refuse matter, water-carried waste, or other nuisances or hazards detrimental to the health, welfare, and safety of persons occupying or visiting the zone or adjacent zones above that which is allowed by local, state, and federal standards. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. A clear-vision triangle must be maintained at the intersections of streets, alleys, and commercial driveways, with the following requirements:
1. A clear-vision triangle must contain no plantings, fences, walls, other structures, or visual obstructions within a vertical area extending from three to eight feet above the ground, measured from the established centerline of the street, alley or driveway.
2. The clear-vision triangle is determined by one of the following methods:
a. Measuring 15 feet along both street property lines beginning at their point of intersection. The third side of the triangle is a line connecting the endpoints of the first two sides of the triangle; or
b. Measuring 15 feet along the street lines and 15 feet along the edges of the driveway beginning at the respective points of intersection. The third side of each triangle is a line connecting the endpoints of the first two sides of each triangle.
3. Subsection (A)(1) of this section does not apply to:
a. A tree trimmed to the trunk within the three- to eight-foot clear area.
b. Other plant species that are so planted and trimmed as to leave a clear and unobstructed cross-view in all seasons.
c. A supporting member or appurtenance to a permanent building lawfully existing on the site.
B. Exemptions. A clear-vision triangle is not required where maximum building setbacks would otherwise conflict with this section (see AMC Chapter 19.61, Block Frontage Standards).
C. At the discretion of the City Engineer, additional clear-vision areas may be required to meet transportation safety requirements. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Project Design
A. To reinforce the historic storefront character of downtown Anacortes.
B. To enhance the pedestrian environment in commercial and multifamily areas throughout Anacortes.
This section provides direction for the design of buildings consistent with the goals and policies of the Anacortes comprehensive plan. See the individual “purpose” statements for each section in this chapter.
The purpose of this chapter is to:
A. Provide for adequate, convenient, and safe parking for cars and bicycles for all uses allowed in this code in all areas of the city.
Landscaping is necessary to provide a well-balanced, aesthetically pleasing environment for the residents of Anacortes. Specifically, these requirements are intended to accomplish the following:
A. Maintain and enhance property values.
A. Applicability. This chapter applies to all signs erected or altered after the effective date of the ordinance codified in this chapter, except for those signs provided in subsection C of this section.
B. Interpretation.
1. This chapter is not intended to, and does not, restrict speech on the basis of its content, viewpoint, or message.
A. Except as otherwise provided herein, the placement of any wireless service facility at any location within the city is subject to the provisions of this chapter.
B. The standards and process requirements of this chapter supersede all other review process and approval criteria, setback, height or landscaping requirements of this title.
A. Noise levels are not to exceed those standards as established by the state pursuant to Chapter 70.107 RCW, and contained in Chapter 173-60 Washington Administrative Code (WAC).
B. The following sections of Chapter 173-60 of the Washington Administrative Code as they now exist or may hereafter be amended or recodified are hereby adopted by reference as a part of the Anacortes Municipal Code which is established in all respects as though such sections were set forth herein in full; and further provided, the inclusion of section captions is for convenience in identifying the subject of code sections only, and any error therein must not affect the validity of the adoption by reference of the section so adopted:
This division is authorized by the City Council as a major implementation tool of the Anacortes comprehensive plan. Overall, this division intends to:
A. Provide clear objectives for the planning and design of development projects in Anacortes.
B. Preserve and protect the public health, safety, and welfare of the citizens of Anacortes.
C. Promote and accomplish the goals, policies, and objectives of the Anacortes comprehensive plan.
D. Preserve and enhance the historic resources and character of the central business district.
E. Ensure that new multifamily, mixed-use, and commercial development is of high quality and appropriate to Anacortes’s character and context.
F. Promote increased pedestrian, bicycling, and transit use in commercial and multifamily areas.
G. Enhance the livability of residential developments.
H. Enhance the public’s physical and visual access to the water.
I. Increase awareness of design considerations among the citizens of Anacortes.
J. Maintain and enhance property values within Anacortes. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. The project design provisions in this division generally apply to all development within the city, including, but not limited to, building additions, site improvements, and new signage. However, since each chapter addresses different design and development elements, the applicability of each chapter is clarified at the beginning of the chapter.
B. Relationship to Other Codes and Documents. Where provisions of this division conflict with provisions in any other section of the AMC, this division prevails unless otherwise noted.
C. For building additions, remodels, and site improvements, three different thresholds have been established to determine how the standards herein are applied to such projects. See Figure 19.60.020 for examples of site development and the respective types of improvements required under each of the three levels of improvements.
1. Level I improvements include all exterior remodels, building additions, and/or site improvements that affect the exterior appearance of the building/site and/or cumulatively increase the gross floor area on a site less than 50 percent within three years of the date of permit issuance. The requirement for such improvements is only that the proposed improvements meet the standards and do not lead to further nonconformance with the standards.
For example, if a property owner decides to replace a building facade’s siding, then the siding must meet the applicable exterior building material standards, but elements such as building articulation would not be required.
2. Level II improvements include all improvements that cumulatively increase the gross floor area on a site by 50 to 100 percent, within three years of the date of permit issuance. All standards that do not involve repositioning the building or reconfiguring site development must apply to Level II improvements.
For example, if a property owner of an existing home in the CBD zone wants to convert the home to a retail use and build an addition equaling 75 percent of the current building’s footprint, then the following elements must apply:
a. The location and design of the addition/remodel must be consistent with AMC Chapter 19.61, Block Frontage Standards, which addresses building frontages, entries, parking lot location, and street setback landscaping. For such developments seeking additions to buildings where off-street parking location currently does not comply with applicable parking location standards, building additions are allowed, provided they do not increase any current nonconformity and generally bring the project closer into conformance with the standards (see AMC Chapter 19.64, Parking).
b. Comply with the standards of AMC Chapter 19.62, Site Planning.
c. Comply with all provisions of AMC Chapter 19.63, Building Design, except architectural scale and materials provisions related to the existing portion of the building where no exterior changes are proposed. All new exterior wall areas must comply with building elements/details, materials, and blank wall treatment standards.
d. Comply with the off-street parking, landscaping, and signage provisions of this division that relate to proposed improvements.
3. Level III improvements include all improvements that cumulatively increase the gross floor area on a site by more than 100 percent within three years of the date of permit issuance. Such developments must conform to all applicable standards, except in a case where there are multiple buildings on one site, and only one building is being enlarged. In that scenario, improvements to the additional buildings are not required, but conformance with all other standards apply.
Figure 19.60.020
Examples of improvement types and required compliance.
![]() |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Most sections within the chapters herein include the following elements:
A. Purpose statements, which are overarching objectives.
B. Standards use words such as “must” and “is/are required,” signifying required actions.
C. Guidelines use words such as “should” or “is/are recommended,” signifying voluntary measures.
D. Departures are provided for specific standards. They allow alternative designs, provided the reviewing authority determines the design meets the purpose of the standards and guidelines and other applicable criteria. See AMC 19.20.220 for related procedures associated with departures.
E. This division contains some specific standards that are easily quantifiable, while others provide a level of discretion in how they are complied with. In the latter case, the applicant must demonstrate to the Director, in writing, how the project meets the purpose of the standard or standards. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. To reinforce the historic storefront character of downtown Anacortes.
B. To enhance the pedestrian environment in commercial and multifamily areas throughout Anacortes.
C. To minimize potential negative impacts of parking lots and garages on the streetscape.
D. To promote good visibility between buildings and the street for security for pedestrians and to create a more welcoming and interesting streetscape. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. The provisions of this chapter apply to all nonresidential and multifamily development. The following are exempt:
1. All development in the I, LM, AZ, and CM2 zones.
2. Development in the HM and LM1 zones not abutting State Route 20 right-of-way.
3. Development in the MS zone except for applicable block frontages designated storefront, landscaped, or mixed as established in AMC 19.61.040. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Site orientation standards for individual properties depend on the block frontage designated for that location. The following steps will help in using this chapter:
A. Go to the maps in AMC 19.61.040 to find the property and the block frontage type designation.
1. For multifamily and nonresidential development in residential zones, the standards for landscaped block frontages apply.
2. For development that fronts onto multiple streets, see provisions in AMC 19.61.150.
B. Go to the appropriate code section in this chapter for the site orientation standards for applicable block frontage type designation. Table 19.61.030 includes a summary of key block frontage types.
Table 19.61.030
Summary of key block frontage types.
Permitted Frontage | Parking Location | Details | |
![]() | ![]() | • No new parking adjacent to the street. • Special transparency, weather protection, and entry requirements. • Minimum commercial space height and depth. • No ground floor residential uses except lobbies for upper-level units. | |
Mixed | 🡹 Storefront or landscape frontages allowed 🡻 | ![]() | • Parking must be to the side or rear of buildings. For multi-building developments, no more than 50% of frontage may be parking. • Landscaping to soften facades of non-storefronts and buffer parking areas. • Minimum facade transparency requirements per use and setback. |
Marine | Parking placed to the side or rear of buildings is preferred, but may be placed in front of buildings for certain uses and/or in exchange for improved public waterfront access. | • Landscaping to soften facades of non-storefronts and buffer parking areas. • Minimum facade transparency requirements per use and setback. | |
![]() | ![]() | • Landscaping to soften facades and buffer parking areas. • Parking must be to the side or rear of buildings. For multi-building developments, no more than 50% of frontage may be parking. | |
Undesignated | Storefront or landscape frontages allowed but not required | No parking lot location restrictions | • Landscaping to soften facades and buffer parking areas. • Minimum facade transparency requirements per use and setback. |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. The block frontage designations established by this title are maintained under the direction of the Director. All notations, references, and other information shown have the same force and effect as if fully described in this title.
B. At the direction of the City Council, the Director is authorized to revise the block frontage designation maps. No unauthorized person may alter or modify the block frontage designation maps.
C. The Director must revise the block frontage designation maps to correspond with any changes made through an approved framework development plan (see AMC 19.61.180).
D. The Department must maintain digital or printed copies of the block frontage designation maps and maintain records of superseded official maps.
Figure 19.61.040(A)
Anacortes block frontage designations maps index.
![]() |
Figure 19.61.040(B)
Map 1: Anacortes block frontage designations map for the downtown area.
![]() |
Figure 19.61.040(C)
Map 2: Block frontage designations map for central Commercial Avenue and central waterfront.
![]() |
Figure 19.61.040(D)
Map 3: Block frontage designations map for the south Commercial Avenue area.
![]() |
Figure 19.61.040(E)
Map 4: Block frontage designations map for the Skyline area.
![]() |
Figure 19.61.040(F)
Map 5: Block frontage designations map for the March Point area.
![]() |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
All block frontage designations contain distinct minimum facade transparency standards. The purposes of these standards are to maintain “eyes on the street” for safety and to create a welcoming pedestrian environment. Table 19.61.050 below includes details in how they are measured.
Table 19.61.050
Clarification of transparency standards
Transparency zones | ||
![]() The transparency zone is on the ground floor between 30'' and 10' above sidewalk grade | ![]() The transparency zone is between 30'' and 8' above grade | ![]() All vertical surfaces of the facade are used in the calculations |
Other transparency provisions | ||
Windows must be transparent Ground level window area for storefronts and other nonresidential uses that is covered, frosted, or perforated in any manner that obscures visibility into the building must not count as transparent window area. Exception: Window signs conforming with AMC 19.67.090(E) may be counted as transparent window area, provided the areas generally around the sign are transparent. | ![]() | |
Display windows Display windows may be used for up to 50% of nonresidential transparency requirements, provided they are at least 30'' deep to allow changeable displays and the interior wall is nonstructural so it can be removed if the windows are not used for display. Tack-on display cases as shown in the far right example do not qualify as transparent window area. | ![]() | |
Other transparency provisions | ||
Structured parking facilities Where structured parking facilities occupy a portion of the facade, any openings simulating windows may be used to help comply with transparency requirements. | ![]() | |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose. Storefront block frontages are the most vibrant and active shopping and dining areas within Anacortes. Blocks designated as storefront block frontages include continuous storefronts placed along the sidewalk edge with small-scale shops and many business entries.
Figure 19.61.060(A)
Storefront vision and key standards.
![]() |
B. Standards. All development on sites with a storefront block frontage designation must comply with the standards in Table 19.61.060(B) below:
Table 19.61.060(B)
Storefront block frontage standards.
The ⮊ symbol refers to DEPARTURE opportunities in subsection (C) below. | ||
Element | Standards | Examples and Notes |
Ground level Land use | Nonresidential uses specified in Table 19.41.050 are required except for lobbies associated with residential or hotel/motel uses on upper floors. | |
Floor-to-ceiling height | 13' minimum (applies to new buildings only) | |
Retail space depth | 50' minimum on Commercial Avenue in the CBD zone and 20' minimum elsewhere (applies to new buildings only) ⮊ | |
Building placement | Buildings must be placed at the street property line/back edge of the sidewalk. Additional setbacks are allowed for a widened sidewalk or pedestrian-oriented space (AMC 19.62.040(D)). | ![]() Corner building example |
Building entrances | Primary building entrances must face the street. For corner buildings, primary entrances may face the street corner. | |
Facade transparency | At least 70% of the transparency zone. ⮊ | |
Weather protection | Weather protection over the sidewalk is required along at least 75% of the storefront facade, and it must be a minimum of 6' deep and have 8' to 15' of vertical clearance. ⮊ Weather protection must not interfere with street trees, street lights, street signs, or extend beyond the edge of the sidewalk. | ![]() |
Parking location and vehicle access | New surface parking adjacent to the street is prohibited. ⮊ Vehicular access for surface or structured parking from a storefront street is prohibited if there is access available from another street or alley. ⮊ | ![]() |
Sidewalk width | 12' minimum between the curb edge and the storefront facade (including clear/buffer zone with street trees). ⮊ Setbacks and utility easements must also be considered and may result in a larger minimum sidewalk width. | ![]() |
C. DEPARTURE Criteria. Departures from the standards in Table 19.61.060(B) that feature the ⮊ symbol will be considered per AMC 19.20.220, provided the alternative proposal meets the purpose of the standards and the following criteria:
1. Retail Space Depth. Departures from this standard are not allowed in the CBD zone. Elsewhere, reduced depths will be considered where the applicant can successfully demonstrate the proposed alternative design and configuration of the space is viable for a variety of permitted retail uses.
2. Facade Transparency. Facade transparency in the transparency zone may be a minimum of 40 percent if the facade design between ground-level windows provides visual interest to the pedestrian and mitigates the impacts of blank walls.
3. Weather Protection. Other proposed alternative design treatments must provide equivalent weather protection benefits.
4. Parking Location. Departures from this standard are not allowed in the CBD zone. Elsewhere, there must be an acceptable tradeoff in terms of the amount and quality of storefront area that is integrated with the development and the applicable parking location departure. In addition, the alternative must include design features to successfully mitigate the visual impact of additional parking areas along designated storefront streets.
5. Sidewalk Width. Alternative designs may be considered where topographical challenges or approved city streetscape plans with different sidewalk standards exist. Alternative designs must be able to accommodate safe and comfortable pedestrian traffic anticipated for full block development. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose. Landscaped block frontages emphasize landscaped street setbacks, clear pedestrian connections between the building and the sidewalk, and minimized surface parking lots along the frontages.
Figure 19.61.070(A)
Landscaped frontage vision and key standards.
![]() |
B. Standards. All development on sites containing a landscaped block frontage designation must comply with the standards in Table 19.61.070(B) below. The standards herein also apply to all multifamily and nonresidential development in residential zones:
Table 19.61.070(B)
Landscaped block frontage standards.
The ⮊ symbol refers to DEPARTURE opportunities in subsection (C) below. | ||
Element | Standards | Examples and Notes |
Ground level Land use | ![]() Landscaped frontage example meeting setback, entry, weather protection, and transparency standards. | |
Building placement | 10' minimum setbacks are required, or greater where specified for the applicable zone in AMC Chapter 19.42, Form and Intensity Standards. | |
Building entrances | At least one building entry must be visible from the sidewalk. ⮊ | |
Facade transparency | For buildings with ground level nonresidential uses, at least 25% of the transparency zone. ⮊ For buildings with ground level residential uses, at least 15% of the transparency zone. ⮊ | |
Weather protection | Weather protection at least three feet deep must be provided over all primary entries. | |
Parking location and vehicle access | Parking must be located to the side or rear of buildings. For multi-building developments, no more than 50% of the lot frontage can be occupied by off-street parking and driveways. ⮊ Vehicular access must comply with the provisions of AMC 19.53.030. Any parking lots developed adjacent to the street must comply with landscaping provisions of AMC 19.65.070. | ![]() |
![]() | ||
Landscaping | All areas between the sidewalk and the building must be landscaped, except for pathways, porches, decks, and other areas meeting the definition of pedestrian-oriented space (AMC 19.62.040(D)). Landscaped areas must contain Types B, C, or D landscaping (as defined in AMC 19.65.060) and may incorporate rain gardens and other forms of stormwater management. See AMC Chapter 19.65 for other landscaping standards. | ![]() |
Sidewalk width | ||
C. DEPARTURE Criteria. Departures to the landscaped block frontage standards in Table 19.61.070(B) that feature the ⮊ symbol will be considered per AMC 19.20.220, provided the alternative proposal meets the purpose of the standards and the following criteria:
1. Building Entrances. Block frontages with environmental constraints and/or those facing busy arterial streets and minor pedestrian traffic may warrant some flexibility to this standard (particularly in residential zones).
2. Facade Transparency. Facade transparency in the transparency zone may be reduced from the minimum by 50 percent if the facade design between ground level windows provides visual interest to the pedestrian and mitigates the impacts of blank walls.
3. Parking Location. Corner lots and unusual lot shapes warrant some flexibility to the standards herein, provided design treatments are included that minimize visual impacts of parking areas on the streetscape. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose. Mixed block frontages allow for general flexibility where either a storefront orientation or a landscaped orientation in a pedestrian-friendly configuration could be developed.
Figure 19.61.080(A)
Mixed frontage vision and key standards.
![]() | OR | ![]() |
B. Standards. Development must conform to either storefront or landscaped block frontage standards and associated departure options and departure criteria as established above, with only the following modifications in Table 19.61.080(B) below:
Table 19.61.080(B)
Mixed block frontage standards.
The ⮊ symbol refers to DEPARTURE opportunities in subsection (C) below. | ||
Element | Standards | Examples and Notes |
Building placement | Buildings may be placed up to the sidewalk edge, provided they meet storefront block frontage standards in AMC 19.61.060 (this includes standards for ground level, building placement, building entrances, facade transparency, and weather protection elements). The minimum setback for buildings that do not meet applicable storefront block frontage standards is 10' or greater where specified for the applicable zone in AMC Chapter 19.42, Form and Intensity Standards. ⮊ | |
Facade transparency | Storefront buildings are subject to storefront block frontage transparency standards above. For other building frontages, transparent windows must be provided along at least 15% of the building facade, plus: • Buildings designed with ground floor nonresidential uses within 10' of sidewalk must feature at least 40% transparency within the transparency zone. ⮊ • Buildings designed with ground floor nonresidential uses within 20' of sidewalk must feature at least 25% transparency within the transparency zone. ⮊ | ![]() This office building (within 10' of sidewalk) would need at least 40% transparency within the 30'' to 8' transparency zone. |
C. DEPARTURE Criteria. Departures to the mixed block frontage standards in Table 19.61.080(B) that feature the ⮊ symbol will be considered per AMC 19.20.220, provided the alternative proposal meets the purpose of the standards and the following criteria:
1. Building Placement. Provide design treatments that create an effective transition between the public and private realm. For example, a stoop design or other similar treatments that utilize a low fence or retaining wall and/or hedge along the sidewalk may provide an effective transition (see Figure 19.61.080(C) for examples).
2. Facade Transparency. Facade transparency in the transparency zone may be reduced from the minimum by 50 percent if the facade design between ground level windows provides visual interest to the pedestrian and mitigates the impacts of blank walls.
Figure 19.61.080(C)
Acceptable examples of possible setback departures.
![]() The landscaped and stoop frontages above are possible departure examples with reduced setbacks for non-storefront facades. The combination of landscaping elements, facade transparency, low fencing, and facade materials and detailing help to create an effective transition between the public and private realm. |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose. Marine block frontages allow for general flexibility where either a storefront orientation or a landscaped orientation, similar to the mixed block frontage designation, could be developed. However, the marine designation offers greater flexibility in building and parking lot configuration based on the site’s context and proposed use via departure.
B. Standards. Development must conform to either storefront or landscaped block frontage standards and associated departure options and departure criteria as established above, with only the following modifications in Table 19.61.090(B) below:
Table 19.61.090(B)
Marine block frontage standards.
The ⮊ symbol refers to DEPARTURE opportunities in subsection (C) below. | ||
Element | Standards | Examples and Notes |
Building placement | Buildings may be placed up to the sidewalk edge, provided they meet storefront block frontage standards in AMC 19.61.060 (this includes standards for ground level, building placement, building entrances, facade transparency, and weather protection elements). The minimum setback for buildings that do not meet applicable storefront block frontage standards is 10' or greater where specified for the applicable zone in AMC Chapter 19.42, Form and Intensity Standards. ⮊ | ![]() Storefront example. |
Facade transparency | Storefront buildings are subject to storefront block frontage transparency standards above. For other building frontages, transparent windows must be provided along at least 15% of the facade, plus: • Buildings designed with ground floor nonresidential uses within 10' of sidewalk must feature at least 40% transparency within the transparency zone. ⮊ • Buildings designed with ground floor nonresidential uses within 20' of sidewalk must feature at least 25% transparency within the transparency zone. ⮊ | ![]() Generous ground level transparency example with modest landscaped setback. |
Parking location and vehicle access | Developments are subject to storefront or landscaped block frontage parking location standards, depending on the chosen frontage type. ⮊ Vehicular access must comply with the provisions of AMC 19.53.030. | The unique nature of these marine-oriented sites and uses often require some flexibility in building and parking area locations. |
C. DEPARTURE Criteria. Departures to the marine block frontage standards in Table 19.61.090(B) that feature the ⮊ symbol will be considered per AMC 19.20.220, provided the alternative proposal meets the purpose of the standards and the following criteria:
1. Building Placement. Provide design treatments that create an effective transition between the public and private realm. For example, a stoop design or other similar treatments that utilize a low fence or retaining wall and/or hedge along the sidewalk may provide an effective transition (see Figure 19.61.080(C) for examples).
2. Facade Transparency. Facade transparency in the transparency zone may be reduced from the minimum by 50 percent if the facade design between ground level windows provides visual interest to the pedestrian and mitigates the impacts of blank walls.
3. Parking Location. Parking areas may be located in the front where design measures are included (above and beyond base standards) to mitigate visual impacts of parking areas along the street and where it can be demonstrated that there is an acceptable tradeoff of public benefits associated with the proposed building and parking lot location. Examples include distinctive landscape design integrating a decorative low fence or trellis. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose. Gateway block frontage designations serve strategic areas along properties fronted by State Route 20 where there is a desire to provide attractive landscaped development frontages.
B. Standards. All development on sites containing a gateway block frontage designation must comply with the standards in Table 19.61.100(B) below:
Table 19.61.100(B)
Gateway block frontage standards.
The ⮊ symbol refers to DEPARTURE opportunities in subsection (C) below. | ||
Element | Standards | |
Building placement | 10' minimum street setbacks for buildings complying with facade transparency standards; 25' for all other buildings. | |
Facade transparency | For all buildings with less than 25' setback, transparent window area must be provided along at least 15% of the facade of the building. Marijuana uses and adult concession uses are exempt from this requirement. ⮊ | |
Parking and outdoor storage location | Parking lots and outdoor storage areas must be set back at least 10' from the gateway block frontage property line and screened with Type A, B, or C landscaping as defined in AMC 19.65.060. Any parking lots developed adjacent to the street must comply with landscaping provisions of AMC 19.65.070. | |
Landscaping | All areas between the property line and any building, parking, or storage area must be landscaped, except for pathways, porches, decks, and other areas meeting the definition of pedestrian-oriented space (AMC 19.63.040(D)). | |
Fencing | Landscaped screening is required (⮊) for chain-link and other similar metal fencing and opaque fences: • For fences less than 4-1/2' tall, at least 5' of Type A, B, or C landscaping (see AMC 19.65.060) is required in front of the fence. • For fences 4-1/2' or taller, at least 10' of Type A or B landscaping (see AMC 19.65.060) is required in front of the fence. No landscape screening is required for split rail or similar low decorative fencing, or a decorative wall (brick, stone, or similar) up to 4-1/2' tall. | |
![]() | Gateway frontage example with split rail fence, landscaping (shrubs behind fence) and facade meeting the modest transparency standards. | |
C. DEPARTURE Criteria. Departures to the landscaped block frontage standards in Table 19.61.100(B) that feature the ⮊ symbol will be considered per AMC 19.20.220, provided the alternative proposal meets the purpose of the standards and the following criteria:
1. Facade Transparency. Facade transparency in the transparency zone may be reduced from the minimum by 50 percent if the facade design between ground level windows provides visual interest to the pedestrian and mitigates the impacts of blank walls.
2. Fence Screening. Reduced landscaping screening is allowed where some combination of the type and design of reduced landscaping and/or the enhanced design of fencing reduces the visual impact of the fencing on the gateway corridor environment. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose. Undesignated block frontages should provide visual interest at all observable scales and meet the design objectives of the city.
B. Applicability. All undesignated block frontages in nonresidential zones that are not designated are subject to the standards of this section. These block frontages are provided greater flexibility with regard to the design of multifamily and nonresidential development frontages.
These block frontages include a combination of side streets (where most uses often front on other adjacent streets) and service oriented streets (often characterized by industrial or service types of uses), and heavy arterial streets. While there is greater flexibility in the amount of transparency of facades and the location of surface and structured parking, design parameters are included to ensure that landscaping and other design elements help to mitigate the potential impacts of parking lots and blank walls along these streets.
DEPARTURES will be considered pursuant to AMC 19.20.220.
C. Standards. Undesignated block frontages must comply with the standards in Table 19.61.110(C) below.
Table 19.61.110(C)
Undesignated block frontage standards.
The ⮊ symbol refers to DEPARTURE opportunities in subsection (D) below. | |
Element | Standards |
Building placement | Where allowed in the applicable zone (see AMC 19.42.030), buildings may be placed up to the sidewalk edge, provided they meet storefront block standards in AMC 19.61.060 (this includes standards for ground level, building placement, building entrances, facade transparency, and weather protection elements). Otherwise, 10' minimum street setback except where greater setbacks are required by the zone (see AMC Chapter 19.42, Form and Intensity Standards). |
Building entrances | Building entrances facing the street are encouraged. At a minimum, at least one building entry visible and directly accessible from the street is required. Where buildings are set back from the street, pedestrian connections are required from the sidewalk. |
Facade transparency | • For storefront buildings, see AMC 19.61.060(B) for transparency standards. • For other buildings within 10' of sidewalk, at least 30% of the transparency zone. ⮊ • For buildings set back more than 10' from the sidewalk, at least 10% of the entire facade must be transparent. ⮊ |
Weather protection | At least 3' deep over primary business and residential entries. |
Parking location and vehicle access | There are no parking lot location restrictions, except for required landscaping buffers in AMC 19.65.070. |
Landscaping | • The area between the street and any non-storefront building must be landscaped and/or private porch or patio space. • For setbacks adjacent to buildings with windows, provide low level landscaping that maintains views between the building and the street. • See AMC Chapter 19.65 for other landscaping standards. |
Sidewalk width | Where storefront buildings are proposed, sidewalks must meet storefront block frontage standards in AMC 19.61.060. Otherwise, see AMC 19.52.040, Street geometric design and streetscapes, for applicable sidewalk widths. |
D. DEPARTURE Criteria. Departures to the undesignated block frontage standards in Table 19.61.110(C) that feature the ⮊ symbol will be considered per AMC 19.20.220, provided the alternative proposal meets the purpose of the standards and the following criteria:
1. Facade Transparency. Reduced transparency is allowed where the design treatment of applicable landscaping and/or facade provide visual interest to the pedestrian and mitigates impacts of any blank wall areas. Up to a 50 percent reduction in the minimum amount of window transparency may be approved via departure. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Trails referenced in the block frontage designation maps in AMC 19.61.040 aligned adjacent to a street are subject to the applicable block frontage designation for the street. For trails referenced in the block frontage designation maps in AMC 19.61.040 that are not adjacent to streets, developments fronting such trails must comply with the undesignated block frontage standards in AMC 19.61.110.
Exception: Developments in the CM2, HM, and I zones are exempt from the building entrance and transparency standards. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose. Esplanade block frontages emphasize lively waterfront spaces that feature a combination of commercial storefronts and attractive landscaped frontages that orient towards the water.
B. Standards. Esplanade block frontages are subject to the mixed block frontage standards in AMC 19.61.080. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose. These corridors are intended to enhance pedestrian access in the area and strengthen the physical and visual connection to the water.
B. Standards. The CW corridors must be at least 20 feet wide and are subject to the mixed block frontage standards in AMC 19.61.080. Where buildings employ the landscaped block frontage design, the minimum building setbacks may be reduced, provided the design meets the purposes of the standards and all other applicable design standards. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Where a property fronts onto more than one street, each building frontage must comply with the standards for the block frontage upon which it fronts, with the following clarifications:
A. Where a conflict exists between frontage standards, the Director will apply the standards of a block frontage pursuant to the following order of preference:
1. Storefront;
2. Mixed;
3. Landscaped; then
4. Undesignated.
Subsections (B) through (E) below clarify how the order of preference works for particular frontage elements.
B. Building Location. For corner sites with landscaped block frontage on one street and storefront or mixed on another, a storefront frontage may wrap around the corner (on the landscaped block frontage side) for up to a half block or 120 feet (whichever is more).
C. Entrances. For corner sites, entrances on both streets are encouraged, but only one entrance is required. For corner sites with frontage on a storefront block frontage on one side, an entrance must be placed on the storefront block frontage side. For corner sites with a mix of designations that do not include a storefront block frontage, the entry must be placed on the order of preference identified above.
DEPARTURES may be considered, provided the location and design of the entry and block frontage treatments are compatible with the character of the area and enhance the character of the street.
D. Transparency. For corner sites—at least one block frontage must meet the applicable transparency standards (based on the order of preference above). For the second block frontage, the Director may approve a reduction in the minimum amount of transparency by 50 percent. For street corners with the same designations on both frontages, buildings must employ the full transparency on the dominant frontage (based on the frontage width or established neighborhood pattern).
E. Parking. Surface parking (including ground floor parking in a structure) adjacent to a street corner is not allowed, except:
1. Corner lots with undesignated frontages on both streets;
2. Other combination of block frontages, except those with a storefront block frontage designation, via a DEPARTURE and subject to the applicable departure criteria.
Figure 19.61.150
Clarifying block frontage standards on street corners.
![]() |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Where an individual property has a frontage with multiple block frontage designations, the following standards apply:
A. Storefront and any other block frontage designation: Storefront block frontage designation applies.
B. Mixed and landscaped block frontage designation: Mixed block frontage designation applies.
C. Landscaped and undesignated block frontage designation: Landscaped block frontage designation applies. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Description/Purpose. The high-visibility street corner requirements apply to those sites designated as such on the block frontage designation maps in AMC 19.61.040. The purpose is to accentuate designated street corners with high visibility to the public.
B. Standards. Sites located on high-visibility street corners must meet the following requirements:
1. The maximum building setback from the street corner (measured from the right-of-way edge at the corner) is 20 feet, except where a corner plaza (meeting the pedestrian-oriented space provisions of AMC 19.62.040(D)) or other decorative landscaping design meets the purpose of the standards.
2. At least one of the following special features must be included (Figure 19.61.170 below illustrates acceptable examples):
a. Corner plaza.
b. Cropped building corner with a special entry feature.
c. Decorative use of building materials at the corner.
d. Distinctive facade articulation.
e. Sculptural architectural element.
f. Other decorative elements that meet the purpose of the standards.
Figure 19.61.170
Acceptable high visibility street corner examples.
![]() Building 1 includes a corner tower. Building 2 features cropped building corners with decorative elements. Building 3 uses a decorative canopy. Building 4 uses a change in building materials and facade articulation at the corner. Building 5 incorporates a plaza at the corner. Image 6 shows a decorative landscaped area with a trellis and neighborhood gateway sign. |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Recently annexed or rezoned industrial or mixed-use properties along with strategic large sites necessitate a different approach to applying block frontage standards. The provisions below identify the purpose, applicable sites, block frontage designation options, and special standards for developing framework development plans.
A. Purpose.
1. To provide a thoughtful and fair process to plan for the development of large and new commercial and mixed-use sites in Anacortes consistent with the goals and policies of the comprehensive plan.
2. To promote the arrangement of streets, buildings, open space, parking and service areas that creates a strong sense of community and enhances the character of Anacortes.
3. To avoid uncoordinated patterns of development that waste valuable land, compromise vehicular and pedestrian access, and degrade the character of Anacortes.
B. Applicable Sites.
1. Sites shown in Figure 19.61.040(C).
2. Sites annexed after adoption of this section as a mixed-use or industrial zone and which are not addressed in the block frontage maps in this chapter.
3. Sites rezoned after adoption of this section to a mixed-use or industrial zone and which are not addressed in the block frontage maps in this chapter.
C. Block Frontage Designations Standards and Options.
1. Prior to site development of applicable sites, a framework development plan must be developed, approved and recorded for the property per the procedures in AMC 19.20.030 and 19.20.230. The plan must include:
a. New streets and internal roadways along with block frontage designations (types included in this section).
b. Any designated high-visibility street corners.
2. Framework development plans may utilize any existing block frontage designations within or bordering the site, or include an alternative block frontage designation type or types, subject to framework development plan approval.
3. Alternatively, site plan development may occur on applicable sites without an approved and recorded framework development plan, provided all block frontages comply with the designations shown on Figure 19.61.040(C) or the standards for mixed block frontages in AMC 19.61.080.
D. Approval Criteria. See AMC 19.20.230(E). (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. To promote thoughtful layout of buildings, parking areas, and circulation, service, landscaping, and amenity elements.
B. Enhance Anacortes’s visual character.
C. Promote compatibility between developments and uses.
D. Enhance the function of developments.
E. Meet stormwater infiltration requirements when feasible. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. The provisions of this chapter apply to all nonresidential and multifamily development. The following are exempt:
1. All development in the I, LM, AZ, CM2, and MS zones.
2. Developments in the HM and LM1 zones when not abutting State Route 20 right-of-way.
B. For clarification on the relationship between the provisions in this division and other documents and codes, see AMC 19.60.020(B).
C. For the application of building additions and remodels and site improvements, see AMC 19.60.020(C).
D. For clarification on how the provisions of this division are applied, see AMC 19.60.030. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To promote the functional and visual compatibility between developments.
2. To protect the privacy of residents on adjacent properties.
B. Balconies near Side and Rear Property Lines Adjacent to Property in Any Residential Zone. Balconies and rooftop decks above the ground floor within 15 horizontal feet of a side property line abutting a residentially zoned property must feature a railing system that is at least 50 percent opaque. Specifically, 50 percent of the area below the top edge of the railing must be a sight-obscuring structure.
DEPARTURES to this standard will be allowed if the balcony will not cause visual or privacy impacts due to its location, orientation, design or other consideration.
Figure 19.62.030(B)
Privacy standards for balconies within 15 feet of side or rear property lines.
![]() |
C. Light and Air Access and Privacy near Interior Side and Rear Property Lines. Buildings or portions thereof containing multifamily dwelling units whose only solar access (windows) is from the applicable side of the building (facing towards the interior side property line) must be set back from the applicable interior side or rear property lines at least 15 feet. See Figure 19.62.030(C).
DEPARTURES will be allowed where it is determined that the proposed design will not create a compatibility problem in the near and long term based on the unique site context.
Figure 19.62.030(C)
Light/air access and privacy standards for multifamily residential buildings along interior side and rear property lines.
![]() |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To create usable space that is suitable for leisure or recreational activities for residents.
2. To create open space that contributes to the residential setting.
3. To provide plazas that attract shoppers to commercial areas.
4. To provide plazas and other pedestrian-oriented spaces in commercial areas that enhance the employees’ and public’s opportunity for active and passive activities, such as dining, resting, people watching, and recreational activities.
5. To enhance the development character and attractiveness of commercial development.
B. Usable Residential Open Space.
1. All multifamily development, including multifamily portions of mixed-use development, must provide minimum usable open space equal to 100 square feet per dwelling unit for studio and one-bedroom dwellings and 150 square feet per dwelling unit for dwellings with two or more bedrooms. The required open space may be provided in a combination of ways:
a. Shared Open Space. All of the required open space may be in the form of shared open space available to all residents and meeting the requirements of subsection (B)(2) of this section.
b. Ground Level Individual Outdoor Space. All of the required open space for a unit may be provided by ground level outdoor space that is adjacent and directly accessible to the subject unit. Such open spaces must be:
i. Outdoor spaces may be located in the front, side, or rear yard, provided they are generally level, feature no dimension less than 10 feet, and are enclosed by a fence and/or hedge at least 32 inches in height to qualify.
DEPARTURES will be considered for this provision.
ii. Private porches may qualify as outdoor space, provided they are at least 36 square feet in area, with no dimension less than six feet.
iii. LID BMPs may be included in ground level individual outdoor space, provided the LID BMP design and maintenance requirements are consistent with the purpose of the space and do not affect usability.
Individual ground level open space that is in excess of minimum requirements must not be used in the calculations for determining the minimum usable open space requirements for other units in the development.
c. Balconies. Up to 50 percent of the required open space may be provided by private balconies, provided such spaces are at least 32 square feet in area, with no dimension less than four feet (not including railings), to provide a space usable for human activity.
d. Common Indoor Recreation Areas. For mixed-use buildings, up to 50 percent of the required open space may be provided by common indoor recreation areas meeting the following conditions:
i. The space must meet ADA standards and must be located in a visible area, such as near an entrance, lobby, or high traffic corridor.
ii. The space must be designed specifically to serve interior recreational functions and not merely be leftover unrentable space used to meet the open space requirement. Such space must include amenities and design elements that will encourage use by residents.
e. Shared Roof Decks. For multifamily buildings, up to 50 percent of the required open space may be provided by shared roof decks located on the top of buildings which are available to all residents and meet the requirements below. For mixed-use buildings, 100 percent of the required open space may be provided by shared roof decks. Design requirements:
i. Space must feature hard surfacing, and provide amenities such as seating areas and other features that encourage use.
ii. Space must integrate landscaping elements that enhance the character of the space and encourage its use.
iii. Space must incorporate features that provide for the safety of residents, such as enclosures, railings, and appropriate lighting levels.
2. Shared Open Space Design Requirements. Shared open space can include landscaped courtyards or decks, entrance plazas, gardens with pathways, children’s play areas, pools, and water features, provided they are accessible to all residents of the development. Accessible areas with native vegetation and areas used for stormwater retention, infiltration, or other multipurpose recreational and/or green spaces that meet the design criteria herein may qualify as shared open space.
Special requirements for shared open spaces include the following:
a. Shared open space must be located in centralized areas that are visible from units within the development.
b. Required setback areas must not count as shared open space unless the design of the space meets the standards herein.
c. Shared open space must feature no dimension less than 15 feet in order to provide functional leisure or recreational activity (unless otherwise noted herein).
d. Shared open space must feature paths or walkable lawns, landscaping, seating, lighting, and play structures, sports courts, or other pedestrian amenities to make the area more functional and enjoyable for a range of users.
e. Shared open space must be separated from ground level windows, streets, service areas and parking lots with landscaping, fencing, and/or other acceptable treatments that enhance safety and privacy for both the shared open space and dwelling units.
f. When possible, the space should be oriented to receive sunlight, facing east, west or preferably south.
g. Stairways and service elements located within or on the edge of shared open space must not be included in the open space calculations.
h. Shared porches may qualify as shared open space, provided they are at least eight feet in depth and 96 square feet in total area.
i. The space must be accessible to all residents of the development.
j. Shared open spaces may include LID BMPs, like rain gardens, in up to 25 percent of the required open space.
Figure 19.62.040(B)(2)(a)
Shared open space examples.
![]() The upper left example includes a combination of open lawn area for informal recreation plus pathways and decorative landscape areas to enhance the setting for residents. The upper right courtyard includes pathways, seating areas, landscaped beds, and decorative lighting to provide a visual and physical amenity for residents. |
![]() The left image above includes a covered gathering space with outdoor grills adjacent to a landscaped commons with a central pathway. The right image includes a pond area with boardwalk and seating areas. |
Figure 19.62.040(B)(2)(b)
Rooftop deck examples.
![]() |
C. Usable Commercial Open Space. New developments with nonresidential uses with more than 10,000 square feet of gross floor area in the C, CBD, and MMU zones must provide open space equal to at least two percent of the development site. The open space may be in the form of pedestrian-oriented open space per subsection (D) below, garden, play area and/or other open space feature that serves both as a visual amenity and a place for human activity. Portions of sidewalks that are wider than 12 feet and which meet the standards of pedestrian-oriented open space may be counted toward this requirement.
DEPARTURE: Open space area may be reduced to one percent of the development site if the Director finds the project includes exceptional design features and elements that meet the purpose of the standards. This includes open spaces that feature a combination of design (site materials, amenities, and configurations) and location/context that clearly exceed typical plaza designs found in the region.
Figure 19.62.040(C)
Example of site development integrating usable commercial open space.
![]() |
D. Pedestrian-Oriented Open Space Design Criteria. This subsection describes the requirements and desired characteristics of pedestrian-oriented open space (which may be used to meet the requirements of subsection C of this section).
1. Required Pedestrian-Oriented Open Space Features.
a. Visual and pedestrian access into the site from a street, private access road, or nonvehicular courtyard.
b. Paved walking surfaces of either concrete or approved unit paving. Form-in-place pervious concrete paving is allowed.
d. The spaces must be located in or adjacent to areas with significant pedestrian traffic to provide interest and security, such as adjacent to or visible from a building entry.
e. At least two feet of seating area (a bench or ledge at least 16 inches deep and appropriate seating height) or one individual seat per 60 square feet of plaza area or open space.
f. Landscaping components that add visual interest and do not act as a visual barrier. This could include planting beds, raised planters, and/or potted plants, or both.
2. Desirable Pedestrian-Oriented Open Space Features.
a. Pedestrian amenities, such as site furniture, artwork, drinking fountains, shade structures, kiosks, or other similar features.
b. Adjacent buildings with transparent windows and doors covering at least 50 percent of the facade between 30 inches and 10 feet above the ground level.
c. Pedestrian weather protection, alcoves, seating, or other features along building edges to allow for outdoor gathering.
d. Pedestrian-oriented open spaces may include LID BMPs, like rain gardens, in up to 25 percent of the required open space.
3. Features Prohibited within a Pedestrian-Oriented Open Space.
a. Asphalt pavement.
b. Adjacent service areas (e.g., trash areas, loading docks) that are not separated with landscaping, as required by AMC 19.62.070.
c. Adjacent chain-link fences.
d. Adjacent blank walls without blank wall treatment (see AMC 19.63.070).
e. Outdoor storage.
Figure 19.62.040(D)(1)
Example of a small pedestrian-oriented open space.
![]() |
Figure 19.62.040(D)(2)
Desirable examples of pedestrian-oriented open space.
![]() The left example above is a colorful plaza with outdoor seating, landscaping elements and direct access to adjacent retail uses. The upper right image is a commons area with adjacent covered areas. ![]() A covered outdoor gathering space (left) may be used to meet pedestrian-oriented open space requirements. In the right image, the widened sidewalk area may be counted as pedestrian-oriented open space. |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To improve the pedestrian and bicycling environment by making it easier, safer, and more comfortable to walk or ride among residences, to businesses, to the street sidewalk, to transit stops, through parking lots, to adjacent properties, and connections throughout the city.
2. To enhance access to on- and off-site open space areas and pedestrian/bicycle paths.
B. Access to Sidewalk. All buildings must feature pedestrian connections to a sidewalk per applicable block frontage standards in Chapter 19.61. See subsection (D) below for access design requirements.
Figure 19.62.050(B)
Examples of direct pedestrian access to buildings from the street.
![]() |
C. Internal Circulation.
1. For sites with multiple buildings in the C, CBD, and MMU zones, pedestrian paths connecting businesses and residential entries on the same development site must be provided. Routes that minimize walking distances must be utilized to the extent practical.
DEPARTURES will be allowed where an indirect route would enhance the design and/or use of a common usable open space. See subsection (D) below for pathway design standards.
Figure 19.62.050(C)(1)
Internal and external pedestrian connections are important.
![]() |
2. Sites with Residential Units. Provide direct pedestrian access between all ground related unit entries and a public street or to a clearly marked pathway network or open space that has direct access to a public street. Residential developments must provide a pedestrian circulation network that connects all main entrances on the site to other areas of the site, such as:
a. Parking areas.
b. Recreational areas.
c. Common outdoor areas.
d. Any pedestrian amenities.
For townhouses or other residential units fronting the street, the sidewalk may be used to meet this standard.
Figure 19.62.050(C)(2)(a)
Direct pathways between the street and dwelling units are required.
![]() The entries of the example on the left connect directly to a public sidewalk while the entries in the right example connect to a common path that extends to the sidewalk. |
Figure 19.62.050(C)(2)(b)
Examples of attractive pedestrian connection through a residential development.
![]() |
3. Crosswalks are required when a pathway crosses an on-site paved area accessible to vehicles. Crosswalks must contain contrasting material (such as concrete) and/or patterns (such as stamped asphalt), excluding painted surfaces.
4. Pedestrian Paths through Parking Lots. Large parking areas must include specially marked or paved sidewalks. At least one pathway must be provided every four rows of parking, or at a maximum spacing of 200 feet. The pathways must provide a safe connection to the building entrance and meet the pathway design standards in subsection D of this section. See examples below.
Figure 19.62.050(C)(4)
Parking area pathway standards and examples.
5. Barriers that limit future pedestrian access are prohibited. Gates that limit access to employees and residents are permitted. See subsection (D) below for pathway design standards.
D. Pathway Design.
1. All internal pedestrian pathways must have at least a minimum five-foot-wide unobstructed walking surface, except where otherwise required by the Anacortes engineering design standards.
2. All internal pedestrian pathways must be curbed and raised six inches above adjacent parking lot surface. Curbs may be cut to allow surface water runoff to enter low-impact development best management practices (LID BMPs). Ramps and other accessibility features must be provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 and the current ADA Standards for Accessible Design.
DEPARTURE: Alternative curbless designs may be approved where design features are included to make the pathways safe and welcoming while enhancing the visual character of the site. See the lower right example in Figure 19.62.060(C) as a good example of a curbless design.
3. Where a pedestrian pathway is adjacent to perpendicular or angled parking, an extra two feet of pathway width must be provided to accommodate parked vehicles overhanging the pathway unless wheel stops are installed to prevent parked vehicles from overhanging the curb.
4. Pedestrian walks must be separated from structures with at least three feet of landscaping except where the adjacent building facade meets the storefront block frontage standards per AMC 19.61.060.
DEPARTURE: Other landscaping and/or facade design treatments to provide attractive pathways will be considered. Examples include sculptural, mosaic, bas-relief artwork, or other decorative treatments that meet the purpose. Figure 19.62.050(D)(4) below provides one example.
Figure 19.62.050(D)(4)
Standards for internal pathways adjacent to buildings.
![]() Internal pathways adjacent to building walls that do not meet storefront facade standards must provide at least three feet of landscaping to enhance the character of the pathway. The Director will consider alternative treatments, such as decorative walls (right example). |
5. Pathways along facades containing primary tenant entries of multi-tenant commercial or mixed-use buildings, and which are 100 feet long or more and abut parking lots, must include the following:
a. Twelve-foot-wide sidewalk and eight feet minimum unobstructed width.
b. Trees, as approved by the reviewing authority, placed at an average of 50 feet on center and placed in grates or in planting strips as established in subsection (D)(5)(c) of this section.
DEPARTURE: Breaks in the tree coverage will be allowed near major building entries to enhance visibility.
c. Planting strips with trees may be used between any vehicle access or parking area and the pathway; provided, that the trees required in subsection (D)(5)(b) of this section are included, the pathway meets the applicable width standards herein, and the combined pathway and planting strip is at least 12 feet wide. Stormwater best management practices elements may be included in the planting strip.
Figure 19.62.050(D)(5)
Example of a successful pedestrian sidewalk between parking lot and storefront.
![]() |
e. See also AMC 19.62.060(C), Internal Roadway Design. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
The standards herein supplement the provisions of AMC Chapters 19.64, Parking, and 19.53, Private Driveways and Access. Where there is a conflict, these provisions herein apply.
A. Purpose.
1. To create a safe, convenient, and efficient network for vehicle circulation and parking.
2. To enhance the visual character of interior access roads.
3. To minimize conflicts with pedestrian circulation and activity.
B. Driveway Provisions. Driveways must meet the standards in AMC 19.53.030.
C. Internal Roadway Design.
1. To increase the function and appearance of internal roadways on large sites (greater than two acres) in the MMU zone, street trees and sidewalks must be provided on all internal access roadways, excepting access roads designed solely for the purpose of service (e.g., waste pick-up) and loading.
DEPARTURES will be allowed, provided the overall pedestrian circulation system and site landscaping meet the intent of the standards.
2. In some instances where traffic speed and volume are low, the reviewing authority may approve a street where vehicle, bicycle and pedestrian movement are mixed such as in a “woonerf” or “shared street.” Woonerf streets must feature traffic-calming and safety measures as well as landscape and amenity features as determined by the reviewing authority.
Figure 19.62.060(C)
Good internal roadway examples.
![]() The examples above include angled parking and planter strips with street trees. Pedestrian-scaled lighting also contributes to the character in the upper right image. |
![]() The above left image illustrates a thoroughfare lane with a row of street trees. A sidewalk is included on one side of the street to provide a strategic connection between businesses. The right image illustrates the curbless “woonerf” design where travel speeds are low and lanes are shared between pedestrians and vehicles. |
D. Drive-Through Facilities. Where allowed, drive through facilities (e.g., drive-up windows) must comply with the following:
1. Block Frontage Provisions. For the purpose of complying with the block frontage standards in AMC Chapter 19.61, drive-through lanes are considered a parking area.
2. Screening. Drive-through lanes must be screened from public streets, internal pathways, and adjacent residential uses with landscaping or architectural screens.
a. For drive-through lanes adjacent to the street, at least 10 feet of Type C landscaping (see AMC 19.65.060) must be provided between the sidewalk and the drive-through lane.
b. For drive-through lanes adjacent to internal pathways, at least five feet of Type C landscaping (see AMC 19.65.060) must be provided between the pathway and the drive-through lane.
c. For drive-through lanes adjacent to residential uses, at least five feet of Type A, B, or C landscaping (see AMC 19.65.060) must be provided.
DEPARTURE: Alternative screening schemes may be approved, provided they reduce the negative visual impacts of views from sidewalks, pathways, and adjacent residential uses and add visual interest.
3. Additional Drive-Through Lane Standards.
a. Drive-through lanes must not restrict pedestrian access between a public sidewalk and on-site buildings. Designated pathways must not be located within required stacking space.
b. Stacking spaces and the entrance and exit for the drive-through facility must be located to prevent any vehicles from extending onto the public right-of-way, or interfering with any pedestrian circulation, traffic maneuvering, or other parking space areas.
c. Sufficient stacking space must be provided for handling of motor vehicles using the drive-through facility during peak business hours of the facility.
d. A stacking space must be an area measuring eight feet by 20 feet with direct forward access to a service window of a drive-through facility.
e. Stacking spaces may not be counted as required parking spaces.
f. Noise from drive-through speakers must not be audible from adjacent residential properties. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To minimize adverse visual, odor, and noise impacts of mechanical equipment, utility cabinets and service areas at ground and roof levels.
2. To provide adequate, durable, well-maintained, and accessible service and equipment areas.
3. To protect residential uses and adjacent properties from impacts due to location and utilization of service areas.
B. Location of Ground-Related Service Areas and Mechanical Equipment.
1. Service areas (loading docks, trash dumpsters, compactors, recycling areas, electrical panels, and mechanical equipment areas) must be located for convenient service access while avoiding negative visual, auditory, olfactory, or physical impacts on the streetscape environment and adjacent residentially zoned properties. Service areas must be sited for alley access if available.
The Director may require evidence that such elements will not significantly impact neighboring properties or public areas. (For example, the Director may require noise-damping specifications for fans near residential zones.)
2. Exterior Loading Areas. Exterior loading areas for commercial uses must not be located within 20 feet of a residentially zoned property.
DEPARTURES may be allowed where such a restriction does not allow feasible development, and alternative design measures can successfully mitigate potential negative impacts. For example, areas and drives may be required by the reviewing authority to be separated from the residential lot by a masonry wall at least eight feet high.
3. Service areas must not be visible from the sidewalk and adjacent properties. Where the Director finds that the only option for locating a service area is an area visible from a street, internal pathway or pedestrian area, or from an adjacent property, the area must be screened with structural and or landscaping screening measures provided in subsection (C) below and AMC Chapter 19.65, Landscaping. Service elements accessible from an alley are exempt from screening requirements.
4. Design for Safety. Other provisions of this section notwithstanding, service areas used by residents must be located to avoid entrapment areas and other conditions where personal security is potentially a problem. The Director may require pedestrian-scaled lighting or other measures to enhance security.
5. Locate and/or shield noise-producing mechanical equipment, such as fans, heat pumps, etc., to minimize sounds and reduce impacts at property lines adjacent to residentially zoned properties.
6. Dumpster Storage Areas.
a. Dumpster storage areas must be provided for all nonresidential and multifamily development.
b. Dumpster storage areas must be on site and must not be located in the public right-of-way.
c. Dumpster storage areas must be sized to accommodate the minimum dumpster sizes (as provided by the Anacortes engineering design standards) for garbage, recycling, and composting.
Figure 19.62.070(B)
Service element location.
![]() Locate service elements to reduce impacts on the residential and pedestrian environment, and provide appropriate enclosure. |
C. Screening of Ground-Related Service Areas and Mechanical Equipment.
1. Where screening of ground level service areas is required (see subsection (B)(3) of this section), the following applies:
a. A structural enclosure must be constructed of masonry, heavy-gauge metal, or decay-resistant material that is also used with the architecture of the main building. The reviewing authority may allow materials other than those used for the main building if the finishes are similar in color and texture or if the proposed enclosure materials are more durable than those for the main structure. The walls must be sufficient to provide full screening from the affected roadway, pedestrian areas or adjacent use. The enclosure may use overlapping walls to screen dumpsters and other materials (see Figure 19.62.070(C) below).
b. Gates must be made of heavy-gauge, site-obscuring material. Chain-link or chain-link with slats is not an acceptable material for enclosures or gates.
c. Where the interior of a service enclosure is visible from surrounding streets, pathways, and buildings, an opaque or semi-opaque horizontal cover or screen must be used to mitigate unsightly views. The horizontal screen/cover should be integrated into the enclosure design (in terms of materials and/or design).
d. Collection points must be located and configured so that the enclosure gate swing does not obstruct pedestrian or vehicular traffic, or does not require that a hauling truck project into any public right-of-way. Ensure that screening elements allow for efficient service delivery and removal operations.
e. The service area must be paved.
2. The sides and rear of service enclosures must be screened with landscaping at least five feet wide in locations visible from the street, parking lots, and pathways to soften views of the screening element and add visual interest.
DEPARTURES to the provisions of subsections (C)(1) and (2) of this section will be considered per AMC 19.20.220, provided the enclosure and landscaping treatment meet the purpose of the standards and add visual interest to site users.
Figure 19.62.070(C)
Acceptable screening enclosures.
![]() | |
![]() | All three examples use durable and attractive enclosures with trees and shrubs to soften views of the enclosures from the side. The lower left example uses a trellis structure on top—a desirable example particularly where the top of the enclosures are visible from surrounding buildings, streets, and pathways (due to topography or building heights). |
D. Utility Meters, Electrical Conduit, and Other Service Utility Apparatus. These elements must be located and/or designed to minimize their visibility to the public. Project designers are strongly encouraged to coordinate with applicable service providers early in the design process to determine the best approach in meeting these standards. If such elements are mounted in a location visible from the street, pedestrian pathway, shared open space, or shared auto courtyards, they must be screened with vegetation and/or integrated into the building’s architecture.
Figure 19.62.070(D)
Utility meter location and screening—Good and bad examples.
![]() Place utility meters in less visible locations. The upper and lower left examples are successfully tucked away in a less visible location and/or screened by vegetation. The right images are poorly executed and would not be permitted in such visible locations. Such meters must be coordinated and better integrated with the architecture of the building. ![]() |
E. Location and Screening of Roof-Mounted Mechanical Equipment.
1. All rooftop mechanical equipment, including air conditioners, heaters, vents, and similar equipment, must be fully screened from public view at the street level. Screening must be located so as not to interfere with operation of the equipment.
Exception: Roof-mounted wind turbines, solar energy systems, and rainwater reuse systems do not require screening.
2. For rooftop equipment, all screening devices must be well integrated into the architectural design through such elements as parapet walls, false roofs, roof wells, clerestories, or equipment rooms. Screening walls or unit-mounted screening is allowed but less desirable. Wood must not be used for screens or enclosures. Louvered designs are acceptable if consistent with building design style. Perforated metal is not permitted.
3. The screening materials must be of material requiring minimal maintenance and must be as high as the equipment being screened.
4. Locate and/or shield noise-producing mechanical equipment such as fans, heat pumps, etc., to minimize sounds and reduce impacts to adjacent properties.
Figure 19.62.070(E)
Examples of how to screen roof-mounted mechanical equipment.
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
This section provides direction for the design of buildings consistent with the goals and policies of the Anacortes comprehensive plan. See the individual “purpose” statements for each section in this chapter. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. The provisions of this chapter apply to all nonresidential and multifamily development. The following are exempt:
1. All development in the I, LM, AZ, CM2, and MS zones.
2. Developments in the HM and LM1 zone when not abutting State Route 20 right-of-way.
B. For clarification on the relationship between the provisions in this division and other documents and codes, see AMC 19.60.020(B).
C. For the application of building additions and remodels and site improvements, see AMC 19.60.020(C).
D. For clarification on how the provisions of this division are applied, see AMC 19.60.030.
E. Public buildings may be exempted from building massing and articulation standards (see AMC 19.63.040), building details standards (see AMC 19.63.050), building materials provisions (see AMC 19.63.060), and blank wall treatment standards (see AMC 19.63.070), provided design treatments are integrated to meet the following objectives:
1. Enliven the pedestrian environment along the adjacent sidewalks.
2. Incorporate a prominent and inviting entry visible from the street.
3. Building design and materials should evoke a sense of permanence.
4. Site and building design stands out from the surrounding context as a distinct landmark and provides visual interest from all observable scales. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To promote buildings with an architectural character that reflects the region’s aesthetic and is based on human-scaled design details, durable high-quality materials, sustainable design measures, and responds uniquely to the site’s context.
2. To emphasize that high-quality design is most critical to Anacortes’s high-visibility sites and corridors.
3. To avoid generic, corporate architectural design that degrades the character and identity of Anacortes.
B. Architecture that is defined predominately by corporate identity features and is difficult to adapt to other uses is prohibited. For example, some franchise convenience uses have very specific architectural features (such as a distinctive roofline design that functions as a sign) that reinforce their identity. As tenants change in these types of buildings, these corporate identity features can negatively impact the character of the area and identity of new tenants. These features can also be very expensive to reconfigure and adapt to new uses. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To employ facade articulation techniques that reduce the perceived scale of large buildings and add visual interest from all observable scales.
2. To create clear and welcoming building entries.
B. Exemption. Buildings with less than 60 horizontal feet of facade are exempt from this section.
C. Facade Articulation. Nonresidential, mixed-use, and multifamily residential buildings must include facade articulation features at designated maximum intervals to create a human-scaled pattern. This standard applies to applicable building facades and other applicable building elevations facing parks, containing primary building entrances, and adjacent to lower intensity zones. Alley-facing building elevations not adjacent to a lower intensity zone are exempt.
1. The maximum horizontal length of intervals is:
a. MMU zone: 50 feet.
b. HM and LM1 zone (where applicable): 60 feet.
c. Buildings in all other applicable zones: 30 feet.
2. At least three of the following articulation features must be employed in compliance with maximum interval standards in subsection (C)(1) of this section:
a. Use of windows and/or entries.
b. Use of weather protection features.
c. Use of vertical piers/columns (applies to all floors of the facade, excluding upper-level stepbacks).
e. Change in building material, siding style, and/or window pattern (applies to all floors of the facade, excluding upper level stepbacks).
f. Vertical elements such as a trellis with plants, green wall, or art element that meet the purpose of the standard.
g. Providing vertical building modulation of at least 12 inches in depth if tied to a change in roofline per subsection (F) below or a change in building material, siding style, or color. Balconies may be used to qualify for this option if they are recessed or projected from the facade by at least 18 inches. Juliet balconies or other balconies that appear to be tacked on to the facade will not qualify for this option unless they employ high-quality materials and effectively meet the purpose of the standards.
h. Other design techniques that effectively reinforce a pattern of small facades compatible with the building’s surrounding context.
DEPARTURES will be considered, provided they meet the purpose of the standards and the design criteria in subsection (D) below. For example, a departure may propose a design with only two articulation features instead of three or the articulation features exceed the maximum articulation interval.
Figure 19.63.040(C-1)
Storefront facade articulation examples.
![]() The left image uses window patterns, awnings, and roofline modulation. The photo example to the right also includes window patterns and weather protection along with brick vertical piers to articulate the facade. The lower example illustrates how a multi-tenant retail building can successfully be articulated (windows, weather protection, vertical building modulation, and roofline changes). ![]() |
Figure 19.63.040(C-2)
Residential facade articulation examples.
![]() Below examples (except bottom right image) use a combination of vertical building modulation, window patterns, material changes, and roofline modulation. ![]() ![]() |
D. DEPARTURE Criteria Associated with Articulation Standards. Proposals must meet the purpose of the standards. The following criteria will be considered in determining whether the proposed articulation treatment meets the purpose:
1. Consider the type and width of the proposed articulation treatment and how effective it is in meeting the purpose given the building’s current and desired context (per Anacortes’s comprehensive plan).
2. Consider the applicable block frontage designation. Undesignated block frontages warrant more flexibility than block frontages designated as mixed or landscaped.
3. Consider the size and width of the building. Smaller buildings warrant greater flexibility than larger buildings.
4. Consider the quality of facade materials in concert with doors, windows, and other facade features and their ability to add visual interest to the street from a pedestrian scale and more distant observable scales.
E. Maximum Facade Width. Building facades and other building elevations facing lower intensity zone edge must include at least one of the following features to break up the massing of the building and add visual interest. This standard applies to applicable building elevations wider than 100 feet (wider than 150 feet in the MMU zone).
1. Provide vertical building modulation at least six feet deep and 15 feet wide. For multi-story buildings, the modulation must extend through at least one-half of the building floors.
2. Use of a contrasting vertical modulated design component featuring all of the following:
a. Utilizes a change in building materials that effectively contrast from the rest of the facade.
b. Component is modulated vertically from the rest of the facade by an average of six inches.
3. Facade employs building walls with contrasting articulation that make it appear like multiple distinct buildings. To qualify for this option, these contrasting facades must employ all of the following:
a. Different building materials and/or configuration of building materials.
b. Contrasting window design (sizes or configurations).
4. DEPARTURES to subsections (E)(1) through (E)(3) of this section will be considered, provided the design meets the purpose of the standards. Supplemental consideration for approving alternative designs:
a. Width of the facade. The larger the facade, the more substantial articulation/modulation features need to be.
b. Block frontage designation. Storefront designated block frontages warrant the most scrutiny while undesignated streets warrant more flexibility.
c. The type of articulation treatment and how effective it is in meeting the purpose given the building’s context.
Figure 19.63.040(E)
Illustrating maximum facade width standards and good and bad examples.
![]() Less than 100' wide: Meets standard. | ![]() More than 100' wide: Does not meet standard. |
![]() Building incorporates a courtyard along the facade (technique No.1 noted above) to effectively break it up into smaller components: Meets standard. | |
![]() The left building uses technique No. 1 (vertical building modulation at least six feet deep and 15 feet wide). The right building uses technique No. 2 (contrasting vertical modulated design component). Both examples are effective in breaking up the perceived scale of the building and adding visual interest. | |
F. Roofline Modulation. Roofline modulation is not required on all buildings. However, it can be used as one of the facade articulation features in subsection C of this section. In order to qualify as an articulation feature, rooflines must employ one or more of the following:
1. For flat roofs or facades with horizontal eave, fascia, or parapet, the minimum vertical dimension of roofline modulation is the greater of two feet or 0.1 multiplied by the wall height (finish grade to top of the wall) when combined with vertical building modulation techniques described in subsections above. Otherwise, the minimum vertical dimension of roofline modulation is the greater of four feet or 0.2 multiplied by the wall height.
2. A pitched roofline or gabled roofline segment of at least 20 feet in width. Buildings with pitched roofs must include a minimum slope of 5:12 and feature modulated roofline components at the interval required per the applicable standard above.
3. A combination of the above.
DEPARTURES will be considered, provided the roofline modulation design effectively reduces the perceived scale of the building and adds visual interest.
Figure 19.63.040(F)
Acceptable examples of roofline modulation.
![]() Roofline modulation examples for flat roofs. ![]() The left building illustrates a pitched roof example and the right building includes a combination of flat and gabled rooflines. |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To encourage the incorporation of design details and small-scale elements into building facades that are attractive at a pedestrian scale.
2. To integrate window design that adds depth, richness, and visual interest to the facade.
B. Facade Details—Nonresidential and Mixed-Use Buildings. All nonresidential and mixed-use buildings in the C, CBD, MMU, and CM zones and the MED-O overlay must be enhanced with appropriate details. This standard applies to applicable building facades and other building elevations facing parks and containing primary building entrances. All new buildings and additions and buildings associated with Level II and III improvements (see AMC 19.60.020(C)) must employ at least one detail element from each of the three categories below for each facade articulation interval (see AMC 19.63.040(B)). For example, a building with 120 feet of lot frontage with a facade articulated at 30-foot intervals will need to meet the standards for each of the three facade segments below.
1. Window and/or entry treatment, such as:
a. Display windows divided into a grid of multiple panes.
b. Transom windows.
c. Roll-up windows/doors.
d. Other distinctive window treatment that meets the purpose of the standards.
e. Recessed entry.
f. Decorative door.
g. Other decorative or specially designed entry treatment that meets the purpose of the standards.
Figure 19.63.050(B)(1)
Examples of decorative or specially designed windows and entries.
![]() ![]() Examples of decorative or specially designed windows and entries. A = openable storefront window. B = transom windows. C = openable window with decorative details. D = decorative window shades. E = decorative door. F = recessed entry. |
2. Building elements and facade details, such as:
a. Custom-designed weather protection element such as a steel canopy, cloth awning, or retractable awning.
b. Decorative building-mounted light fixtures.
c. Bay windows, trellises, towers, and similar elements.
d. Decorative, custom hanging sign(s) (option only available for building remodels).
e. Other details or elements that meet the purpose of these standards.
Figure 19.63.050(B)(2)
Examples of attached elements that enhance the visual intrigue of the building.
![]() ![]() Examples of elements attached to facades that enhance the visual intrigue of the building. A = retractable awning. B = custom hanging bike rack and repair station integrated as a storefront design element. C = decorative facade/sign lighting. D and E = custom decorative canopy. F = decorative tower. |
3. Building materials and other facade elements, such as:
a. Use of decorative building materials/use of building materials. Examples include decorative use of brick, tile, or stonework.
b. Artwork on building (such as a mural) or bas-relief sculpture.
c. Decorative kickplate, pilaster, base panel, or other similar feature.
d. Hand-crafted material, such as special wrought iron or carved wood.
e. Other details that meet the purpose of the standards.
Figure 19.63.050(B)(3)
Examples of building material details that enhance the visual intrigue of the building.
![]() ![]() Examples of decorative surface materials. A = decorative brick/design. B = decorative tile work and column pattern. C = decorative medallion. D = decorative mosaic tile work. E = decorative bulkhead. F = decorative materials and design. |
DEPARTURES for facade detail standards of this subsection (B) will be considered, provided the facade (at the overall scale and at the individual articulation scale) meets the purpose of the standards.
C. Window Design Standards.
1. All windows (except storefront display windows) must employ designs that add depth and richness to the building facade. At least one of the following features must be included to meet this requirement:
a. Recess windows at least two inches from the facade.
b. Incorporate window trim (at least three inches wide) around windows.
c. Incorporate other design treatments that add depth, richness, and visual interest to the facade.
2. Highly reflective glass must not be used on more than 10 percent of a building facade or other building elevations facing parks and containing primary building entrances.
Figure 19.63.050(C)
Acceptable and unacceptable window design examples.
![]() Recessed and/or trimmed windows. | |
![]() | This window lacks any other detail that adds visual interest. |
D. Cornice/Roofline Design. Buildings employing a flat roof must employ a distinctive roofline that effectively provides an identifiable “top” to the building. This could include a traditional cornice line or a contemporary interpretation of a traditional cornice line.
1. Such rooflines must be proportional to the size and scale of the building.
2. Understated cornice lines are permitted, depending on the materials and design of the base and middle elements in reinforcing the base/middle/top configuration.
Figure 19.63.050(D) below illustrates acceptable examples.
Figure 19.63.050(D)
Examples of buildings employing confident and distinctive rooflines.
![]() ![]() Building 1 uses a dramatic overhanging cornice at the corner. The left portion of Building 1 uses a very simple cornice line—to go with the upper level setback. Building 2 uses a traditional cornice line. Building 3 uses capped projecting columns along with an understated cornice line. Building 4 uses a very simple roofline—which is acceptable in this case due to the prominence of the wooden canopy. |
Rooftop solar units are permitted, provided the placement and design of units visible from the surrounding streetscape are carefully integrated into the overall design concept of the building.
E. Articulated Building Entries. The primary building entrance for an office building, hotel, apartment building, public or community-based facility or other multi-story commercial building must be designed as a clearly defined and demarcated standout architectural feature of the building. Such entrances must be easily distinguishable from regular storefront entrances on the building. Such entries must be scaled proportional to the building. See Figure 19.63.050(E) below for good examples.
Figure 19.63.050(E)
Acceptable building entry examples.
![]() |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To encourage the use of durable, high-quality, and urban building materials that minimize maintenance cost and provide visual interest from all observable vantage points.
2. To promote the use of a distinctive mix of materials that helps to articulate facades and lends a sense of depth and richness to the buildings.
3. To place the highest priority on the first floor in the quality and detailing of materials at the pedestrian scale.
B. Quality Building Materials. Applicants must use high-quality durable materials. This is most important for the base of buildings, particularly for commercial and mixed-use buildings where the facade is sited close to sidewalks. Stone, brick or tile masonry, architectural concrete or other similar highly durable materials must be used for at least the bottom two feet of the first-floor facade on nonresidential and mixed-use buildings (excluding window and door areas).
C. Special Conditions and Limitations for the Use of Certain Cladding Materials.
1. Concrete block (a.k.a. concrete masonry unit or CMU) may be used as a secondary cladding material on all street-facing building elevations if it is incorporated with other permitted materials.
DEPARTURES will be considered for alternative designs that use concrete block as the primary, but not the only, cladding material, provided the design incorporates a combination of textures and/or colors to add visual interest. For example, combining split or rock-facade units with smooth blocks can create distinctive patterns. The figures below illustrate acceptable concrete block use/designs.
Figure 19.63.060(C)(1)
Acceptable concrete block use/design.
![]() CMU is the primary cladding for the corner element above, but secondary to brick on the main facades. The corner element uses a combination of decorative split-faced CMU closer to the sidewalk and smooth-faced CMU that is colored to look more like traditional white terra cotta tiles. | ![]() The above facade illustrates an acceptable alternative example, as CMU is used as the primary cladding material. Note the use of split-facade CMUs above each of the awnings and coupled with the use of smooth-facade CMUs on the vertical columns (which employ black accent tiles for added interest). |
2. Metal siding may be used on all street-facing building elevations, provided it complies with the following standards:
a. It must feature visible corner molding and trim and does not extend to the ground level of nonresidential and mixed-use buildings and no lower than two feet above grade for residential buildings. Masonry, concrete, or other durable material must be incorporated between the metal siding and the ground plane.
b. Metal siding must be factory finished, with a matte, nonreflective surface.
c. Within the C and CBD zones, metal may only be used as a secondary cladding material if it is incorporated with other permitted materials.
DEPARTURES will be considered, provided the material’s integration and overall facade composition meet the purpose of the standards.
Figure 19.63.060(C)(2)
Acceptable metal siding examples.
![]() The use of metal siding in each example above is secondary to masonry. The left and right images are more contemporary in character, whereas the middle image is more rustic and industrial, with more refined windows. |
3. Standards for the Use of Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS). Such material/finishes may be used when it complies with the following:
a. EIFS is limited to no more than 20 percent of the total facade area and may not be the primary cladding material on nonresidential and mixed-use buildings in the CBD, C, MMU, and CM zones.
b. EIFS must feature a smooth or sand finish only.
c. EIFS must be trimmed in wood, masonry, or other material and must be sheltered from weather by roof overhangs or other methods.
d. EIFS must not be used on the ground floor of the following building elevations:
i. Ground level facades containing nonresidential uses in the CBD, C, MMU, and CM zones.
ii. Other ground level building elevations containing nonresidential uses in the CBD, C, MMU, and CM zones when facing parks or containing primary building entrances.
Concrete, masonry, or other highly durable material(s) must be used for the subject ground level building elevations to provide a durable surface where damage is most likely.
DEPARTURES will be considered, provided the material’s integration and overall facade composition meet the purpose of the standards.
Figure 19.63.060(C)(3)
Acceptable and unacceptable EIFS examples.
![]() Left image: Note the use of brick and decorative concrete block on the ground level and EIFS on the second floor. The window treatments visible on the second floor add depth and interest to the facade. Right image: EIFS is between the window and sidewalk—this design is prohibited. |
4. Cementitious wall board paneling/siding may be used, provided it meets the following provisions:
a. Cement board paneling/siding may not be used on ground level facades containing nonresidential uses.
b. Where cement board paneling/siding is the dominant siding material, the design must integrate a mix of colors and/or textures that are articulated consistent with windows, balconies, and modulated building surfaces and are balanced with facade details that add visual interest from the ground level and adjacent buildings.
DEPARTURES will be considered, provided the material’s integration and overall facade composition meet the purpose of the standards.
Figure 19.63.060(C)(4)
Acceptable and unacceptable cementitious wall board examples.
![]() The above building uses cementitious wallboard in different textures and colors to help articulate the facade. The white color replicates the board and batten style in the left image and green color in the right image effectively replicates horizontal wood siding. ![]() The wallboard board panels covering a large area in a single color would not meet the purpose of the standards. The right image is a better example and combines larger panels (dark maroon color) with horizontal wallboard board siding (beige color) as effective articulation features. Below is a similar acceptable example. | |
![]() | Another acceptable wallboard example replicating board and batten style with horizontal siding integrated with different colors and roofline modulation. |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Purpose.
1. To avoid untreated blank walls.
2. To retain and enhance the character of Anacortes’s streetscapes.
B. Blank Wall Definition. “Blank wall” means a ground floor wall or portion of a ground floor wall over 10 feet in height and with a horizontal length greater than 15 feet and does not include a transparent window or door.
Figure 19.63.070(B)
Blank wall definition.
![]() |
C. Blank Wall Treatment Standards. Untreated blank walls adjacent to a public street, pedestrian-oriented space, common usable open space, or pedestrian pathway are prohibited. Methods to treat blank walls can include:
1. Display windows at least 16 inches of depth to allow for changeable displays. Tack-on display cases (see Figure 19.63.070(C) below) do not qualify as a blank wall treatment.
2. Landscape planting bed at least five feet wide or a raised planter bed at least two feet high and three feet wide in front of the wall with planting materials that are sufficient to obscure or screen at least 60 percent of the wall’s surface within three years.
3. Installing a vertical trellis in front of the wall with climbing vines or plant materials.
4. Installing a mural as approved by the Director.
5. Special building detailing that adds visual interest at a pedestrian scale. Such detailing must use a variety of surfaces; monotonous designs will not meet the purpose of the standards.
For large visible blank walls, a variety of treatments may be required to meet the purpose of the standards.
DEPARTURES will be considered, provided the entire facade composition meets the intent of the standards for the context of the wall (e.g., walls along pathway corridors connecting parking areas to building entries might be granted more flexibility than street facades).
Figure 19.63.070(C)
Blank wall treatment examples.
![]() Acceptable and unacceptable blank wall treatments. Note in the far right example, the display cases don’t meet the 16'' depth requirement, nor does the design meet the purpose of the standards. |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
The purpose of this chapter is to:
A. Provide for adequate, convenient, and safe parking for cars and bicycles for all uses allowed in this code in all areas of the city.
B. Limit the overbuilding of parking, which has impacts on construction costs, land consumed, air and water quality, walkability, traffic congestion, and aesthetics.
C. Provide for alternative parking arrangements such as flexible minimum requirements, shared parking, and in-lieu fees.
D. Reduce demand for parking by encouraging walking, bicycling, public transit, and rideshare. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Off-street parking in conjunction with all land and building uses established after the enactment of the ordinance codified in this title must be provided prior to the issuance of a certificate of occupancy.
B. Off-street parking for nonresidential use must be either on the same lot or within 500 feet (walking distance) of the building it is intended to serve.
C. Residential off-street parking areas must consist of a parking lot, driveway, garage, carport, or a combination thereof and must be located on the lot they are intended to serve.
D. Any area once designated as required off-street parking must not be changed to any other use unless and until parking facilities are provided elsewhere, which conform to the requirements of this chapter.
E. Off-street parking existing at the effective date of the ordinance codified in this title in connection with the operation of an existing building or use must not be reduced to an amount less than hereinafter required for a similar new building or new use.
F. The required off-street parking area must be for occupants, employees, visitors, and patrons, and must be limited in use to parking, except for approved temporary uses per AMC 19.48.020(A).
G. Off-street parking meeting the minimum quantitative requirements of this chapter is not considered a principal use for the purpose of interpreting Tables 19.41.040 and 19.41.050.
H. Parking Studies. For the purposes of this chapter, a parking study is a document that provides sufficient information to determine the parking requirements for a specific use. The estimate may be based on scientific data, census data, transit service, academic studies, similar uses in the city or comparable cities, or other sources accepted by the Director. As required by this chapter, a parking study may be required for adjusting minimum and maximum quantitative requirements, determining times of peak parking demand, and determining impacts to on-street parking in the vicinity of the subject development site. All parking studies must be prepared by either a professional engineer with expertise in traffic and parking analyses or an equally qualified individual authorized by the Director.
I. Parking needs must be balanced with low-impact development planning that considers the reduction of impervious surfaces as a priority. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Number of Parking Spaces.
1. Off-street parking areas must contain at a minimum the number of parking spaces as stipulated in AMC 19.64.040, except for modifications allowed elsewhere in this chapter.
2. If the formula for determining the number of off-street parking spaces results in a fraction, the number of off-street parking spaces must be rounded to the nearest whole number with fractions of one-half or greater rounding up and fractions below one-half rounding down.
3. In the case of two or more uses on the same site, the total requirements for off-street parking must be the sum of the requirements for each use computed separately, except as permitted in AMC 19.64.080 pertaining to shared parking.
B. Guest Parking Requirements.
1. Guest parking is required for all residential developments in accordance with this subsection. Guest parking provided is above and beyond the minimum quantitative requirements elsewhere in this chapter.
2. Guest Parking Location and Accessibility Standards.
a. On-street parking areas within or directly adjacent to the subdivision or other development may be used to meet guest parking requirements, provided such areas are not already used for the purpose of meeting minimum parking requirements. One parking space is equivalent to 20 lineal feet of parallel on-street parking area.
b. Other off-street parking spaces within the subdivision/development that are above and beyond standard minimum parking requirements for the development may be used for guest parking.
c. Guest parking spaces must be available to guests of any residential unit in the development at all hours.
3. Minimum Guest Parking Ratios by Housing Type.
Table 19.64.030(B)
Minimum guest parking spaces required by housing type.
Housing Type | Minimum guest parking ratio |
Single-Family | 1 per 2 units |
Cottage | 1 per 4 units |
Duplex or Triplex | 1 per 4 units |
Townhouse | 1 per 4 units |
Multifamily | 1 per 8 units; 1 per 10 units if the multifamily use parking is provided entirely by structured parking; Where units average less than 700 square feet, 1 per 4,000 sq. ft. of net leasable floor area. |
4. Developments within the CBD zone are exempt from the guest parking requirements herein.
5. If the required number of guest parking spaces results in a fraction that requires less than one guest stall, no off-street guest parking space is required if on-street parking is available within 500 feet of the subject property.
C. Accessible Parking Requirements. Accessible parking spaces must be provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 and the current ADA Standards for Accessible Design. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. The minimum number of off-street parking spaces must be determined in accordance with Table 19.64.040.
B. Special cases are indicated by the term “Director decision,” in which case parking requirements must be established by the Director. For determination by the Director, the applicant must supply one of the following:
1. Documentation regarding actual parking demand for the proposed use.
2. Technical studies prepared by a qualified professional relating to the parking need for the proposed use.
3. Documentation of parking requirements for the proposed use from other comparable jurisdictions.
C. Where a cell in Table 19.64.040 is blank, there are no applicable requirements for the use.
D. For unclassified uses, refer to AMC 19.41.030(E). Where the Director finds that there is no similar use, the procedures for a “Director decision” under subsection B of this section apply.
Table 19.64.040
Off-street parking spaces required.
Use | Minimum Parking Spaces Required | Maximum Parking Spaces Allowed |
RESIDENTIAL | ||
Household Living, as listed below | ||
Single-family | 2 per unit | |
1 per unit | ||
See AMC 19.47.030(C)(8) | ||
Cottage housing | 1.5 per unit | |
Duplex or triplex | Same as multifamily (based on number of bedrooms) | |
Townhouse | Same as multifamily (based on number of bedrooms) | |
Multifamily dwelling, one bedroom or studio | 1.0 per unit | 1.5 per unit |
Multifamily dwelling, two bedrooms | 1.4 per unit | 2 per unit |
Multifamily dwelling, three or more bedrooms | 1.6 per unit | 2.5 per unit |
Multifamily dwelling, restricted | 25% reduction in base multifamily parking requirements above (based on number of rooms) | Same as multifamily uses above |
Live-work dwellings | Same as multifamily above plus: • Zero spaces for nonresidential uses with <500 sq. ft. nonresidential floor area. • One space for nonresidential uses with 500—1,000 sq. ft. nonresidential floor area. • Parking for nonresidential floor area >1,000 sq. ft. must meet applicable commercial use parking standards below. | |
Group Living, as listed below | ||
2 per home | ||
0.5 per unit | ||
0.33 per bed | ||
1 per rented room | ||
COMMERCIAL | ||
Day Care, as listed below | ||
Day care I facility | 2 per facility | |
Day care II facility | ||
General-Service, except as listed below | 3 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | 5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA |
Boat/marine equipment service | 1 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
Heavy service | 2 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
Water-oriented service use | ||
Medical, as listed below | ||
3 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | ||
Office | 2.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | 4 per 1,000 square feet of NFA |
Overnight Lodging | 1 per guest room | 1.5 per guest room |
Passenger Terminal | ||
Personal Service, as listed below | ||
Personal services, with fixed stations | 1.25 per station | 1.5 per station |
Personal services, without fixed stations | 2.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | 4 per 1,000 square feet of NFA |
Recreation, Indoor, except as listed below | ||
3 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | ||
Art gallery | 2 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
4 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | ||
1 per 5 fixed seats or 8 per 1,000 square feet of NFA if no fixed seats | 1 per 3 fixed seats or 12 per 1,000 square feet of NFA if no fixed seats | |
Recreation, Outdoor | ||
Restaurant/Bar | 5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | 14 per 1,000 square feet of NFA |
Retail Sales, as listed below | ||
3 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | 5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
3 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | 4 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
Heavy retail | 2 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | 4 per 1,000 square feet of NFA |
Wholesale | 1.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
Vehicle Sales/Rental | ||
INDUSTRIAL | ||
Heavy Industrial | 1 per employee plus 2.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
Light Industrial, except as listed below | 1.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | 1 per employee plus 2.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA |
Marijuana production | ||
Marijuana, processing | ||
Light Manufacturing, except as listed below | 1.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
2.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | ||
Research and Development | 2 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
Self-Service Storage | 0.5 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
Warehouse and Distribution | 0.05 per 1,000 square feet of NFA | |
Waste-Related Services | ||
Water-Oriented Industrial Uses | ||
Wholesale Trade | ||
PUBLIC, INSTITUTIONAL AND OPEN SPACE USES | ||
Agriculture | ||
Civic | ||
Parks, Plazas, Open Spaces, and Natural Areas | ||
Resource Extraction | ||
Utilities | ||
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Minimum Requirements. Parking space and aisle dimensions for parking facilities must meet the standards in Table 19.64.050.
Table 19.64.050
![]() The columns A—E below refer to the parking layout graphic above. Column A is measured in degrees and columns B—E are measured in feet. | ||||
A Parking Angle | B Space Width | C Space Length | D Aisle Width | E Curb Width |
0 (Parallel) | 8 | N/A | N/A | 23 |
30 | 9 | 18 | 11 | 18 |
45 | 9 | 20 | 13 | 12.7 |
60 | 9 | 21 | 18 | 10.5 |
90 (Perpendicular) | 9 | 19 | 26 | 9 |
B. Parking Space Length.
1. Parking spaces must be a minimum of 18 feet long and a maximum of 23 feet long.
2. Two feet of parking space length may overhang designated walking paths. See AMC 19.53.050(C)(1)(b) and 19.62.050(D)(3) for related walking path dimensional standards.
C. Compact Parking Spaces.
1. Up to 33 percent of required nonaccessible parking spaces may be designated as compact.
2. Compact parking spaces have a minimum space length of 15 feet and a minimum space width of eight feet.
3. Each compact parking space must be clearly identified by painting the word “COMPACT” in capital letters, a minimum of eight inches high, on the pavement at the base of the parking space and centered between the striping.
D. Alley Parking. When parking spaces located on a property are directly accessed from an alley, the alley right-of-way may be treated as the aisle per Table 19.64.050. The parking spaces must be located and angled to allow adequate turning space.
E. Large Vehicles. When parking lots may have substantial traffic by trucks or other large vehicles, the Director may establish larger minimum dimensions.
F. Alternative Standards. The Director may approve alternate designs not meeting these standards when a qualified transportation engineer demonstrates that the alternate design proposal meets current and accepted standards such as those maintained by the Institute of Transportation Engineers. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. For new development in the CBD zone, the minimum parking spaces required are 50 percent of that shown in Table 19.64.040.
B. Ground floor commercial uses in the CBD zone are exempt from the minimum parking requirements of this chapter.
C. Existing developments in mixed-use and industrial zones that change use or expand their net floor area by less than 50 percent are exempt from the minimum parking requirements of this chapter for the life of the building. Existing developments that expand their net floor area by 50 percent or more must meet the minimum requirements of this chapter. In no case may any new or expanded development exceed the maximum parking spaces allowed by this chapter, unless meeting the requirements of subsection (E) below.
D. Minimum off-street parking for uses in the C, MMU, LM, LM1, HM, MS, I, CM2, R3, R3A, and R4 zones may be reduced from the requirements of Table 19.64.040 with any of the following options:
1. The Director may allow up to a 50 percent reduction in minimum parking spaces if the reduction is supported by a parking study per AMC 19.64.020(H).
2. For nonresidential uses 5,000 gross square feet or larger, two parking spaces may be replaced by one space reserved for employee carpools. Use of this of provision is limited to a 10 percent reduction in total parking spaces as determined by the Director.
3. For nonresidential uses 5,000 gross square feet or larger, provide showers, changing rooms, and day-use lockers near long-term bicycle parking (see AMC 19.64.100 for related requirements). Use of this provision is limited to a five percent reduction in total parking spaces as determined by the Director.
4. For new residential uses with 20 or more dwelling units, three parking spaces may be replaced by one space reserved for a car-sharing provider. Use of this provision is limited to a 15 percent reduction in total parking spaces as determined by the Director. A long-term agreement between the property owner and a car-sharing provider must be approved by the Director. The agreement, along with a notice that the agreement is the basis for modified parking requirements under this chapter, must be recorded with the title to the property before a certificate of occupancy is issued.
5. The applicant may propose other transportation-related options that reduce parking demand in exchange for reduced minimum parking spaces if the Director determines they meet the purpose of this chapter.
E. Maximum off-street parking outside the CBD zone may be increased up to 25 percent from the requirements of Table 19.64.040 if the increase is supported by a parking study per AMC 19.64.020(H). For increases more than 25 percent, the Director may require any of the following as a condition of the increase:
1. For nonresidential uses 5,000 gross square feet or larger, provide spaces reserved for employee carpools.
2. For nonresidential uses 5,000 gross square feet or larger, provide showers, changing rooms, and day-use lockers near long-term bicycle parking (see AMC 19.64.100 for related requirements).
3. For nonresidential uses 5,000 square feet or larger, provide a designated passenger loading and unloading area. This area may be located on the street with approval of the Public Works Director or off street in conformance with the standards of AMC 19.62.060 and AMC Chapter 19.53, Private Driveways and Access.
4. For new residential uses with 20 or more dwelling units, provide spaces reserved for a car-sharing provider. A long-term agreement between the property owner and a car-sharing provider must be approved by the Director. The agreement, along with a notice that the agreement is the basis for modified parking requirements under this chapter, must be recorded with the title to the property before a certificate of occupancy is issued.
5. The applicant may propose other transportation-related conditions that reduce parking demand in exchange for increased maximum parking spaces if they meet the purpose of this chapter. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Applicability. Developments may pay a fee in lieu of off-street parking requirements established in AMC 19.64.040, provided the following conditions are met:
1. The city has adopted a parking fee-in-lieu plan with provisions for the rates, collection, and use of funds.
2. The development is new or an expansion of leasable area.
3. The development is in one of the following locations:
a. The CBD zone.
b. The OT zone east of M Avenue.
c. The C zone north of 12th Street.
d. The MS zone west of R Avenue.
e. The CM zone west of R Avenue.
B. Number of Spaces. Up to 50 percent of the minimum parking space requirements of this chapter may be waived if all provisions of this section are met. Additional reduction opportunities up to an additional 50 percent may be waived if supported by a parking study per AMC 19.64.020(H).
C. Fee Payment.
1. Rate. The fee in lieu per parking space must be set by the Director and be based upon the current market rates for acquiring, planning, designing, developing, financing, and maintaining public off-street parking facilities. The Director may maintain separate rate schedules based upon the different costs of surface parking facilities and structured parking facilities. The Director may apply the rate that is consistent with the city’s current public parking plan.
2. Timing. The fee must be paid prior to the issuance of a building permit.
D. Use of Fee.
1. Funds from the parking fee-in-lieu program must be deposited by the City of Anacortes Treasurer in a special fund to be designated the “Anacortes off-street parking cumulative fund.” The City Council may direct that other moneys be transferred into the fund to be used for the purposes of the fund.
2. The fund must be used exclusively for acquiring, planning, designing, developing, financing, and maintaining public off-street parking facilities by purchase or lease in the areas identified in subsection (A)(3) of this section. The number of parking spaces planned and provided must be at least equal to the number of parking spaces waived for private development under this section.
3. Parking facilities provided with this fee must be available for general public use at all times, including for long-term residential parking. Use of such parking facilities may require time-based fees, and other restrictions may apply, as determined by the city’s current parking plan. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Two or more buildings or uses may collectively provide the required off-street parking to achieve efficiency of vehicular and pedestrian circulation, economy of space, and a superior grouping of buildings or uses. Legally binding documents, such as a covenant or reciprocal easement agreement, or by participation in a local improvement district or parking cooperative or association, must be approved by the City Attorney and recorded with the Skagit County Auditor in the chain of title for the properties at expense of the applicant.
B. When cooperative parking facilities can be provided, the Director may reduce the on-site parking requirements based on the following criteria:
1. Peak demand occurs at distinctly different times as reported by the Institute of Transportation Engineers or found with a parking study per AMC 19.64.020(H).
2. The minimum required parking must be based upon the minimum amount necessary to satisfy the daily peak demand generated by the uses.
3. In no case may the minimum required parking for a multi-tenant facility be less than 60 percent of the total required for the individual uses.
C. Shared parking associated with multi-tenant retail and commercial facilities will be considered to be a shared parking facility. Lease agreements will satisfy the requirement for a sufficient legal document.
D. If any requirements for shared parking are violated, the affected property owners must provide a remedy satisfactory to the Director or provide the full amount of required off-street parking for each use, in accordance with the requirements of this chapter, unless a satisfactory alternative remedy is approved by the Director. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
When the city has received a shell building permit application, off-street parking requirements must be based on the possible tenant improvements or uses authorized by the zone designation and compatible with the limitations of the shell permit. When the range of possible uses results in different parking requirements, the Director must establish the amount of parking based on a likely range of uses. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Minimum Required.
1. The minimum number of short-term and long-term bicycle parking spaces required is in Table 19.64.100. For the purposes of this section, the Director must determine what use applies to the development.
2. If the formula for determining the number of bicycle parking spaces results in a fraction, the number of off-street parking spaces must be rounded to the nearest whole number with fractions of one-half or greater rounding up and fractions below one-half rounding down. If the formula results in a number less than one, then at least one bicycle parking space is required.
3. In the case of two or more uses on the same site, the total requirements for bicycle parking must be the sum of the requirements for each use computed separately.
Table 19.64.100
Bicycle parking spaces required.
Use | Minimum Short-Term Bicycle Parking Spaces Required | Minimum Long-Term Bicycle Parking Spaces Required |
|---|---|---|
Multifamily, group living | 0.5 per 10 dwelling units, and 2 minimum | 5 per 10 dwelling units, and 2 minimum |
Overnight lodging | 0.5 per 10 guest rooms, and 2 minimum | 0.3 per 10 guest rooms, and 2 minimum |
Place of assembly, civic, indoor recreation, day care | Fixed seats: 3 per 100 No fixed seats: 0.20 per 1,000 square feet of NLA 2 minimum | Fixed seats: 2 per 100 No fixed seats: 0.10 per 1,000 square feet of NLA 2 minimum |
Retail sales, general service, personal service | 0.25 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum | 0.10 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum |
Restaurant/bar | 0.5 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum | 0.10 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum |
Office | 0.10 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum | 0.20 per 1,000 square feet of NLA |
Medical | 0.05 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum | 0.05 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum |
Industrial, utilities | 0.05 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum | 0.05 per 1,000 square feet of NLA, and 2 minimum |
Schools, pre-kindergarten and K-12 | 0.75 per 10 students of planned capacity, and 2 minimum | 1 per 10 employees and 1 per 20 students of planned capacity, and 2 minimum |
Colleges and universities | 1 per 10 students of planned capacity, and 2 minimum | 1 per 10 employees and 1 per 10 students of planned capacity, and 2 minimum |
B. Location.
1. Short-term bicycle parking spaces may be located in the areas described in subsections (B)(1)(a) and (b) of this section:
a. Indoors or outdoors on the development site.
b. On a public sidewalk or street outside the development, provided of all of the following requirements are met:
i. If on a sidewalk, the total sidewalk width (including any planting area or landscaped strip) is at least 12 feet wide in a mixed-use or industrial zone or at least eight feet wide in a residential zone.
ii. The bicycle parking spaces are within 100 feet of the development’s primary pedestrian entry.
iii. The Public Works Director certifies bicycle parking in the public right-of-way in the proposed location does not conflict with the transportation plan.
iv. The property owner maintains the bicycle parking in perpetuity per the terms of an encroachment permit recorded to the property title.
c. Short-term bicycle spaces on a public sidewalk or street for multiple businesses or properties are encouraged to be consolidated, where practical, to comply with the requirements of subsection (B)(1)(b) of this section.
2. Long-term bicycle parking spaces must be located on the development site.
C. Design.
1. The design of short-term and long-term bicycle parking spaces must substantially comply with the current “Essentials of Bike Parking,” maintained by the Association of Pedestrian and Bicycle Professionals, or similar standards approved for use by the Director.
2. Locating all bicycle parking spaces under weather protection cover is encouraged. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Parking Area Plans. Developments featuring new off-street parking areas must submit plans of such parking area(s) showing adjacent streets, proposed circulation of traffic, proposed stormwater management, lighting, landscaping, and fencing.
B. Parking Lot Access. Ingress and egress to the parking lot or area must be provided at locations approved by the City Engineer.
C. Surfacing and Grading. All required off-street parking area must be graded and surfaced to a standard comparable to the street which serves the parking area as determined by the City Engineer. Off-street parking areas must have dust-free, all-weather surfacing. Off-street parking areas must conform to city of Anacortes development standards.
D. Drainage. Drainage and erosion/sedimentation control facilities must be provided in accordance with city of Anacortes development standards.
E. Parking Space Markings. Asphalt- or concrete-surfaced parking areas must have parking spaces marked by surface paint lines or suitable substitute traffic marking material. Wheel stops or curbing are required where a parked vehicle would encroach on adjacent property, pedestrian access or circulation areas, right-of-way, or landscaped areas.
F. Traffic Control Devices. All traffic control devices such as parking strips, designated car stalls, directional arrow or signs, bull rails, curbs, and other developments must be installed and completed as shown on the approved plans. Hard-surfaced parking areas must use paint or similar devices to delineate car stalls and direction of traffic.
G. Curbing. All access and parking areas must use cast-in-place vertical curbs or functionally equivalent designs that provide pedestrian safety. Curbs may be cut to allow surface water runoff to enter low impact development best management practices. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. The property owner must maintain all off-street access and parking areas.
B. Maintenance must include:
1. Removal and replacement of dead and dying trees, grass and shrubs.
2. Removal of trash and weeds.
3. Repair and maintenance of traffic control devices, parking space striping, signs, light standards, fences, walls, surfacing materials, curbs, railings, landscaping, and stormwater best management practice elements.
4. Repair and maintenance of permanent stormwater best management practice elements. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Landscaping is necessary to provide a well-balanced, aesthetically pleasing environment for the residents of Anacortes. Specifically, these requirements are intended to accomplish the following:
A. Maintain and enhance property values.
B. Enhance the character and appearance of each neighborhood and the community.
C. Promote tree retention and the protection of existing native vegetation.
D. Implement tree and landscaping plans and programs adopted by the city.
E. Provide adequate buffers between differing land uses.
F. Define, break up, and screen parking areas to reduce potentially negative impacts on adjacent uses.
G. Improve the air quality and provide wildlife habitat.
H. Reduce erosion and stormwater runoff. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Applicability. This chapter applies to all required landscaping installed or altered on all properties.
B. For clarification on the relationship between the provisions in this division and other documents and codes, see AMC 19.60.020(B).
C. For the application of building additions and remodels and site improvements, see AMC 19.60.020(C).
D. For clarification on how the provisions of this division are applied, see AMC 19.60.030.
E. The Director may waive or relax these provisions in the HM, I, LM, MS, and CM2 zones depending on the type of use, number of anticipated employees and customers, and the site’s physical context. Greater numbers of employees and/or customers and higher visibility levels warrant a greater application of landscaping standards. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Minimum landscaped areas required in Tables 19.42.020 and 19.42.030 consist of grade level or elevated planting beds featuring trees, shrubs, flowers, ferns, groundcover, lawn grass, and other vegetation. Landscaped area may include xeriscape elements.
Exceptions and exemptions:
A. Developments on sites with a designated storefront block frontage are exempt.
B. Developments on sites featuring a building or buildings meeting storefront block frontage standards along the entire lot frontage are exempt.
C. Commercial or multifamily developments may use rooftop planting areas to provide required landscaped area, provided at least 50 percent of all required parking is located within and/or below the structure. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. A landscape plan is required for all new development containing landscaping, including landscaping within the adjacent right-of-way. The landscape plan must be submitted as part of the applicable review process within AMC 19.20.030.
B. Landscape plans must be completed by a Washington State licensed landscape architect or Washington certified professional horticulturalist (CPH) for multifamily and nonresidential developments with a development site area of 10,000 gross square feet or more.
C. Landscape plans must show the following elements:
1. Boundaries and dimensions of the site.
2. Location of existing and proposed streets, curbs, utility lines, sidewalks.
3. Location of buildings and structures, parking lots, driveways, loading areas, outdoor mechanical equipment, signs, refuse enclosures, overhead utilities, water meter location, grassy swales, parking lot lighting, and any plants or trees that are to remain on site.
4. The location and design of landscape areas to be preserved and planted, and plant list to include the location, number, size and type of plant material by botanical and common name.
5. North arrow and scale.
6. Irrigation system if a permanent or temporary system is proposed.
7. Planting details.
8. Name, address and phone number of the person preparing the plan.
9. Landscaping calculations in compliance with this chapter.
10. A maintenance plan for any infiltration-based stormwater best management practices (BMPs) built as part of the landscaping design, including the specifications and maintenance procedures of any soil amendments.
11. The location of existing trees to be preserved, or new trees to be planted, in conformance with AMC Chapter 16.50, Tree Preservation, when applicable.
D. No building permits or certificate of occupancy (CO) must be issued until a landscape plan is reviewed and approved and improvements installed per the approved landscape plan. A suitable guarantee may be provided if installation is not possible or advisable due to seasonal constraints. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Native and Naturalized Plant Species. New landscaping materials must include species native to the region or hardy, waterwise, and noninvasive species appropriate in the climatic conditions of the region (decorative annuals are an exception). Generally acceptable plant materials must be those identified as hardy in Zone 8b as described in the United States Department of Agriculture’s Plant Hardiness Zone Map. The selection of plant species should include consideration of soil type and depth, the amount of maintenance required, spacing, exposure to sun and wind, the slope and contours of the site, compatibility with existing native vegetation preserved on the site, water conservation where needed, soil infiltration capacity, and the impact of landscaping on visibility of the site for purposes of public safety and surveillance.
B. Tree Standards and Guidelines.
1. Tree heights may be called for within this chapter or elsewhere within this title:
a. Large tree: capable of growing 35 feet high or greater under normal growing conditions.
b. Medium tree: capable of growing over 15 feet high and less than 35 feet high under normal growing conditions.
c. Small tree: capable of growing up to 15 feet high under normal growing conditions.
2. Unless otherwise noted herein, required trees must meet the following standards at the time of planting:
a. Required deciduous trees (other than street trees) must be fully branched, have a minimum caliper of one and one-half inches (as measured six inches above the root ball), and a minimum height of six feet at the time of planting.
b. Required deciduous trees within parking areas must be a minimum caliper of one inch (as measured six inches above the root ball) and a minimum height of 10 feet at the time of planting.
c. Required evergreen trees must be fully branched and a minimum of six feet in height, measured from the treetop to the ground, at the time of planting.
C. Shrub Standard. Shrubs, except for ornamental grasses, must be a minimum of one-gallon size at the time of planting.
D. Groundcover Standards and Guidelines.
1. Groundcovers must be planted and spaced to result in total coverage of the required landscape area within three years, or as per recommendations by a Washington State licensed landscape architect or Washington certified professional horticulturalist as follows:
a. Four-inch pots at 18 inches on center.
b. One-gallon or greater sized containers at 24 inches on center.
c. A bed of flowers in place of groundcover plants. A reduction in the minimum size may be permitted if certified by a Washington State licensed landscape architect or Washington certified professional horticulturalist that the reduction must not diminish the intended effect or the likelihood the plants will survive.
2. Grass is acceptable as groundcover in landscaped areas, but generally not preferred for water conservation and maintenance purposes (lawn areas designed as play areas are an exception).
3. Groundcover areas must contain at least two inches of composted organic material at finished grade.
E. Tree and Plant Diversity.
1. If there are more than eight required trees, no more than 40 percent of them may be of one species.
2. If there are more than 24 required trees, no more than 20 percent of them may be of one species.
3. If there are more than 24 required shrubs, no more than 75 percent of them may be of one species.
F. Soil Augmentation and Mulching.
1. Existing soils must be augmented with a two-inch layer of fully composted organic material tilled a minimum of six inches deep prior to initial planting.
2. Landscape areas must be covered with at least two inches of mulch to minimize evaporation. Mulch must consist of organic materials such as bark chips and wood grindings or yard waste, sawdust, and/or manure that is fully composted. Washed rock can also be used as a mulch.
G. Landscape Installation Standards.
1. All required landscaping must be in-ground, except when in raised planters. Plant materials will be installed to current nursery industry standards.
2. Plant materials must be properly supported to ensure survival. Support devices such as guy wires or stakes must not interfere with vehicular or pedestrian movement. Where support is necessary, stakes, guy wires or other measures must be removed as soon as the plant can support itself.
3. Existing trees and plant materials to be retained must be protected during construction, such as by use of chain-link or other sturdy fence placed at the dripline of trees to be retained. Grading, topsoil storage, construction material storage, vehicles and equipment must not be allowed within the dripline of trees to be retained.
4. Installation of landscaping materials must take into consideration access to utility vaults, pedestals, and other public and private utility facilities.
5. Tree/Shrub Height and Location. The landscape plan should plan for the mature size of trees and major shrubs to avoid interference with windows, decks or lighting.
6. Trees must be protected by fencing until they are mature enough to withstand typical wildlife activity. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Below are the planting and design requirements for specific landscaping types. These landscaping types apply when required by different sections of code within this chapter and elsewhere in this division.
A. Type A Landscaping.
1. Purpose. Type A landscaping functions as a full screen and visual barrier. This landscaping is typically found between residential and nonresidential areas for screening unwanted views.
2. Screening Requirement. The selected plant materials and configuration must be able to screen 70 percent of the unwanted views within five years of planting and screen 100 percent of the unwanted views within six years of planting. This requirement must account for the size and characteristics of materials planted, their typical growth rate, and size at maturity.
3. Planting Requirements. Type A landscaping must minimally consist of the following:
a. Trees which are predominately evergreen (more than 50 percent).
b. Tree Size. A variety of tree sizes may be used, provided at least 70 percent are medium or large (see AMC 19.65.050(B)(1)). Trees must be planted at the following spacing standards (“on center” refers to the distance from other trees of any size):
i. Large trees must be spaced between 20 and 25 feet on center.
ii. Medium trees must be spaced between 15 and 20 feet on center.
iii. Small trees must be spaced between 10 and 15 feet on center.
c. Shrubs. Predominately evergreen provided at the rate of one shrub per 20 square feet of landscape strip.
d. Groundcover. Planted at a density to cover the buffer within three years.
e. Species Diversity. Trees and shrubs must comply with AMC 19.65.050(E).
DEPARTURES that vary from the planting requirements of this subsection (A)(3) will be considered, provided the proposal meets the screening requirement of subsection (A)(2) of this section.
Figure 19.65.060(A)
Type A landscaping standards.
![]() |
B. Type B Landscaping.
1. Purpose. Type B landscaping is a “filtered screen” that functions as a visual separator. This landscaping is typically found between differing types of residential development and used for screening unwanted views from the pedestrian environment.
2. Screening Requirement. The selected plant materials and configuration must meet the purpose of the standards within five years of planting. This requirement must account for the size and characteristics of materials planted, their typical growth rate, and size at maturity.
3. Planting Requirements. Type B landscaping must minimally consist of:
a. Trees which are at least 50 percent deciduous and at least 30 percent evergreen.
b. Tree Size. A variety of tree sizes may be used, provided at least 70 percent are medium or large (see AMC 19.65.050(B)(1)). Trees must be planted at the following spacing standards (“on center” refers to the distance from other trees of any size):
i. Large trees must be spaced between 20 and 25 feet on center.
ii. Medium trees must be spaced between 15 and 20 feet on center.
iii. Small trees must be spaced between 10 and 15 feet on center.
c. Shrubs. Provided at the rate of one shrub per 20 square feet of landscape strip and spaced no more than eight feet on center.
d. Groundcover. Planted at a density to cover the buffer within three years.
e. Species diversity: Trees and shrubs must comply with AMC 19.65.050(E).
DEPARTURES that vary from the planting requirements of this subsection (B)(3) will be considered, provided the proposal meets the screening requirement of subsection (B)(2) of this section.
Figure 19.65.060(B)
Type B landscaping standards.
![]() |
C. Type C Landscaping.
1. Purpose. Type C landscaping is a “see-through screen” that functions as a partial visual separator to soften the appearance of parking areas and building elevations. This landscaping is typically found along lot frontages or between multifamily developments.
2. Screening Requirement. The selected plant materials and configuration must meet the purpose of the standards within five years of planting. This requirement must account for the size and characteristics of materials planted, their typical growth rate, and size at maturity.
3. Planting Requirements. Type C landscaping must minimally consist of:
a. Trees which are at least 70 percent deciduous.
b. Tree Size. A variety of tree sizes may be used, provided at least 70 percent are medium or large (see AMC 19.65.050(B)(1)). Trees must be planted at the following spacing standards (“on center” refers to the distance from other trees of any size):
i. Large trees must be spaced between 20 and 25 feet on center.
ii. Medium trees must be spaced between 15 and 20 feet on center.
iii. Small trees must be spaced between 10 and 15 feet on center.
c. Shrubs. Provided at the rate of one shrub per 20 square feet of landscape strip and spaced no more than eight feet on center.
d. Groundcover. Planted at a density to cover the buffer within three years.
e. Species Diversity. Trees and shrubs must comply with AMC 19.65.050(E).
f. Maintain trees and shrubs to maximize pedestrian visibility (generally between three and eight feet above grade).
DEPARTURES that vary from the planting requirements of this subsection (C)(3) will be considered, provided the proposal meets the screening requirement of subsection (C)(2) of this section.
Figure 19.65.060(C)
Type C landscaping standards.
![]() |
D. Type D Landscaping.
1. Type D landscaping refers to all other landscaped areas that do not qualify as Type A, B, or C landscaping, a hedge, or a rain garden. While native and low-maintenance trees and shrubs are encouraged in these areas, lawn areas may be used for recreational or design purposes. These areas may also include flower beds and perennial beds.
2. Type D landscaping may include any combination of plant materials, provided they comply with the plant materials standards in AMC 19.65.050.
E. Type E Landscaping—Low Hedge. A low hedge is intended to function as an attractive visual divider of space rather than a visual buffer between uses and properties. To qualify as a hedge landscaping type, the planting must be at least 30 inches wide and 30 inches tall. The hedge includes plant materials that typically grow no taller than five feet at maturity or are maintained between 30 inches and 48 inches tall.
Figure 19.65.060(E)
Low hedge examples.
![]() |
F. Type F Landscaping—Rain Garden.
1. A rain garden is a nonengineered planted depression that collects, absorbs, and filters rain water runoff from impervious areas. They are sized to accommodate temporary ponding and are not meant to be permanent ponds. They can also function as an attractive visual divider of space. To qualify as a rain garden, the following elements must be included:
a. Garden is located and designed to capture impervious area runoff.
b. Six- to 12-inch ponding depth.
c. Two- to three-inch mulch layer.
d. Gradual side slopes (typically 2:1 maximum).
e. Overflow design elements with measures to prevent erosion.
f. Generous plantings of a variety of small trees, shrubs, groundcovers, and grasses. Select plants suitable for the planting zones within the garden and around the perimeter.
Refer to the current Rain Garden Handbook for Western Washington for further guidance on rain garden location, design, planting, construction, and maintenance. Compliance with the Stormwater Management Manual may alter these requirements.
2. The applicability of rain gardens in site design will be determined by project size and flow control exemptions based upon minimum requirement No. 5 of the Western Washington Phase II municipal stormwater permit.
Figure 19.65.060(F)
Rain garden example.
![]() |
(Ord. 4022 § 1 (Att. A), 2022; Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Required Buffer Standards. Screening between certain uses may be called for in Table 19.65.070(A) below or elsewhere in this title. Interpretation of Table 19.65.070(A):
1. Where mature trees and vegetation exist within the required buffer areas, the preservation of said mature trees and vegetation may be preferable to new plant materials. The Director may require any of the following to better ensure the survival of existing mature trees and vegetation:
a. Augment existing plantings with new plant materials to meet the purpose of the standards,
b. Require wider buffers to better ensure the survival of existing mature trees and vegetation. This must be accompanied by use of a buffer averaging approach in which the buffer may be reduced in other locations to achieve, on average, the minimum buffer width required in Table 19.65.070(A) or elsewhere in this title.
c. Other supplemental planting conditions.
2. The letters A, B, C, D, E, and F refer to the landscape types described in AMC 19.65.060. Where more than one buffer type is referenced in a cell, one of the subject buffer types is required. The term “all” means that any of the landscaping types may be used.
3. The term “fence” refers to the requirement of a six-foot-high sight-screening fence. Such fences must comply with the provisions of AMC Chapter 19.66, Fences, Walls, and Hedges.
4. Where the cells are empty, there are no landscaping buffer requirements for the particular situation.
5. The numbers refer to the minimum required width of the required landscaping buffer.
6. Where superscript numbers are included in a cell, see the corresponding note matching the number below the table.
7. The screening elements must extend along the entire property line between the uses/properties except where precluded by structures, driveways, or similar obstructions.
8. Where the developing use is across the street from an existing abutting use or zone, only the buffer type listed for the abutting street is required.
9. DEPARTURES. Alternative buffer treatments may be approved per AMC 19.20.220 for any of the buffer types required below, provided they meet the purpose of this chapter.
Table 19.65.070(A)
Required buffer types.
Developing use | Existing abutting uses and zones | |||||
Street | R1, R2, R2A zones1 | R3, R3A, R4, R4A and OT zones or Multifamily use | C, CBD, MMU and CM zones1 | HM, MS, CM2, I, LM and LM1 zones | P, parks and trails | |
Multifamily | Note2 | Fence plus BC—5' | Fence plus ABC—10' | |||
Low-intensity nonresidential use6 | Note2 | Fence plus ABC—5' | Fence or AB—5' | Note5 | ||
Moderate-intensity nonresidential use7 | Note2 | Fence plus ABC—10' | Fence plus ABC—5' | Note5 | ||
High-intensity nonresidential use8 | Note2 | Fence plus ABC—15' | Fence plus ABC—10' | Note5 | ||
Outdoor storage | Note2 plus A—10' | Fence plus ABC—10' | Fence plus ABC—10' | Fence or A—5' or B—10' | Fence plus ABC—5' or A—10' | |
Note2 | Fence plus ABC—20' | Fence plus ABC—20' | Fence plus ABC—5' or A—10' | Fence plus ABC—5' or A—10' | Fence plus ABC—10' or AB—20' | |
Notes:
1Where the abutting use meets the definition of multifamily, the developing use is subject to the landscape buffer type under the multifamily use column.
2For landscaping between developing uses and streets, see the applicable block frontage map for the property in AMC 19.61.040 and the corresponding block frontage standards in AMC Chapter 19.61, Block Frontage Standards. Multifamily uses in residential zones are subject to the landscape block frontage standards in AMC 19.61.070.
3A paved or gravel pathway separating the properties/uses. Landscaping planters at least three feet wide separating the pathway from buildings (or other effective visual transitions between the pathway and building as determined by the Director) are required.
4For developing multifamily uses adjacent to parks and trails, the Director may adjust requirements to emphasize buffer types that enhance visibility between the developing use or focus more on visual screening, depending on the context of the park or trail and type of developing use.
5See AMC 19.61.120 for trail block frontage standards.
6“Low-intensity nonresidential use” is a small-scale commercial use or development (as defined in AMC Chapters 19.44 through 19.46 ). This includes uses and/or developments with less than 25,000 square feet of gross floor area and containing no outdoor storage along a site edge requiring a landscape buffer in this section.
7“Moderate-intensity nonresidential use” includes uses and/or developments that are moderate in scale and intensity. This includes uses and/or developments that do not qualify as a low-intensity nonresidential use (either they are too large or have some outdoor storage areas along the site edge requiring a landscape buffer in this section) or a high-intensity nonresidential use (not large enough or do not meet the use qualifications).
8“High-intensity nonresidential use” includes uses and/or developments with over 120,000 square feet of gross floor area or are classified as an industrial use per AMC Chapter 19.45, Industrial Uses.
B. Supplemental Buffer Standards.
1. For screening requirements for service areas and mechanical equipment for nonresidential and multifamily development, see AMC 19.62.070.
2. Required buffer vegetation must be planted within the property boundaries. However, additional plantings above the minimum requirement may extend into the right-of-way per subsection F of this section.
3. The height of any screen material required by this chapter in the vicinity of a point of ingress and egress may not exceed two and one-half feet in height within the clear-vision triangle (AMC 19.69.070).
C. Trees and Block Frontage Landscaping.
1. Nonresidential and multifamily developments must include landscaping between the sidewalk and building or parking areas in conformance with this chapter. Exceptions are allowed for pedestrian and vehicular access, pedestrian-oriented space, utility elements, and permitted signage.
2. Where buildings are set back at least 15 feet from a street property line, trees must be planted at an average of 30 feet apart in such planting areas, with groundcover or shrubs used liberally.
DEPARTURES may be considered, provided alternative treatments meet the purposes of this chapter.
3. Trees utilized in these planting areas must minimize conflict with underground and overhead utilities. Trees to be utilized must be from the approved list of recommended plant materials or an approved equivalent.
D. Parking Lot Landscaping.
1. Purpose. The purpose of parking lot landscape development is to soften the visual effect created by large expanses of barren asphalt.
2. Required Area. Planting areas in new parking areas with 20 or more spaces or in upgraded or improved parking areas with 20 or more spaces must constitute at least five percent of the parking area.
3. Minimum Width and Length. Planting areas must have a minimum average width of 10 feet (measured inside the curb) and must be the same length as the parking stall or column.
4. Planting Type. Type C landscaping must be used in required planting areas. Rain gardens, or other vegetated LID BMPs, may be integrated into planting strips, provided they integrate the same number of trees as for Type C landscaping.
5. Distribution. Landscaped areas must be distributed throughout the parking lot.
6. Parking Lot Perimeters.
a. For parking lots adjacent to public streets, use Type C landscaping at a width equal to or greater than the minimum building setback specified for the applicable block frontage type specified in AMC Chapter 19.61, Block Frontage Standards.
DEPARTURES to this standard will be considered via AMC 19.20.220, provided they meet the purpose of the standards noted above.
b. For parking lots along internal lot lines, use Type A, B, or C landscaping at least 10 feet deep, except where a greater buffer width is required per the standards in subsections A and B of this section. Where recorded cooperative parking agreements are in place between adjacent properties, sites must be exempted from the subject parking lot landscaping buffer.
DEPARTURES to this standard will be considered via AMC 19.20.220, provided they meet the purpose of the standards noted above. Examples of acceptable departures may include decorative low walls with landscaping, decorative elevated planters, landscaping with a trellis, a shared-access drive, or a shared pathway.
Figure 19.65.070(D)
Examples of alternative parking lot landscaping buffers.
![]() |
![]() |
E. Existing Site Vegetation.
1. General. Applicants are encouraged to retain existing native vegetation, including indigenous shrubs and herbaceous plants, and significant trees on the subject property. “Significant tree” means deciduous or evergreen trees at least six inches in diameter at a point five feet above the ground.
2. Bonus for Retention. For each significant tree as defined in subsection (E)(1) of this section, the applicant may measure the canopy of the tree and receive a bonus of 200 percent of the square footage of the canopy to count as landscaped area for the purpose of complying with the standards for the applicable zone in AMC Chapter 19.42, Form and Intensity Standards; provided, that the soil within the dripline of the tree is undisturbed, root systems are protected from damage, and approved methods are utilized to ensure proper irrigation.
3. Required Review. The city will review the proposed retention of significant existing vegetation as part of the application for development. Any bonus for retention must be approved only after on-site inspection.
4. If any tree used for bonus credit is removed or lost, it must be replaced promptly with the same species, or an approved substitute under AMC 19.65.080(C), at a ratio of three replacement trees at least 12 feet in height for each bonus tree lost.
F. Use of Right-of-Way. In addition to the required planting areas above, landscaping of excess (unused) street and alley right-of-way and/or LID stormwater BMPs is encouraged.
1. Excess right-of-way is defined as the area of an undeveloped alley or street right-of-way, or the area between the property line and the street pavement, whether or not it contains a sidewalk.
2. All landscaping materials proposed to be installed in the right-of-way must be reviewed to ensure that traffic safety considerations are met and future sidewalks can be added if they do not currently exist.
3. Irrigation or sprinkling systems are subject to the standards in AMC 19.65.090.
4. Maintenance of landscaping in the right-of-way must be the responsibility of the adjacent property owner; provided, however, that nothing in this section must create or imply any interest of the property owner in the excess right-of-way; and provided further, that in the event the city must undertake to utilize the excess right-of-way, any landscaping must be removed by the property owner at their sole expense or, if not so removed, may be destroyed by the city.
G. Special Fire Department Standards.
1. Landscaping in the vicinity of any fire hydrant, Fire Department sprinkler connection or standpipe connection should not prevent such equipment from being immediately discernible nor in any other manner deter or hinder the Fire Department from gaining immediate access to the equipment. Subsections (G)(2) and (3) of this section are guidelines for the landscaping around the equipment, with final approval from the City Fire Marshal.
2. Fire Hydrants.
a. Fire hydrants must be free from obstruction on all sides by a minimum clearance of three feet.
b. Fire hydrants along streets, driveways, parking lots, fire access routes (fire lanes), or at intersections must be visible for at least 100 feet in all directions along such streets, driveways, access routes or intersections. No plants or shrubs with a height of over 18 inches and no tree with branches or foliage below five feet must be allowed in this sight visibility area.
3. Sprinkler and Standpipe Connections.
a. Fire Department connections for sprinklers and standpipes must be free from obstructions on all sides by a minimum clearance of three feet.
b. When a Fire Department connection is over 25 feet from a street, driveway, parking lot or fire access route, there must be maintained a clear path with minimum width of three feet between the Fire Department connection and the street, driveway, parking lot or fire access route.
H. Stormwater detention ponds must have at least 10-foot setbacks from adjacent property lines and must be landscaped in compliance with this chapter. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. The owners of the property and their agents, heirs, or assigns must be responsible for maintaining all required landscaping and screening areas in a healthy, growing condition.
B. All landscaping and screening areas must be maintained reasonably free of weeds and trash, must be treated for pests/diseases in accordance with the approved landscape plan, and must be maintained so as to prevent mulch, straw, dirt, or other materials from washing onto streets, sidewalks, and adjoining properties.
C. Any dead, unhealthy, or missing vegetation, or vegetation disfigured by severe or excessive pruning, unusual weather occurrence or natural catastrophe, or other natural occurrence such as damage by wild or domestic animals must be replaced with equivalent vegetation that conforms to the plant materials and installation standards in AMC 19.65.050, other applicable standards of this title, and the approved site and/or subdivision plan.
D. Any engineered soil amendments must be maintained and replaced as needed to continue the original function of stormwater best management practices. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
The purpose of this standard is to ensure that plants will survive the critical establishment period when they are most vulnerable due to lack of watering.
All required landscaped areas in the city must comply with at least one of the following:
A. A permanent built-in irrigation system with an automatic controller will serve the proposed landscape area, and the system will be installed and operational before the city grants an occupancy permit or final inspection for the development.
B. A temporary irrigation system will serve the proposed landscape area, provided the applicant can successfully demonstrate that the proposed temporary irrigation system will provide sufficient water to ensure that the plant materials to be planted will survive installation and, once established, will survive without watering other than natural rainfall.
C. A permanent or temporary irrigation system will not serve the proposed landscape area, provided:
1. The Director finds the landscape area otherwise fulfills the requirements of this section; and
2. The applicant submits all of the following with the site plan application:
a. A statement from a Washington State licensed landscape architect or Washington certified professional horticulturalist (CPH) certifying that the materials to be planted will survive without watering other than natural rainfall.
b. A plan for monitoring the survival of required vegetation on the approved site plan for at least one year and for detection and replacement of required vegetation that does not survive with like-kind material or other material approved by the reviewing authority.
c. A statement from the applicant agreeing to install an irrigation system if the reviewing authority finds one is needed to ensure survival of required vegetation, based on the results of the monitoring plan. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
In the event that landscaping improvements cannot be installed prior to a formal certificate of occupancy, a cash deposit, letter of credit or other assurance acceptable to the city equal to 150 percent of the estimated construction costs must be required. Such deposit must be accompanied by a letter which stipulates completion of all landscape development no later than the next autumn planting season following issuance of the certificate of occupancy or date of final approval, whichever is later. If these conditions are not met, the city may use the deposit to install the landscaping. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
The purpose of this chapter is to:
A. Protect life and secure property while protecting the public from hazardous fences and walls.
B. Increase visibility in appropriate circumstances by using the principles of Crime Prevention Through Environmental Design (CPTED) to increase public safety and to deter crime.
C. Promote and enhance Anacortes neighborhoods as walkable places and reduce impacts on the pedestrian experience that may result from taller fences and walls. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Height and Design Standards by Location.
1. Table 19.66.030 provides height and transparency standards for fences, walls, and hedges for residential uses and zones. Figure 19.66.030(A) provides clarification on the location of fences, walls, and hedges associated with the standards in Table 19.66.030.
Figure 19.66.030(A)
Clarification on the location of fences, walls, and hedges associated with the standards in Table 19.66.030.
![]() |
Table 19.66.030
Height standards for fences, walls, and hedges in residential zones by location.
Location | Maximum height | Maximum height for homes with accessory day care uses | |
|---|---|---|---|
Front | Within the street setback | 42'' | 54'', and any portion above 42'' must be at least 50 percent transparent |
Elsewhere between the facade and street property line | 7' See subsection (A)(2) of this section for exceptions for lots on the north side of Oakes Avenue between D Avenue and Ferry Terminal Road. | 7' | |
Side | Corner lot—side fence, within 5' of any street property line | 42'' | 54'', and any portion above 42'' must be at least 50 percent transparent |
Corner lot—side fence, more than 5' from any street property line | 7' | 7' | |
Along/near any internal side property line | 7' | 7' | |
Rear | Along/near rear property line with or without an abutting alley | 7' | 7' |
Through lots—within 5' of a street property line | 42'' | 54'' within 5' of the property line, and any portion above 42'' must be at least 50 percent transparent | |
Through lots—5' or more from street property line | 7' See subsection (A)(2) of this section for exceptions for lots on the north side of Oakes Avenue between D Avenue and Ferry Terminal Road. | 7' | |
2. The following standards apply to all lots created after adoption of this section on the north side of Oakes Avenue between D Avenue and Ferry Terminal Road. Fences, walls, and hedges are limited in height to 42 inches for the entire street setback or rear setback for through lots where such lots abut Oakes Avenue. Exceptions may be made to the height and design of landscaping hedges through the subdivision approval process, provided the design allows for visual access to the water from Oakes Avenue. Notes must be placed on the final plat indicating the applicable fence standard and any applicable exceptions.
Figures 19.66.030(B) through (D) below provide acceptable and unacceptable examples of fences, walls, and hedges.
Figure 19.66.030(B)
Acceptable fences, walls, and hedges for the street setback for residential zones.
![]() The left image uses a picket fence. The right image uses a low wrought iron fence. |
![]() The left image uses a low masonry retaining wall and the right image uses a low hedge. |
Figure 19.66.030(C)
Unacceptable fences, walls, and hedges for the street setback for residential zones.
Figure 19.66.030(D)
Acceptable and unacceptable side fences on corner lots in residential zones or along through lots where the rear setback abuts a street.
![]() The left example is a low picket fence. Taller fences like that in the middle image are acceptable along the side and rear setback, but are not allowed within five feet of a property line. The right image shows an acceptable example where the fence is set back from the sidewalk to allow space for landscaping. |
B. Fences for Accessory Recreational Uses and Nonresidential Uses in a Residential Zone. Fences or walls used in conjunction with an accessory to a residential use must meet the following requirements:
1. Fences that are used to enclose recreational facilities accessory to multifamily uses may be up to 12 feet in height, provided they are not built within the minimum required setbacks.
2. The Director may allow taller fences (than referenced in Table 19.66.030) for permitted nonresidential uses in residential zones, provided they are necessary for security purposes and the design of the fences meets the purposes of the standards. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Fences within the Street Setback.
1. Fences within the street setback area are subject to applicable block frontage standards in AMC Chapter 19.61, Block Frontage Standards.
2. Supplemental Street Setback Standards. Fences less than 10 feet from a property line are limited to 42 inches in height. Exceptions:
a. Day care uses are allowed fences up to 54 inches tall in this area, provided the portion of the fence above 42 inches is at least 30 percent transparent.
b. Within the industrial zones, this provision only applies to sites across the street from the CBD zone or a residential zone.
B. Fences may be required along the side and/or rear property lines as a required buffer feature, depending on the proposed use and existing abutting uses and zone per Table 19.65.070(A).
C. The maximum height for fences and walls is seven feet. The Director may allow taller fences, provided they are necessary for functional and security purposes and the design of the fences meets the purposes of the standards. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Fence, wall, hedge, and rockery height must be measured from the finished grade to the top of the fence as shown in Figure 19.66.050. Where fence, walls or hedges feature varying heights of finished grade on opposite sides of the fence, wall or hedge, then the height must be measured from the side with the lower grade. Fence posts may exceed the height of the top rail by up to 12 inches. For sloped sites, the average height between posts may be used, provided no portion of the fence exceeds the height limit by one foot.
Figure 19.66.050
Height measurements of fences and walls on sloped sites.
![]() | For sloped sites, the average height between posts may be used, provided no portion of the fence exceeds the height limit by 12 inches. |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. No fence, wall, or other such structure, or hedge over 36 inches in height, may be placed within three feet of any dwelling unit where such fence, wall, or hedge substantially interferes with access to such dwelling unit for fire and public safety purposes or substantially impairs the ability of an occupant of a dwelling unit to use windows and doors as emergency exits.
B. Where a fence, wall, or hedge forms a complete enclosure of an area adjacent to a dwelling or dwelling unit, a gate must be provided for emergency egress. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Chain-link fences are prohibited in the following areas:
1. All nonindustrial zones within 10 feet of a street right-of-way.
2. Industrial zones when across the street from the CBD zone or residential zones and within 10 feet of a street right-of-way.
3. Between a street right-of-way and the front of any residential building.
DEPARTURES to subsections (A)(1) and (2) of this section per AMC 19.20.220 will be allowed where the design of the fence and landscape buffer treatment meets the purposes of the standards.
B. Electric fences are prohibited in all zones except R1 zones and may be allowed only by the Director for the purpose of containing animals in a permitted area. No electric fence may be allowed or maintained which does not conform to state electrical codes.
C. Barbed wire and razor wire fences are prohibited in all zones.
Exceptions may be granted in the following conditions:
1. When barbed wire fences are preexisting and are used to contain animals kept on a property continuously since 1999. In such cases, at such time as animals are not kept in the fenced area for 90 days or more, the right to maintain these existing fences must be considered extinguished, and these fences must be removed within 30 days.
2. For sensitive public facilities operated by public agencies. The facility operator must demonstrate security needs cannot be reasonably met with other fence types. The Director must consider the facility’s location, hours of operation, volume of public visitors, and neighboring uses. Higher visitor volumes and visibility to the general public warrant greater application of the prohibition. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Building Permit. A building permit is required for retaining walls or rockeries not exempted from permit by Section 105.2 of the International Building Code or the International Residential Code, AMC Chapter 19.14, International Codes.
B. Drainage Control. Drainage control must be provided for the area behind retaining walls and rockeries.
C. Retaining Wall and Rockery Terracing Standards.
1. This subsection (C) applies to any combination of constructed retaining walls or constructed rockeries located within a required setback and used to protect a cut or cuts or used to raise grade and protect a fill slope.
2. If the total height of the retaining wall or rockery exceeds five feet, the retaining wall or rockery must be terraced as shown in Figure 19.66.080(C).
DEPARTURES for alternative terracing dimensions will be considered where natural topographic or geologic features make compliance with this section infeasible.
3. The Director may require the retaining walls or rockeries to be designed by a structural engineer if drainage issues, unstable soils, or other structural concerns are present.
Figure 19.66.080(C)
Terracing standards for retaining walls and rockeries.
![]() Terraced retaining wall example |
D. Standards for Fences on and near Retaining Walls and Rockeries.
1. Retaining Walls or Rockeries Less Than Five Feet in Total Height.
a. Fences may be located on top of retaining walls or rockeries, provided the maximum fence height complies with Table 19.66.030.
2. Retaining Walls or Rockeries Five Feet in Total Height or Greater.
a. In required rear and side setbacks only, a fence may be placed on top of retaining walls and rockeries, provided the total combined height of the retaining wall or rockery and the fence is less than 12 feet.
b. In all required setbacks, the total combined height of the retaining wall or rockery and the fence may be 12 feet or greater, provided the fence is set back at least five feet from the edge of the retaining wall or rockery.
Figure 19.66.080(D)
Standards for fences on and near retaining walls.
![]() |
E. Standards for Large-Scale Manufactured Blocks Used for Retaining Walls (e.g., Ecology Blocks or Jersey Barriers).
1. Such blocks are prohibited for construction of retaining walls in all residential zones, the CBD zone, and the C zone.
2. In all other zones, such blocks may be used for retaining walls, provided retaining walls greater than four feet in height incorporate decorative materials, stamped patterns, or other treatments which create visual interest approved by the Director. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
The purpose of this chapter is to:
A. Regulate the number, size, placement and physical characteristics of signs and sign structures.
B. Promote and protect the public health, welfare, and safety by regulating existing and proposed outdoor signs of all types.
C. Promote economic development of the city’s business districts and corridors.
D. Ensure that signs are compatible with the desired character of Anacortes and its various districts and corridors.
E. Enhance and protect property values, the local economy, and the quality of life by preserving and enhancing the appearance of the streetscape.
F. Recognize free speech rights by regulating signs in a content-neutral manner.
G. Promote the free flow of vehicular traffic and protect pedestrians and motorists from injury and property damage caused by, or which may be fully or partially attributable to, cluttered, distracting, and/or illegal signage.
H. Prevent property damage, personal injury, and litter from signs which are improperly constructed, poorly maintained, or of flimsy materials.
I. Provide consistent sign design standards. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Applicability. This chapter applies to all signs erected or altered after the effective date of the ordinance codified in this chapter, except for those signs provided in subsection C of this section.
B. Interpretation.
1. This chapter is not intended to, and does not, restrict speech on the basis of its content, viewpoint, or message.
2. Any classification of signs in this chapter that permits speech by reason of the type of sign, identity of the sign owner, or otherwise must also be interpreted to allow noncommercial speech on the sign.
3. No part of this chapter may be construed to favor commercial speech over noncommercial speech.
4. To the extent any provision of this chapter is ambiguous, the term must be interpreted not to regulate on the basis of the content of the message.
C. Exemptions. The following signs are exempted from the regulations of this chapter:
1. Traffic signs, signals, wayfinding signs, and other traffic control devices erected by the city or other public authority.
2. Public notices pertaining to public health or safety issues, or for notification of legal or legislative action erected by the city or other public authority.
3. Permanent commemorative or memorial plaques and building nameplates less than six square feet in size, cornerstones, and other building identification markings carved into the building materials and which are integral parts of the structure. Signs that advertise the name of the building and not associated with the name of any individual business are addressed in AMC 19.67.090(A)(5).
Figure 19.67.020(C)(3)
Building nameplate example.
![]() |
4. Signs within buildings, provided they are not legible from a distance of more than three feet beyond the building on which the sign is located.
5. Incidental signs intended for public information or convenience and which consist of no more than two square feet per sign face. These may include restroom signs, hours of operation signs, address numbers, help wanted signs, credit card signs, and similar.
6. The American flag, state of Washington flag, and other political or special purpose flags that are not intended to contribute to a commercial advertising display.
7. Wall graphics of an artistic nature and that do not conform to the definition of “sign.”
8. Noncommercial speech signs meeting the provisions in AMC 19.67.100.
9. Signs not readable from public or private right-of-way or waterway.
10. Signs intended for general public information, such as a bulletin board/kiosk, that accommodate changeable copy such as private or public notices, special event information, and other short-term messages at a scale suitable for pedestrians and not intended to be read by passing motorists, and not for commercial advertising purposes.
11. Holiday and community special event decorations that do not display a commercial message.
12. Signs on athletic fields and scoreboards intended for on-premises viewing.
13. Signs located in public parks, public trails and designated public open space, including any such parks, trails and open space open to the public, whether owned and maintained by the city or by another entity.
14. Signs located on any other city-owned property not specifically addressed in this chapter.
15. Point-of-purchase advertising displays such as product dispensers.
16. Any sign on a vehicle, unless such vehicle is regularly parked in any prominently visible location from the public right-of-way or other public space for the primary purpose of attracting public attention to the sign, which is prohibited pursuant to AMC 19.67.040(A)(8). (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
“A-board” means a temporary, portable, double-sided sign of basic self-supporting design. A-board signs may also be referred to as “A-frame” or “sandwich board” signs.
“Advertise” means to describe or draw attention to a product, service, or event in a public medium in order to promote sales or attendance.
“Building-mounted sign” means a sign affixed to a building, painted directly on a wall, or erected against the wall of a building.
“Conforming sign” means a sign which meets the specifications of this chapter.
“Copy” means the graphic content or message of a sign.
“Feather sign” means a temporary and portable sign made of lightweight materials that is prone to move in the wind, and that contains a harpoon-style pole or staff that is driven into the ground or supported by means of an individual stand. This definition includes such signs of any shape including flutter, bow, teardrop, rectangular, shark, and U-shaped.
“Freestanding sign” means a permanent sign anchored directly to the ground or supported by one or more posts, columns, or other vertical structures or supports, and not attached to or dependent for support from any building.
“Incidental sign” means a sign depicting products, services, or activities directly related to the business within. These are permitted, provided the incidental sign is not on an A-board or a sign on the marquee or a sign under the marquee.
“Internal wayfinding sign” means a type of freestanding sign used to aid customers in circulation within parking lots of commercial uses. These signs could come in the form of monument, pylon, post and arm, or wall sign types.
“Marquee/awning sign” means a type of building-mounted sign that is either attached to, affixed to, or painted on a marquee, awning, or canopy.
“Monument sign” means a type of freestanding sign which is attached to the ground by means of a wide base of solid appearance.
“Permanent sign” means a stationary sign permanently attached to the ground or to a structure.
“Pole sign” means a type of freestanding sign supported by one vertical pylon, and subject to the same regulations as a freestanding sign.
“Portable sign” means a nonpermanent, easily movable sign.
“Post and arm sign” means a type of freestanding sign supported by a post and arm.
“Projecting sign” means a type of building-mounted sign extending outward from the face of the building.
“Pylon sign” means a type of freestanding sign mounted on two posts.
“Real estate signs” means signs used for the purpose of marketing real property as opposed to identifying place of business.
“Sign” means any communication device, structure, or fixture which is intended to identify a building, use, business, or event; or to promote the sale of products, goods or services using graphics, letters, figures, symbols, trademarks or written copy. Painted wall designs or patterns which do not represent a product, service or registered trademark, and which do not identify the user, are not considered signs.
“Sign copy” means any graphic, word, numeral, symbol, insignia, text, sample, model, device or combination thereof which is primarily intended to advertise, identify, or notify.
“Standing sign” means a double-sided, portable sign mounted on a pedestal.
“Temporary signs” means conforming signs permitted for a specified period of time.
“Under-canopy sign” means a type of building-mounted sign attached to the underside of an awning, canopy, balcony or arcade.
“Wall sign” means a type of building-mounted sign painted directly on the wall, attached to, or erected against the wall of a building or structure with the exposed face of the sign parallel to the plane of such wall.
“Window sign” means a sign that can be observed by the general public as displayed in or applied to the transparent or translucent window and door areas of a building. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Sign Location Restrictions. Except where specifically authorized by this chapter, signs are prohibited in the locations described below. Prohibited signs are subject to removal (except nonconforming signs as defined by this chapter) by the city at the owner’s expense.
1. Any temporary or permanent freestanding sign located within or projecting over a city right-of-way or within five feet of a city right-of-way, unless otherwise noted in this chapter.
2. Any sign attached to any public utility pole, structure or street light, tree, fence, fire hydrant, bridge, curb, sidewalk, park bench, statue, memorial, or other location on public property, except those signs approved as part of a special event permit on city property or banner signs permitted by the city on light poles in certain zones within the city. Nothing in this section must be construed to prohibit a person from holding a sign while located on public property so long as the person holding the sign is located on public property determined to be a traditional public forum and does not block ingress to and egress from buildings or create a safety hazard by impeding travel on sidewalks, bike and vehicle lanes, and trails.
3. Any sign which, by reason of its location, will obstruct the view of any authorized traffic sign, signal, or other traffic control device or which by reason of shape, color, or position interferes with or could be confused with any authorized traffic signal or device.
4. Any sign which is placed so as to prevent or inhibit free ingress to or egress from any door, window, or any exit way required by the building and/or fire code currently in effect.
5. Any commercial, advertising, or business sign that is not located on the premises of the business to which it refers.
7. No portable or temporary sign may be placed on the front or face of a building or on any premises except as authorized in AMC 19.67.110, Temporary sign standards.
8. Placement on private property for more than 10 days in any 90-day period of any truck, boat, trailer or other vehicle or vehicle part which has affixed thereto any commercial advertising message not pertaining to the legally permitted use carried on within such property is prohibited.
B. Sign Display Restrictions.
1. Purpose. The purpose of this subsection is to regulate the manner in which signs convey their messages by specifying prohibited display features that create distractions to the traveling public and create visual clutter that mars the natural and architectural aesthetics of the city.
2. Applicability. The display features described below are prohibited. Prohibited signs are subject to removal (except legal nonconforming signs as defined by this chapter) by the city at the owner’s expense.
a. Any sign or lighting device, whether on the exterior of a building or on the inside of a window which is visible beyond the boundaries of the lot or parcel, or from any public right-of-way, with intermittent, flashing, rotating, blinking or strobe light illumination.
b. Any sign with an exposed light source, except for neon incorporated into the design of the sign.
c. Any sign which emits sound, odor, smoke, laser or hologram lights, or other visible matter, including any sign that uses motion picture projection.
d. Any sign animated by any means, including fixed aerial displays, balloons, pennants, spinners, strings of flags, streamers, tubes, or other devices affected by the movement of the air or other atmospheric or mechanical means, except for:
i. Signs exempted from this chapter as established in AMC 19.67.020.
ii. Temporary signs as provided for in AMC 19.67.110.
e. Any sign in which the sign body or any portion of the sign rotates, moves up and down, or any other type of action involving a change in position of the sign body or any portion of the sign, whether by mechanical or any other means, except for signs exempted from this chapter as established in AMC 19.67.020.
f. Digital and other changeable copy signs, except as provided for in Table 19.67.040(C)(2) and AMC 19.67.080(D) for certain freestanding signs.
g. Mannequins holding a sign or displaying advertising, whether stationary or animated, except within a building as part of a window or interior display.
C. Sign Illumination.
1. General Illumination Standards.
a. Indirect sign illumination must be no further away from the sign than the height of the sign.
b. Externally illuminated signs must be arranged so that no direct rays of light are projected from such artificial source into residences, businesses or any street right-of-way.
c. External sign light fixtures must complement the design of the sign and building facades or structures associated with the sign.
d. External sign lighting must be “full cutoff” and must not result in direct illumination of the sky and adjacent properties and structures, and must be designed to minimize reflected glare to adjacent properties and structures.
2. Permitted Sign Illumination Types. Table 19.67.040(C)(2) below specifies permitted sign illumination types by zone.
Table 19.67.040(C)(2)
Permitted sign illumination types.
Illumination Type | Permitted Zones | Other Requirements | |
Channel letter. Light is emitted through the front or face of the letters. | ![]() | All mixed-use and industrial zones, except CBD | May be incorporated into a permitted wall, pole, or monument sign |
Reverse channel letter. Letter faces are opaque and light source provides halo effect through backlighting. | ![]() | All mixed-use and industrial zones and the MED-O zone | May be incorporated into a permitted wall, pole, or monument sign |
Push-through. Letters are cut out of opaque sign face. Interior light shines through letter faces only. | ![]() | All mixed-use and industrial zones and the MED-O zone | May be incorporated into a permitted wall, pole, or monument sign |
Neon. | ![]() | All mixed-use and industrial zones | May be incorporated into a permitted wall, projecting, window, pole, or monument sign |
Internally illuminated cabinet signs. Sign face is illuminated through translucent casing. This includes internally illuminated changeable copy signs. | ![]() | LM, LM1, MS, I and HM | May be incorporated into a permitted wall, pole, pylon, or monument sign |
Digital message signage. | ![]() | All mixed-use and industrial zones, except CBD | Only allowed to be integrated on permitted monument and pole signs per AMC 19.67.080(D) |
Internally illuminated awning signs. Awning face is illuminated through awning material. | ![]() | Not allowed in any zone | |
Externally illuminated sign. | ![]() | All zones | Illumination techniques must focus the light on the sign and avoid glare to the sky, streets, sidewalks, and other public spaces, and adjacent uses |
D. Sign Materials, Structural, and Electrical Restrictions.
1. Except flags, temporary, and portable signs, and window signs conforming in all respects with the requirements of this chapter, all signs must be constructed of durable materials and must be permanently attached to the ground, a building, or another structure by direct attachment to a rigid wall, frame, or structure.
2. All attached signs and sign support frames must be mounted and attached to a building or the ground in a secure manner and must be maintained in good repair for safety and appearance.
3. All wiring, fittings, and materials used in the construction, connection, and operation of electrically illuminated signs must be in accordance with the provisions of the National Electric Code or the local electric code in effect. All such signs require an electrical permit and inspection by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industry, Electrical Division, or equivalent inspection.
E. Sign Maintenance and Inspection.
1. Maintenance. All signs, including signs heretofore installed, must be constantly maintained in a state of security, safety, appearance and repair. If any sign is found not to be so maintained or is insecurely fastened or otherwise dangerous, it is the duty of the owner and/or occupant of the premises on which the sign is fastened to repair or remove the sign within five days after receiving notice from the Director. The premises surrounding a freestanding sign must be free and clear of rubbish and the landscaping area must be maintained.
2. Inspection. All sign owners must permit the periodic inspection of their signs by the city upon city request. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Sign area for all sign types is measured as follows:
A. The area of painted signs, individual letter signs, and other indirectly illuminated signs is calculated on the basis of the smallest rectangle, circle or spherical figure that will enclose the entire copy area of the sign. Any such calculation must include the areas between letters and lines, as well as the areas of any devices, illuminated or nonilluminated, which are intended to attract attention.
B. Where signs are placed on a display board attached to a wall or weather protection feature, the entire display board must be included in the sign area calculations. Where the display board includes a visible frame, only the area inside the frame must be included in the sign area calculations.
C. For freestanding signs, the entire display board must be included in the sign area calculations. Where the display board includes a visible frame, only the area inside the frame must be included in the sign area calculations.
D. Multiple-faced signs must have each face measured separately. The sign area allotment for each sign type applies to just one side of the sign. For example, if the maximum size for a certain monument sign is 25 square feet, then each face of the monument sign may be up to 25 square feet.
E. Four or more faced signs, spherical, free-form, sculptural or other nonplanar sign area is measured as 50 percent of the sum of the areas using only the four vertical sides of the smallest four-sided polyhedron that will encompass the sign structure, as shown in Figure 19.67.050(2). Signs with greater than four polyhedron faces are prohibited.
Figure 19.67.050(1)
Clarifying sign area measurement.
![]() |
Figure 19.67.050(2)
Clarifying 3D sign area measurement.
![]() |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Table 19.67.060(A)
Freestanding sign types and standards.
Sign type | Location and street setback | Maximum quantity | Maximum height above existing grade | Maximum sign area |
Pole sign A sign supported by one vertical post. ![]() | Only allowed in LM1 and HM zones within 100' of SR-20 right-of-way 5' minimum setback | 1 pole sign per 400' of SR-20 lot frontage | 30' | 1 sq. ft. per linear foot of SR-20 frontage, up to a maximum of 160 sq. ft. |
Monument sign A sign which is attached to the ground by means of a wide base of solid appearance. See AMC 19.67.080(B) for supplemental design standards. ![]() | 5' minimum street setback | 1 monument, pylon, or post and arm sign/lot frontage, except: 1 such freestanding sign per 150' of lot frontage where speed limit less than 35 mph 1 such freestanding sign per 200' of lot frontage where speed limit 35 mph or greater | See Table 19.67.080(B)(4) In LM1 and HM zones within 100' of SR-20 right-of-way, maximum height is 30' | See Table 19.67.080(B)(4) In LM1 and HM zones within 100' of SR-20 right-of-way, 1 sq. ft. per linear foot of SR-20 frontage, up to a maximum of 160 sq. ft. |
Pylon sign A sign mounted on two posts. ![]() | 5' minimum street setback | 1 monument, pylon, or post and arm sign/lot frontage, except: 1 such freestanding sign per 150' of lot frontage where speed limit less than 35 mph 1 freestanding sign per 200' of lot frontage where speed limit 35 mph or greater | Monument sign standards apply per Table 19.67.080(B)(4) except pylon signs are limited to 8' in height In LM1 and HM zones within 100' of SR-20 right-of-way, maximum height is 30' | Monument sign standards apply per Table 19.67.080(B)(4) In LM1 and HM zones within 100' of SR-20 right-of-way, 1 sq. ft. per linear foot of SR-20 frontage, up to a maximum of 160 sq. ft. |
Post and arm sign A small sign supported by a post and arm. ![]() | 5' minimum street setback | 1 such monument, pylon, or post and arm sign/lot frontage, except: 1 freestanding sign per 150' of lot frontage where speed limit less than 35 mph 1 freestanding sign per 200' of lot frontage where speed limit 35 mph or greater | 5' | 10 sq. ft. |
Internal wayfinding sign A sign used to aid customers in circulation within parking lots of commercial uses. These signs could come in the form of monument, pylon, post and arm, or wall sign types. See AMC 19.67.080(C) for supplemental design standards. ![]() | May be located in landscaped areas or on pathways, provided the sign does not inhibit pedestrian movement. When such sign types are mounted on buildings, they must be oriented to a pathway. | Appropriate number of signs to provide directional assistance given size of site and circulation pattern as determined by the Director. | 8' | 15 sq. ft. When such sign types are mounted on buildings, they are limited to a maximum of 10 sq. ft. |
Table 19.67.060(B)
Building-mounted sign types and standards.
Sign type | Location | Maximum quantity | Maximum sign area | Maximum sign height |
Wall sign A sign painted directly on the wall, attached to, or erected against the wall of a building or structure with the exposed face of the sign parallel to the plane of such wall. See AMC 19.67.090(A) for supplemental design standards. ![]() | See AMC 19.67.090(A)(2) | 1 sign per tenant facade that is visible from an adjacent street, customer parking lot, or alley One wall sign is allowed per facade facing a waterfront, provided the requirements of the Shoreline Master Program are met See AMC 19.67.090(A) for additional quantity standards | See Table 19.67.090(A)(3) | Signs must not extend above the building parapet, soffit, or eave line of the building |
Projecting sign A sign attached to and extending outward from the face of the building. See AMC 19.67.090(B) for supplemental design standards. ![]() | Minimum 8' vertical clearance above sidewalk or pathway, and minimum 14' vertical clearance when within 5' of a roadway Must not be located directly over windows or in conflict with other signs or architectural features of the building | 1 sign per facade that is visible from a street or customer parking lot | See AMC 19.67.080(B)(1) | Signs must not extend above the building parapet, soffit, or eave line of the building |
Marquee/awning sign A sign that is either attached to, affixed to, or painted on a marquee, awning, or canopy. See AMC 19.67.090(C) for supplemental design standards. ![]() | Minimum 8' vertical clearance above sidewalk or pathway May be placed on the front, above, or below the marquee Signage must not exceed two-thirds of individual awning or marquee width | 1 sign per marquee, awning, or canopy that is visible from a street or customer parking lot | Same as wall sign standards, see Table 19.67.090(A)(3) | See AMC 19.67.090(C)(1) |
Under-canopy sign A sign attached to the underside of an awning, canopy, balcony or arcade. See AMC 19.67.090(D) for examples. ![]() | Minimum 8' vertical clearance above sidewalk or pathway Minimum 1' horizontal clearance from the building and canopy edge | 1 sign per entrance that is visible from a street or customer parking lot | None | 2' |
Window sign A sign that is applied to or attached to the exterior or interior of a window or located in such manner within a building that it is visible from the exterior of the building through a window, but excludes merchandise in a window display. See AMC 19.67.090(E) for window sign examples. ![]() | Windows include glass doors | None | 30% of total tenant window area/facade | None |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. In mixed-use and industrial zones, all sign types are permitted unless otherwise noted in AMC 19.67.060.
B. Table 19.67.070 illustrates the types of signs that are allowed for different development/use types in residential zones. The letter “P” indicates permitted sign types. A blank cell indicates the particular sign type is not permitted.
Table 19.67.070
Signs permitted in residential zones.
Conditions:
1 Single-Family Subdivisions and Mixed-Residential or Multifamily Complex: One monument sign is permitted per entrance from an access street, provided said signs do not exceed 18 square feet in sign area each and five feet in height. Such signs can be low-profile monument or fence-mounted and can be placed anywhere on the property along access streets, not necessarily at entrances.
2One nonilluminated wall sign or window sign up to two square feet is permitted for a home occupation.
3 Other Nonresidential Uses:
aMonument signs are permitted for those permitted nonresidential uses that exceed 10,000 square feet in gross floor area. One monument sign is permitted per lot frontage, provided said sign does not exceed 18 square feet in sign area each and five feet in height. Such signs can be low-profile monument or fence-mounted and can be placed anywhere on the property along access streets (not only at entrances).
bPylon and post and arm signs are limited to six feet in height and 16 square feet in area.
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Location and Landscaping.
1. Freestanding signs are prohibited on block frontages that are designated storefront per maps in AMC 19.61.040. All business signs along such frontages must be building-mounted (see AMC 19.67.090).
2. Landscaping. The base of all freestanding signs must be enhanced with one square foot of landscaped area per one square foot of sign area.
B. Monument Signs.
1. Sign Form. At least 40 percent of the total sign width must meet the ground plane.
Figure 19.67.080(B)(1)
Minimum ground anchoring provisions for monument signs.
![]() |
2. Materials and Design. Monument signs located in the CBD, C, MMU, CM, and residential zones must be designed as an integrated architectural feature of the site. Specifically:
a. Framing. Monument signs must include design elements that effectively frame the sign on both faces. Alternatively, signs that have a substantial framing element on one side will meet this provision.
DEPARTURES per AMC 19.20.220 will be considered, provided the design meets other provisions herein, and integrates a distinctive, one-of-a-kind design that contributes to the visual character of the area.
Figure 19.67.080(B)(2)(a)
Good examples of monument signs with framing elements on one side.
![]() |
b. Materials and Design. Monument signs must include durable high-quality materials such as stone, brick, concrete, or steel and a design that relates to and/or complements the design of on-site buildings and/or is coordinated with other site design elements (such as distinctive lighting, monuments, wayfinding signs).
c. Top/Middle/Bottom. Monument signs must integrate a top, middle, and bottom element. The top could include a distinctive sign cap and/or include the name of a multi-tenant center. The middle can include a consistent framing technique for an individual sign or multiple signs in a multi-tenant center. The bottom could include a distinctive base design with special materials and/or design. See the figures below for examples that meet this requirement.
Signs less than six feet tall are exempt from this provision.
Figure 19.67.080(B)(2)(c-1)
Acceptable and unacceptable monument sign examples.
![]() The left image utilizes clearly identifiable top, middle, and bottom elements and meets the framing provision. The middle image includes a base, but insufficient top or framing element. The shorter sign to the right includes framing but is exempt from the top, middle, and bottom elements. |
Figure 19.67.080(B)(2)(c-2)
Good examples of monument signs with top/middle/bottom elements.
Figure 19.67.080(B)(2)(c-3)
Unacceptable examples of monument signs.
![]() |
3. Minimum Base Height. The copy of all signage must be at least one foot above grade.
Figure 19.67.080(B)(3)
Minimum base height for sign copy.
![]() |
4. Maximum Size and Height. Table 19.67.080(B)(4) illustrates the maximum allowable sign area and height for all monument signs.
Table 19.67.080(B)(4)
Maximum allowable sign area and height for monument signs.
Total ROW Frontage of Parcel (on each street) | Allowable Sign Area | Maximum Height |
Less than 80 feet | 16 sq. ft. | 5 feet |
80—119 feet | 24 sq. ft. | 6 feet |
120—199 feet | 30 sq. ft. | 7 feet |
200—299 feet | 40 sq. ft. | 8 feet |
300—399 feet | 50 sq. ft. | 9 feet |
400 feet or more | 70 sq. ft. | 10 feet |
C. Internal Wayfinding Signs.
1. Purpose. To aid visitors in finding the location of a business, use, or building on large commercial development sites.
2. Sign Content. Signs may include only the name of the business, use, or building together with the directional guidance information.
3. Sign Types. Internal wayfinding signs may come in the form of monument, pylon, or post and arm sign types, except that signs placed along pathways may be placed on buildings.
4. Design. Signs must designed in a uniform manner (within individual subdivision or center) using consistent background and typeface colors. Dark background colors with light-colored text are required. See Figure 19.67.080(C) for an example.
Figure 19.67.080(C)
Internal wayfinding sign examples.
![]() Note the consistent design themes using dark backgrounds with light-colored text. |
D. Digital and Changeable Copy Signage Integration. Digital and changeable copy signage elements may be integrated into any pole or monument sign permitted in this section, subject to the following provisions:
1. Up to 50 percent of allowed sign copy area may be used for digital or changeable copy directory purposes.
2. Up to 33 percent of allowed sign copy area may be used for changing message purposes. For single tenant signs, up to 50 percent of the allowed sign copy area may be used for changing message purposes.
3. Where both a digital directory and changing message signage are included on one freestanding sign, such elements may collectively be used for up to 67 percent of the total allowed sign copy area.
4. Digital or internally lit changeable copy signs are not allowed in residential zones.
Figure 19.67.080(D)
Example of integrating digital signage.
5. Any form of technology may be used for the sign elements described herein, provided they meet the following provisions:
a. Maintain a 10-second minimum dwell time for the directory and any images. Changes in directory and images must be instantaneous and not faded. Animation, movement, or video imaging is prohibited.
b. Brightness Limits.
i. Integrate automatic dimming capability that adjusts to the brightness of ambient light at all times of the day and night.
ii. Daytime: 5,000 maximum nits.
iii. Nighttime: 150 maximum nits.
c. Light Trespass Standard. Maximum 0.1 foot-candles at the property line of any park or residential property. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Building-mounted signs include wall signs, projecting signs, marquee/awning signs, under-canopy signs, and window signs.
A. Wall Signs.
1. Permitted Number of Signs. See Table 19.67.060(B). Supplemental standards:
a. In multi-story buildings, businesses above the ground floor are limited to one sign per business, except that a business with frontage on more than one street may have one sign facing each street. Each sign must consist only of lettering and/or a logo painted on or applied to the surface of one window in a manner that allows light to pass between and around the individual letters. The area of the sign may not exceed 12 square feet.
b. In a multi-tenant building with businesses on upper floors and/or in interior spaces having no street facade on which to place a sign, a building directory listing businesses in the building, and not exceeding 12 square feet, may be located on the building wall at each primary entrance. This directory may be in addition to the sign area permitted for the building.
2. Location and Design.
a. Wall signs must be proportional to the facade and are limited to two-thirds of individual facade width dimension. This standard also applies to upper-level businesses.
b. Wall signs may not cover windows, building trim, an existing building name sign, or special ornamentation features. Preferred areas for installation of wall signs include blank areas above marquees, areas between vertical piers or columns, blank areas on a gabled roof, or upper reaches of a false-fronted building.
c. Stacked words on wall signs are permitted. Generally, the primary business name is encouraged to be provided on one line, with additional text on rows above and/or below providing supporting information about the business in smaller fonts.
Figure 19.67.090(A)(2)
Illustrating wall sign standards.
![]() |
3. Maximum Size for Individual Tenants that Occupy Space on the Building Facade. Table 19.67.090(A)(3) below provides standards for the maximum amount of wall, canopy, or awning signage on each tenant’s facade. For building elevations that include signage for upper-level businesses, the standards apply to the entire building elevation.
Table 19.67.090(A)(3)
Sign area standards for wall, canopy, or awning signs for each tenant’s facade.
Tenant facade area | Maximum sign area (for tenant’s facade) | |
Sign with internal lighting | Sign without internal lighting | |
Below 200 sq. ft. | 15% of the facade | 25% of the facade |
200—349 sq. ft. | 14% of the facade | 22.5% of the facade |
350—499 sq. ft. | 13% of the facade | 20% of the facade |
500—999 sq. ft. | 12% of the facade | 17.5% of the facade |
1,000—1,499 sq. ft. | 11% of the facade | 15% of the facade |
1,500—1,999 sq. ft. | 10% of the facade | 12.5% of the facade |
Over 2,000 sq. ft. | 10% of the facade | 10% of the facade |
Figure 19.67.090(A)(3-1)
Clarifying the calculations of maximum sign area for tenant wall, canopy, or awning signs.
![]() |
Figure 19.67.090(A)(3-2)
Acceptable wall sign examples.
![]() |
![]() Note the different styles of signs and use of stacked (both left images) and supplemental text (lower left). |
![]() More acceptable wall sign examples. In the right image, the signs are centered on the articulation elements of the facade. |
Figure 19.67.090(A)(3-3)
Unacceptable wall sign example.
![]() Most or all of these signs clearly exceed two-thirds of the width of their respective individual storefronts. |
4. Mounting.
a. Wall signs should be mounted plumb with the building, with a maximum protrusion of one foot plus a four-inch mounting, unless the sign incorporates sculptural elements or architectural devices.
b. The sign frame must be concealed or integrated into the building’s architectural character in terms of form, color, and materials.
5. Building Name Signs.
a. Signs that advertise the name of the building and not associated with the name of any individual business are exempt from the sign area standards in Table 19.67.090(A)(3) above, provided they are designed and sized in proportion to the facade (see Figure 19.67.090(A)(5) for an example).
b. Signs must be placed near the top of the facade and generally centered on the architectural features of the building.
c. DEPARTURES per AMC 19.20.220 will be considered, provided the sign is located in a place that is independent from individual businesses on the building and helps to provide identity for the particular building.
Figure 19.67.090(A)(5)
Acceptable building name sign.
![]() |
B. Projecting Signs. Projecting signs meeting the following conditions are allowed for commercial uses adjacent to and facing a street. They may be used in addition to wall, marquee, and/or awning signs provided they meet the applicable standards below.
1. Sign Area. Projecting signs are not based on sign area standards, but on the dimensional standards below. Projecting signs may be either vertically or horizontally oriented. Projecting banner signs must all be vertically oriented.
a. Projection.
i. Horizontally oriented signs: no more than eight feet.
ii. Square or vertically oriented signs: no more than three feet.
iii. Signs may project into public right-of-way for storefront buildings, but must not extend over the curb into the travel lane.
b. Height.
i. Horizontally oriented signs: no more than three feet.
ii. Vertically oriented signs: must not extend above the building parapet, soffit, the eave line or the roof of the building.
Figure 19.67.090(B)(1)
Dimensional standards for horizontally (left) and vertically oriented (right) projecting signs.
![]() |
c. DEPARTURES per AMC 19.20.220 to the provisions in subsections (B)(1)(a) and (b) of this section will be considered, provided the sign design is compatible with the design of the building in terms of location, scale, and design elements, does not create a public safety hazard, and provides a positive contribution to the streetscape.
Figure 19.67.090(B)(4)
Acceptable and unacceptable projecting sign examples.
![]() |
The example on the right includes two complementary projecting signs that are separated enough that they don’t conflict or cause visual clutter. The second sign is smaller and advertises the lounge that is within the restaurant. |
![]() Both examples include signs that project over the roofline. In the right example there are far too many signs that visually conflict and create unwanted sign clutter. |
C. Marquee/Awning Signs. Marquee or awning signs may be used in place of permitted wall signs provided they meet the following conditions:
1. Sign Form and Size.
a. Signs consisting of individual letters placed on the outside edge of the marquee or above the marquee are limited to 200 percent of the height of the vertical dimension of the marquee. For example, if the vertical dimension of the marquee is 12 inches, the letters may be up to 24 inches high. Such signs are limited to two-thirds of individual marquee width dimension or no more than 20 feet, whichever is less.
b. Sign boards may be placed on the vertical edge of a canopy, provided the height of the sign board is no more than 200 percent the height of the vertical dimension of the marquee. For example, if the vertical dimension of the marquee is 12 inches, the sign board may be up to 24 inches high. Such signs are limited to two-thirds of individual marquee width dimension or no more than 20 feet, whichever is less.
c. Signs placed on the vertical edge of awnings are limited to 80 percent of the height of the vertical edge of the awning. Where signs are placed on the sloping portion of the awning, they must be sized proportional to the architectural features of the building and are limited to two feet in height. The width of awning signs are limited to two-thirds of individual awning width dimension or no more than 20 feet, whichever is less.
2. Number of Signs. For individual facades that include multiple awnings or marquees, secondary business signage may be included on the additional signs. For example, where the primary sign might advertise the name of a bakery, the secondary signs could advertise coffee, ice cream or other types of products sold by the business.
Figure 19.67.090(C)
Marquee and awning sign examples and standards.
![]() |
![]() |
D. Under-Canopy Signs. Under-canopy signs are placed under awnings, marquees or canopies and placed perpendicular to the storefronts and thus oriented to pedestrians on the sidewalk or an internal pathway.
Figure 19.67.090(D)
Under-canopy standards and example.
![]() |
E. Window Signs.
Figure 19.67.090(E)
Window sign standards and examples.
![]() Signs in windows are limited to 30 percent of the total tenant window area. The coffee shop in the upper right image uses a variety of window signs, but meets the 30 percent limit. The lower right image clearly exceeds the 30 percent limit and effectively minimizes the transparency of this storefront. | ![]() |
![]() |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Noncommercial speech signs express noncommercial speech such as public community events, religious, political, social, or other philosophical messages.
Noncommercial speech signs do not promote commercial products or services. The content of such signs is not regulated, but is subject to the following requirements:
A. The maximum sign area and height of noncommercial speech signs must be consistent with the monument sign standards (regardless of sign type) set forth in Table 19.67.080(B)(4) based on the total right-of-way frontage of the applicable parcel (on each street).
B. Noncommercial speech signs that do not comply with the requirements of this section must be subject to the permit requirements, sign area, setback and other provisions of this chapter. All noncommercial speech signs must comply with general sign requirements per AMC 19.67.040, General requirements. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Applicability. All temporary signs are subject to the placement, size, and height requirements of this chapter, and the requirements in the underlying zone. Additionally, the following requirements apply:
B. Permitting. A sign permit is not required for temporary signs.
C. Location Requirements.
1. Generally.
a. Temporary signs may be located on private property with the property owner’s permission.
b. Temporary signs attached to building walls must not be placed in a manner that obstructs any door, Fire Department sprinkler connection, or street number sign.
c. Temporary signs must not be placed on the roof of a building, or affixed to a permanent sign or its structure, tree, utility pole, or street sign.
d. No part of a temporary sign may overhang a paved roadway, bicycle path, parking space, driveway, loading area, or wheelchair access.
e. Temporary signs must not be permanently attached to the ground, a building, or to any other structure, other than what is necessary to secure the sign to prevent theft, wind damage, or safety problems.
f. Temporary signs must not be placed in any public park, trail, open space, or other public space, except for those signs placed by the city.
2. Only Type 4 temporary signs may be placed within the public right-of-way. Such signs are subject to the standards in subsection H of this section.
3. Only Type 4 temporary signs may be placed on a sidewalk or other pedestrian pathway. Such signs are subject to the standards in subsection H of this section.
D. Materials. Temporary signs may be made of any durable material, and the sign face may be of rigid or flexible construction.
E. Illumination Prohibited. Temporary signs may not be directly illuminated or be provided with any electric service.
F. Noncommercial Temporary Signs. Noncommercial signs do not promote commercial products or services. The content of such signs is not regulated, but is subject to the following requirements:
1. Noncommercial temporary signs are subject to the requirements of Table 19.67.110(F).
Table 19.67.110(F)
Size and duration of noncommercial temporary signs.
Non-A-board sign in the public right-of-way | A-board sign in the public right-of-way | Any temporary sign on private property | |
Sign area, maximum | 4 square feet | See subsection (H)(4) of this section for A-board (Type 4 temporary sign) standards | 12 square feet |
Height above grade, maximum | 3 feet | 8 feet | |
Duration, maximum | 180 days per calendar year unless otherwise limited by the temporary sign type | 180 days per calendar year unless otherwise limited by the temporary sign type | |
Location requirements | See subsection (H)(4)(f) of this section | See subsection (C)(1) of this section | |
2. Community banner signs up to 100 square feet in size and 20 feet above grade in height may only be located on public banner poles erected by the city for that use. Community banner signs may not be illuminated.
3. Signs Advertising a Public Event. Maximum duration must be from one month before the event to five days after the event.
G. Commercial Temporary Signs.
1. Construction Signs. On properties with active construction, temporary signs must meet the following requirements:
a. Number. One nonilluminated, double-faced temporary sign is permitted for each lot frontage.
b. Sign Area. Maximum size of 24 square feet.
c. Height. Maximum height of eight feet above grade.
d. Permitted Sign Types. Types 2 and 3.
e. Duration. Temporary signs must be removed by the date of first occupancy of the property or one year after placement of the sign, whichever occurs first.
2. Exterior event signs, such as grand opening signs, sale signs, promotional signs, exhibitions, quitting business signs, and other nonpermanent exterior signs used to advertise an event.
a. Number. There is no limit to the number of exterior event signs that may be displayed at any one time for any one business or tenant.
b. Applicability/Location. Businesses in mixed-use and industrial zones may display exterior event signs.
c. Sign Area. Exterior event signs are limited to 20 square feet in size, except for building-mounted Type 2 temporary signs, which are subject to the area standards in subsection (H)(2) of this section.
d. Height. Based on height limits of allowed temporary sign types in subsection (H) below.
e. Permitted Sign Types. Types 1 through 5.
f. Duration. Exterior event signs (individual signs and/or groups of signs) may be displayed for no more than 60 cumulative days per calendar year per business or tenant.
3. Residential Real Estate. Signs associated with residential properties for sale or rent must comply with the following:
a. On-Site Residential “For Sale,” “For Rent” and “Sold” Signs.
i. Number. Limited to one sign per lot frontage on the subject property.
ii. Sign Area. Maximum size of six square feet.
iii. Height. Maximum height of six feet above grade.
iv. Permitted Sign Types. Type 1.
v. Duration. Must be removed within five days of the final sale or rental.
b. Off-Site Residential “For Sale” and “For Rent” Signs.
i. Location. No further from the subject property than the nearest arterial street intersection.
ii. Quantity. No more than one “For Sale” or “For Rent” sign may be used at any street intersection for any one developer, broker, seller or owner.
iii. Sign Area. Maximum size of two square feet.
iv. Height. Maximum height of six feet above grade.
v. Permitted Sign Types. Type 1.
vi. Duration. Must be removed within five days of the final sale or rental.
4. Commercial and Industrial Real Estate. Signs associated with commercial and industrial properties for sale or rent must comply with the following:
a. Location and Quantity. Limited to one sign per lot frontage on the subject property.
b. Sign Area. Maximum size of 16 square feet.
c. Height. Maximum height of eight feet above grade for properties adjacent to State Route 20 in the LM1 or HM zone and six feet above grade in all other areas.
d. Permitted Sign Types. Types 1 through 3.
e. Duration. Must be removed within five days of the final sale or rental.
5. Commercial Temporary Signs in a Residential Zone. Permitted commercial temporary signs in residential zones are limited to:
a. Residential real estate signs as established in subsection (G)(3) of this section.
b. Home occupation signs as established in Table 19.67.070.
c. Signs associated with permitted nonresidential uses are subject to the standards of this section.
H. Temporary Sign Requirements by Sign Type. Below are standards for a wide variety of temporary sign types that may be allowed based on the site’s zoning, land use, or context. Where the provisions of subsection F or G of this section conflict with the provisions of this subsection H, the provisions of subsection F or G of this section apply.
Figure 19.67.110(H)
Summary of temporary sign types.
![]() |
1. Type 1 Temporary Signs. Signs in this category consist of small, temporary yard signs that are typically associated with (but not limited to) the advertisement of real estate, political campaigns, and event announcements.
a. Location. Type 1 temporary signs may be located in any zone.
b. Quantity.
i. For developed property, one sign may be displayed per dwelling unit and per business. For undeveloped and vacant property, one sign may be displayed per one-quarter acre of land.
ii. The provisions of subsection (H)(1)(b)(i) of this section are suspended during the 60-day period before any primary or general election scheduled by Skagit County. Following the end of such period, the provisions of subsection (H)(1)(b)(i) of this section are in force until the following period of suspension.
c. Size. Maximum sign area is six square feet (per side if dual-sided) per sign. Signs placed in windows are subject to the size standards of AMC 19.67.090(E).
d. Height. Maximum height of the sign, including supports, is six feet above grade (except for noncommercial signs located in a public right-of-way per subsection F of this section).
e. Material. If outdoors, the sign face must be composed of a rigid material.
f. Mounting. Outdoor signs may be only mounted and supported by posts or stakes which are attached to the ground.
g. Duration. No limit unless otherwise specified in this section for the particular location, use, or context.
2. Type 2 Temporary Signs. Signs in this category are typically referred to as “banners” that are typically associated with (but not limited to) the announcement of community events. These may be freestanding (supported by posts on either end) or building-mounted signs.
a. Location. Type 2 temporary signs are permitted in the mixed-use and industrial zones, on any property owned by a public agency, and on any property owned by a nonprofit corporation organized under Section 501(c)(3) of the United States Internal Revenue Code.
b. Quantity. One sign may be displayed per property.
c. Size. Maximum sign area for freestanding Type 2 signs is 18 square feet (per face of dual-sided signs). The maximum sign area for Type 2 signs attached to buildings is the same as sign area for wall signs (with internal lighting) as established in Table 19.67.090(A)(3) based on the size of the facade.
Exception: Lesser maximum sign area may be allowed for the particular use per subsection F or G of this section.
d. Height. Maximum height of any freestanding signs, including supports, is six feet above grade (except for noncommercial signs located in a public right-of-way per subsection F of this section). Type 2 signs attached to a building must not be placed on or above the roof of a building and must not be placed over any windows.
e. Material. The sign face must be composed of a flexible material.
f. Mounting. Freestanding signs may be only mounted and supported by posts or stakes which are attached to the ground.
g. Duration. For each property, Type 2 signs may be displayed for a maximum 30 calendar days per year. A maximum of six separate displays are permitted each year, with a minimum of 10 calendar days of separation between displays.
3. Type 3 Temporary Signs. Signs in this category are large signs typically associated with (but not limited to) the advertisement of land sales, construction activity, and commercial and industrial buildings for rent.
a. Location. Type 3 temporary signs may be located in any zone under the following conditions:
i. The parcel upon which the sign is displayed has a minimum of 100 feet of lot frontage.
ii. The parcel does not contain a permanent freestanding sign with digital or changeable copy.
b. Quantity. One sign may be displayed per property.
c. Size. Maximum sign area is 24 square feet (per face of dual-sided signs) unless lesser maximum sign area applies for the particular use per subsection F or G of this section.
d. Height. Maximum height of the sign, including supports, is eight feet above grade unless lesser maximum height applies for the particular use per subsection F or G of this section.
e. Material. The sign face must be composed of a rigid material.
f. Mounting. Signs may be only mounted and supported by posts or stakes which are attached to the ground.
g. Duration. Unless otherwise specified in this section for the particular location, use, or context:
i. Type 3 temporary signs may be displayed without limit to duration on properties that are undeveloped or vacant.
ii. In all other cases, signs may be displayed a maximum of one year, with a minimum of 60 calendar days of separation between displays. The minimum separation period applies regardless of whether the previous display reached the maximum duration of display.
4. Type 4 Temporary Signs. Signs in this category must only include A-board and standing signs as defined by AMC 19.67.030. Signs in this category are typically associated with (but not limited to) the advertisement of retail businesses and announcement of public events.
a. Location. Type 4 temporary signs may only be displayed in the mixed-use, industrial, and overlay designations, provided they comply with the standards herein.
b. Quantity.
i. Commercial Use. One sign may be displayed per customer entrance, and no more than two signs may be displayed per business.
ii. Noncommercial Use. Two signs per lot may be displayed for each single noncommercial purpose.
c. Size. Maximum sign area is six square feet (per face of dual-sided signs).
d. Height. Maximum height of the sign when placed in its display position, including supports, is four feet above grade (except for noncommercial signs located in a public right-of-way per subsection F of this section).
e. Material. The sign face must be composed of a rigid material.
f. Placement Standards.
i. Signs for a commercial use must be located within 15 feet of a customer entrance.
ii. Signs must maintain at least 25 feet of separation from other Type 4 temporary signs.
iii. Signs placed on a pathway or sidewalk must be placed to one side of the sidewalk or pathway and provide a minimum of four feet of unobstructed sidewalk or pathway width. Signs must not be placed on sidewalks or pathways less than four feet in width.
iv. Signs must not be located within center medians, traffic circles, traffic islands, and roundabouts.
g. Duration. Signs may only be displayed during the period beginning 30 minutes prior to the daily opening and ending 30 minutes following the daily closing of the business displaying the sign.
Figure 19.67.110(H)(4)
Examples of Type 4 temporary signs.
![]() The sign above illustrates a proper location for a Type 4 temporary sign, whereas the sign(s) below are placed in the middle of the sidewalk where it obstructs pedestrian traffic. | ![]() Type 4 temporary signs may come in the A-board form (upper left example) or in a standing form (as above). |
![]() | |
5. Type 5 Temporary Signs. Signs in this category are feather signs. Feather signs are prohibited except where used for an exterior event sign (see subsection (G)(2) of this section) or for multi-tenant centers meeting the criteria below.
a. Location. Type 5 temporary signs may only be displayed in properties in a mixed-use or industrial zone.
b. Quantity. One sign may be displayed per site/property. For site/properties with more than 100 feet of block frontage, multiple signs are allowed, provided there is at least 100 feet of separation between signs.
c. Size. Maximum height of feather signs is 13 feet.
d. Design. Signs must designed in a uniform manner, including consistent size and shape, where more than one sign is permitted.
e. Duration. Type 5 temporary signs associated with an exterior event are subject to the duration provisions of subsection (G)(2) of this section. Type 5 temporary signs associated with an existing on-site tenant may be displayed without limit to duration.
6. Type 6 Temporary Signs. Signs in this category include fixed aerial displays, balloons, pennants, spinners, strings of flags, streamers, tubes, or other devices affected by the movement of the air or other atmospheric or mechanical means. Such signs are prohibited except where used for an exterior event sign (see subsection (G)(2) of this section).
I. Special Community Event Signage. The purpose of this provision is to provide for a periodic increase in the number of temporary signs that may be displayed for special community events which promote economic activity in Anacortes.
1. Qualifying Events. Events sponsored by the city, nonprofit agencies, and/or multiple Anacortes-based businesses that are intended to attract tourism activity in Anacortes.
2. Period of Applicability. Beginning 10 days prior to the date of the event (or beginning date of a multiday event) and ending 24 hours following the conclusion of the event.
3. Additional Temporary Signs Permitted. An unlimited number of temporary signs may be displayed in the CBD, C, CM, I and LM1 zones during the period of applicability.
4. Other Regulations Remain in Effect. During the period of applicability, all other temporary sign regulations remain in effect. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Side and Rear Setbacks. Signs and advertising structures where permitted must be erected or placed in conformity with the side and rear setback requirements of the district in which they are located except that no sign or advertising structure in a nonresidential zone must be erected or placed closer than 50 feet of a side or rear lot line in any adjacent residential zone.
B. Industrial Zone. In the I zone east of “R” Avenue and between 22nd and 34th Streets, the sign setback must be 30 feet from the curb at the east side of “R” Avenue. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A nonconforming sign is a sign that was validly installed under laws or ordinances in effect prior to the effective date of the ordinance codified in this chapter or subsequent revisions, but is in conflict with the provisions of this chapter. Nonconforming signs may remain in use only under the following conditions:
A. No such sign may be changed in any manner that increases the nonconformance of any such sign.
B. The burden of establishing a sign to be legally nonconforming under this section rests upon the person or persons, firm or corporation claiming legal status for a sign.
C. Changes to the sign copy or the replacement of a sign face on a nonconforming sign is permitted.
D. When a sign is structurally altered, it ceases to be a nonconforming sign and must conform with the provisions of this chapter. Structural alteration means any action that changes the height, size, or shape of the sign or any action that affects the base or support(s) of the sign.
E. When the footprint of a building containing a business or activity associated with a nonconforming sign is enlarged 200 percent or more, then such sign must be brought into conformity with this chapter.
F. When a business or activity containing a nonconforming sign changes the type of the business, then such sign must be brought into conformance with this chapter.
G. Such signs may be removed for maintenance for periods not to exceed 60 days. If removed for a longer period they must comply with provisions of this chapter upon reinstallation. This does not apply to existing billboards, but once removed for more than 60 days billboards cannot be replaced.
Figure 19.67.130
Acceptable and unacceptable changes to nonconforming signs.
![]() |
(Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
In case any sign must be installed, erected, constructed or maintained in violation of any of the terms of this title, the Director must notify in writing the owner or lessee thereof to alter such sign so as to comply with this title. Failure to comply with any of the provisions of this chapter must be deemed a violation and must be punishable under AMC Title 20.
Signs on public property and in public right-of-way deemed to be in violation of this chapter may be removed by the city upon notice of the violation. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. If any section, sentence, clause, phrase, word, portion, or provision of this chapter is held invalid or unconstitutional by any court of competent jurisdiction, such decision must not affect, impair, or invalidate any other section, sentence, clause, phrase, word, portion, or provision of this chapter which can be given effect without the invalid provision.
B. The invalidation of the application of any section, sentence, clause, phrase, word, portion, or provision of this chapter to a particular property or structure, or any particular properties or structures, by any court of competent jurisdiction must not affect the application of such section, sentence, clause, phrase, word, portion or provision to any other property or structure not specifically included in said invalidation. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
The purposes of this chapter are as follows:
A. Establish development regulations consistent with the city’s Comprehensive Plan;
B. Protect property values and promote tourism through protection of scenic vistas of the mountains, tree-covered hillsides, the waterfront, and tourist-related zones and areas;
C. Facilitate the use of public property and structures for wireless service facilities to reduce the impact of such facilities upon residential and other property;
D. Maintain the quality of life associated with the aesthetic character of the city’s surroundings;
E. Provide adequate sites for locating wireless service facilities in areas where the adverse impact on the community is minimal;
F. Provide facilities and infrastructure to provide wireless communications service to city residents, businesses, and others when in Anacortes;
G. Encourage optimal colocation and sharing of new and existing facilities, and minimize the total number of towers throughout the community;
H. Encourage use of most appropriate technology and prompt removal of outdated or abandoned wireless service facilities;
I. Encourage the location of wireless service facilities upon alternative support structures;
J. Require that the design of wireless service facilities incorporate camouflage, disguise, screening and concealment technology so that such facilities blend into their surroundings;
K. Avoid the potential damage to adjacent properties from tower failure by engineering and careful siting of tower structure;
L. Enhance the ability of the providers of wireless services to provide such services to the community quickly, effectively, and efficiently; and
M. Provide a level, nondiscriminatory, competitive environment, thereby encouraging increased competition among providers of functionally equivalent wireless services. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Except as otherwise provided herein, the placement of any wireless service facility at any location within the city is subject to the provisions of this chapter.
B. The standards and process requirements of this chapter supersede all other review process and approval criteria, setback, height or landscaping requirements of this title.
C. Except as provided herein, all wireless telecommunication service facilities must comply with the provisions of this chapter. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. A Definitions.
“Antenna” means any exterior transmitting or receiving device mounted on a tower, building or structure and used in communications that radiates or captures electromagnetic waves, digital signals, analog signals, radio frequencies (excluding radar signals), wireless telecommunications signals or other communication signals.
B. B Definitions.
“Base station” means a structure or equipment at a fixed location that enables FCC licensed or authorized wireless communications between user equipment and a communications network. The term does not encompass a tower or any equipment associated with a tower.
1. The term includes, but is not limited to, equipment associated with wireless communications services such as private, broadcast, and public safety services, as well as unlicensed wireless services and fixed wireless services such as microwave backhaul.
2. The term includes, but is not limited to, radio transceivers, antennas, coaxial or fiber-optic cable, regular and backup power supplies, and comparable equipment, regardless of technological configuration (including distributed antenna systems and small-cell networks).
3. The term includes any structure other than a tower that supports or houses equipment that has been reviewed and approved under the applicable zoning or siting process, or under another state or local regulatory review process, even if the structure was not built for the sole or primary purpose of providing such support.
4. The term does not include any structure that does not support or house equipment for wireless telecommunications services.
C. C Definitions.
“Camouflage” means a palette of techniques used to disguise, hide and conceal a wireless service facility from public view by blending its appearance into elements of the visual background. The term connotes the use of paint, landscaping, building materials and artificial screens in patterns that merge with the elements in the background environment.
“Colocation,” for the purposes of eligible facilities requests, means the placement or installation of wireless facilities on existing structures that include a wireless facility or a wireless support structure, including water towers and other buildings or structures. The term includes the placement, replacement, or modification of wireless facilities within an approved equipment compound.
“Colocation,” for the purpose of applications to site small wireless facilities and other wireless facilities, excluding eligible facilities requests, means:
1. Mounting or installing an antenna facility on a preexisting structure; and/or
2. Modifying a structure for the purpose of mounting or installing an antenna facility on that structure.
D. D Definitions.
“Director” means the Director of Planning, Community, and Economic Development.
E. E Definitions.
“Electrical transmission tower” means a structure that physically supports high-voltage overhead power lines. The term does not include a utility pole.
“Eligible facilities request” or “EFR” means any request for modification of an existing tower or base station that does not substantially change the physical dimension of such tower or base station, involving:
1. Colocation of new transmission equipment;
2. Removal of transmission equipment; or
3. Replacement of transmission equipment.
“Eligible support structure” means any tower or base station; provided, that it exists at the time the relevant EFR application is filed with the state or local government.
“Equipment cabinet” means an enclosure that is mounted above base flood elevation or placed on a concrete slab that contains improvements, personal property, and facilities to operate its wireless services, including: radio receivers, transmitters, related facilities, and/or related cables and utility lines, location-based power sources, the electrical meter and any other necessary equipment.
“Equipment shelter” means an enclosed structure, shed or box at the base of a mount to store improvements, personal property, and facilities to operate its wireless services, including: radio receivers, transmitters, related facilities, and/or cabinets, related cables and utility lines, location-based power sources, the electrical meter and any other necessary equipment.
“Existing.” Any tower or base station is existing for purposes of this chapter if it has been reviewed and approved under the applicable zoning or siting process, or under another state or local regulatory review process; provided, that a tower that has not been reviewed and approved because it was not permitted when it was built, but was lawfully constructed, is existing for purposes of this chapter.
F. F Definitions.
“Facilities” means all of the towers, equipment, fixtures, antennas, equipment cabinets, equipment shelters, and other appurtenances necessary to furnish and deliver wireless services, including but not limited to utility poles and monopoles with cross arms or without cross arms, wires, lines, conduits, cables, communication and signal lines and equipment, braces, guys, anchors, vaults, and all attachments, appurtenances, and appliances necessary or incidental to the distribution and use of wireless services. Facilities include “small wireless facilities” as defined in subsection S of this section.
“FCC” or “Federal Communications Commission” means the federal agency, or its lawful successor, authorized to regulate and oversee wireless telecommunications carriers, services and providers.
L. L Definitions.
“Lattice tower” means a type of mount that is self-supporting with multiple legs and cross bracing of structural steel.
M. M Definitions.
“Monopole” means a type of mount that is self-supporting with a single shaft of wood, steel or concrete and a platform or racks for panel antennas arrayed at the top. A monopole includes self-supporting mounts that provide light (or light poles).
P. P Definitions.
“Public street” means any highway, street, road, alley or other public way for motor vehicle travel within the city and under the jurisdiction and control of the city which has been acquired, established, dedicated or devoted to street purposes.
R. R Definitions.
“Right(s)-of-way” means all public streets and associated property granted or reserved for, or dedicated to, public use for street purposes, together with public property granted or reserved for, or dedicated to, public use for walkways, sidewalks, bikeways and horse trails, whether improved or unimproved, including any air rights, subsurface rights or easements related thereto.
S. S Definitions.
“Service provider” means every corporation, company, association, joint stock association, firm, partnership, person, city, town, or other legal entity owning, operating, or managing any facilities used to provide and providing wireless telecommunications services for hire, sale, or resale to the general public. Service provider includes the legal successor to any such corporation, company, association, joint stock association, firm, partnership, person, city, town, or other legal entity.
“Site” means the current boundaries of the leased or owned property surrounding the facility and any access or utility easements currently related to the site, and for other eligible support structures, further restricted to that area in proximity to the structure and to other transmission equipment already deployed on the ground.
“Small wireless facility” encompasses facilities that meet the following conditions:
The facilities—
1. Are mounted on structures 50 feet or less in height, including their antennas;
2. Are mounted on structures no more than 10 percent taller than other adjacent structures; or
3. Do not extend existing structures on which they are located to a height of more than 50 feet or by more than 10 percent, whichever is greater;
Each antenna associated with the deployment, excluding associated antenna equipment, is no more than three cubic feet in volume;
All other wireless equipment associated with the structure, including the wireless equipment associated with the antenna and any preexisting associated equipment on the structure, is no more than 28 cubic feet in volume;
The facilities do not require antenna structure registration under federal law;
The facilities are not located on tribal lands, where tribal lands means all lands within the exterior boundaries of any Indian reservation and all dependent Indian communities; and
The facilities do not result in human exposure to radio-frequency radiation in excess of the applicable safety standards specified under federal law pertaining to wireless facilities.
“Stealthing” means designing facilities to be architecturally incorporated into the surrounding community’s environs while minimizing aesthetic impacts. Examples of stealthing include, but are not limited to, steeples, windmills, water towers, flagpoles, light poles, or chimneys.
T. T Definitions.
“Telecommunications” means the transmission, between or among points specified by the user, of information of the user’s choosing, without change in the form or content of the information as sent and received.
“Tower” means any structure that is designed and constructed primarily for the purpose of supporting one or more antennas for telephone, radio, and similar communication purposes, including self-supporting lattice towers, guyed towers, or monopole towers. The term includes radio and television transmission towers, microwave towers, common-carrier towers, cellular telephone towers, alternative tower structures, and the like. The term includes the structure and any support thereto.
“Transmission equipment” means equipment that disseminates information by wire, radio, optic cable, electromagnetic, or similar means for any FCC licensed or authorized wireless telecommunication service, including, but not limited to, radio transceivers, antennas, coaxial or fiber-optic cable, and regular and backup power supply. The term includes equipment associated with wireless telecommunications services including, but not limited to, private, broadcast, and public safety services, as well as unlicensed wireless services and fixed wireless services such as microwave backhaul.
U. U Definitions.
“Utility pole” means a pole privately owned or installed by a utility company for the purpose of electrical transmission.
W. W Definitions.
“Wireless” means communications using radio frequency or optical emissions to complete one or more communications paths in whole or in part among originating and receiving points without other tangible physical connection, including, without limitation, radio and unguided optical waves, and the apparatus used for such transmission.
“Wireless support structure” means a freestanding structure that is designed to support or is capable of supporting wireless facilities. The term does not include a utility pole, monopole, or tower.
“Wireless telecommunications service” or “wireless service” means the transmission of information by wire, radio, optic cable, electromagnetic, or similar means for hire, sale or resale to the general public. For the purpose of this subsection, “information” means knowledge or intelligence represented by any form of writing, signs, signals, pictures, sounds, or any other symbols. For the purpose of this chapter, “wireless telecommunications service” excludes the over-the-air transmission of broadcast television or broadcast radio signals and excludes “cable services,” “cable communications systems” and “CATV systems” as defined in Chapter 5.44. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. New Facilities. A wireless service facility (WSF) permit or wireless conditional use permit (WCUP) is required prior to the site preparation, construction, or installation of any new wireless service facility. The permit required in each zone is specified in AMC 19.68.190.
B. Colocating Facilities. A wireless service facility (WSF) permit or wireless conditional use permit (WCUP) is required in every zone prior to the colocation of any wireless service facility and is required for modifications that qualify as a substantial change. Colocations involving modifications under subsection (C) of this section are exempt from this requirement.
C. Nonsubstantial Change. A modification to an existing facility that involves the addition, removal, and/or replacement of transmission equipment that meets the criteria for a nonsubstantial change as set forth in AMC 19.68.060 must submit an eligible facility request application. A WSF or WCUP will not be required for these types of modifications.
D. Substantial Change. A modification to an existing facility that involves the addition, removal, and/or replacement of transmission equipment that is a substantial change as defined in AMC 19.68.050 is subject to the requirements for new facilities or colocations as applicable.
E. No wireless service facility permit may be issued under this chapter unless the applicant demonstrates compliance with the terms, conditions and performance standards set forth in this chapter. Any WCUP must also meet the criteria for said use permits set forth in AMC 19.68.130.
F. A building permit is also required for any new wireless facility or colocating facility. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. “Substantial change” for purposes of this chapter means a modification to an existing facility that meets any of the following criteria:
Criteria 1.
a. For towers outside of public rights-of-way, if the modification increases the height of the tower by the greater of: (a) more than 10 percent, or (b) by the height of one additional antenna array, with separation from the nearest existing antenna not to exceed 20 feet; or
b. For those towers in the rights-of-way and for all base stations, if the modification increases the height of the tower or base station by the greater of: (a) 10 percent, or (b) 10 feet.
Criteria 2.
a. For towers outside of public rights-of-way, if the modification involves adding an appurtenance to the body of the tower that protrudes from the edge of the tower the greater of: (a) 20 feet, or (b) the width of the tower structure at the level of the appurtenance; or
b. For other eligible support structures, if the modification protrudes from the edge of the structure more than six feet.
Criteria 3.
a. For any eligible wireless support structure, if the installation includes more than the standard number of new equipment cabinets, not to exceed four; or
b. For towers in the public rights-of-way and base stations, if the modification involves installation of any new equipment cabinets on the ground if there are no preexisting ground cabinets associated with the structure, or else involves installation of ground cabinets that are more than 10 percent larger in height or overall volume than any other ground cabinets associated with the structure.
Criterion 4. For any eligible support structure, if the modification entails any excavation or deployment outside the current site.
Criterion 5. For any eligible support structure, if the modification defeats the existing concealment elements of the tower, base station, or any other wireless support structure.
Criterion 6. For any eligible support structure, if the modification violates any of the conditions of approval (besides modification allowed under criteria Nos. 1 through 5 associated with prior approval(s)). (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. “Nonsubstantial change” means a modification that meets all of the following criteria:
Criteria 1.
a. For towers outside of public rights-of-way, if the modification does not increase the height of the tower by the greater of: (a) more than 10 percent, or (b) by the height of one additional antenna array, with separation from the nearest existing antenna not to exceed 20 feet; or
b. For those towers in the rights-of-way and for all base stations, if the modification does not increase the height of the tower or base station by the lesser of: (a) 10 percent or (b) 10 feet.
Criteria 2.
a. For towers outside of public rights-of-way, if the modification does not protrude from the edge of the tower by the greater of: (a) 20 feet, or (b) the width of the tower structure at the level of the appurtenance; or
b. For those towers in the rights-of-way and for all base stations, if the modification does not protrude from the edge of the structure more than six feet.
Criteria 3.
a. For any eligible support structure, if the installation includes new equipment cabinets, the modification does not include the installation of more than four equipment cabinets; or
b. For towers in the public rights-of-way and base stations, if the modification does not involve the installation of any new equipment cabinets on the ground if there are no preexisting ground cabinets associated with the tower, and does not involve the installation of ground cabinets that are more than 10 percent larger in height or overall volume than any other ground cabinets associated with the tower.
Criterion 4. For any eligible support structure, if the modification does not entail any excavation or deployment outside the current site.
Criterion 5. For any eligible support structure, if the modification does not defeat the existing concealment elements of the tower or base station or other wireless support structure.
Criterion 6. For any eligible support structure, if the modification does not violate any of the conditions of approval (besides modification allowed under criteria Nos. 1 through 5 associated with prior approval(s)). (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. An optional pre-application may be submitted up to 30 days prior to the submission of an eligible facilities request application, or a permit application associated with a small wireless facility or other wireless facility. The information submitted along with a pre-application may include the following information:
1. The name and address of the applicant.
2. Identification of all carriers using the facility.
3. The type of facility proposed.
4. If the applicant is not the owner or person in control of the eligible support structure or site, an attestation that the owner or person in control of the eligible support structure and/or site has consented to the proposed facility modification. If the eligible support structure is to be located within a public right-of-way, the applicant must also attest that the applicant has authorization to install, maintain, and operate transmission equipment in, under and above the public right-of-way.
5. A stamped report by a state of Washington registered professional engineer demonstrating compliance with existing structural, electrical, and safety codes, and describing the general structural capacity of the eligible facility, small wireless facility, or other wireless facility.
6. Detailed site plan and drawings.
7. Dimensioned elevation drawings of the existing tower or structure showing the existing and proposed antennas, and equipment structures (at 1/8" = 1' or comparable scale).
8. Copies of the land use or building permit approval that authorized the original installation of the tower or wireless facilities on the structure.
9. If new equipment cabinets, generators, or any other ground equipment components are being proposed, an assessment of noise that shows compliance with city and/or federal noise standards.
10. A description of compliance with the applicable visibility and performance standards set forth in AMC 19.68.200.
11. A stamped report by a state of Washington registered professional engineer demonstrating compliance with radio-frequency emissions standards. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. For the purposes of this section, a complete application includes:
1. The name and address of the applicant.
2. Identification of all carriers using the facility.
3. An assertion that the proposed facilities modification is subject to review under Section 6409 of the Spectrum Act.
4. If the applicant is not the owner or person in control of the eligible support structure or site, an attestation that the owner or person in control of the eligible support structure and/or site has consented to the proposed facility modification. If the eligible support structure is to be located within a public right-of-way, the applicant must also attest that the applicant has authorization to install, maintain, and operate transmission equipment in, under and above the public right-of-way.
5. If the proposed modification will alter the exterior dimensions or appearance of the eligible support structure, the applicant shall include a detailed visual simulation depicting how the eligible support structure will appear after the proposed modification is complete, and particularly, how concealment or stealth will be extended with the modification. The visual simulation shall depict to scale the eligible support structure in relation to the trees, landscaping and other structures adjacent to, or in the immediate vicinity of, the eligible support structure.
6. If the applicant proposes a modification to a tower, an attestation that the proposed modifications will comply with existing structural, electrical, and safety codes, and a description of the general structural capacity of the tower with the proposed modification.
7. If the applicant proposes a modification to a base station, an attestation that the proposed modifications will comply with existing structural, electrical, and safety codes.
8. If the applicant proposes a modification requiring alteration to the eligible support structure, excavation, installation of new equipment cabinets, or other activities impacting or altering the land, existing structures, fencing or landscaping the applicant must submit a detailed site plan and drawings, showing the point of true north, and an appropriate scale depicting:
a. The location, elevation, and dimensions of the existing eligible support structure;
b. The location, elevation, and dimensions of the existing transmission equipment;
c. The location, elevation and dimensions of the transmission equipment, if any, proposed to be colocated or that will replace existing transmission equipment;
d. The location, elevation and dimensions of any proposed new equipment cabinets and the intended use of each;
e. Any proposed modification to the eligible support structure;
f. The location of existing structures on the site, including fencing, screening, trees, and other significant site features; and
g. The location of any areas where excavation is proposed showing the elevations, depths, and width of the proposed excavation and materials and dimensions of the equipment to be placed in the area excavated.
9. If excavation or deployment is proposed outside the current site of the tower or base station, a description of the boundaries of the site together with a scale drawing based on an accurate traverse, with angular and lineal dimensions showing the tower or base station with respect to the site. The city may require a survey by a land surveyor licensed in the state of Washington when, in the judgment of the approval authority, a survey is reasonably necessary to verify the boundaries of the site.
10. If the applicant proposes a modification that will protrude from the edge of a non-tower eligible support structure, record drawings, as-built plans, or the equivalent, showing at a minimum the edge of the eligible support structure at the location of the proposed modification.
11. Copies of the land use or building permit approval that authorized the original installation of the tower or wireless facilities on the structure, or any subsequent approval(s) granting modification to the tower or wireless facilities on the structure, if available.
12. If new equipment cabinets, generators, or any other ground equipment components are being proposed, an assessment of noise that shows compliance with city and/or federal noise standards.
13. A stamped report by a state of Washington registered professional engineer demonstrating compliance with federal radio-frequency emissions standards for wireless facilities.
B. Waiver of Submittal Requirement. The approval authority may waive any submittal requirement upon determination that the required submittal, or part thereof, is not reasonably related to the nonsubstantial change criteria. A waiver, to be effective, must be in writing and signed by the approval authority.
C. Eligible facilities for review under this section include nonsubstantial changes to the physical dimensions of the base structure or tower, involving (a) colocation of new transmission equipment; (b) removal of transmission equipment; or (c) replacement of transmission structure.
D. Within the applicable time frame for review set forth in AMC 19.68.150, the city must approve the application unless it determines that the application involves a substantial change. If the city determines that the application involves a substantial change, the applicant must submit the appropriate permit application required, if any, under the requirements in AMC 19.68.100. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Application. A complete application for a wireless service facility permit or wireless conditional use permit must include the following information and materials on a form provided by the Director. Applications for small wireless facilities may be submitted in batches of applications, which may encompass up to five separate applications filed at the same time, each for one or more sites, or a single application covering up to five sites, unless the city agrees to a larger number based upon its capacity to review additional applications. For the purposes of this section, a complete application includes:
1. The name and address of the applicant.
2. Identification of all carriers using the facility.
3. If the applicant is not the owner or person in control of the eligible support structure or site, an attestation that the owner or person in control of the eligible support structure and/or site has consented to the proposed facility modification. If the eligible support structure is to be located within a public right-of-way, the applicant must also attest that the applicant has authorization to install, maintain, and operate transmission equipment in, under and above the public right-of-way.
4. An attestation that the permittee will comply with existing structural, electrical, and safety codes, and a description of the general structural capacity of the new small wireless facility or the facility upon which the small wireless facility is to be colocated.
5. A description of compliance with the applicable visibility and performance standards set forth in AMC 19.68.200. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. A scaled site plan clearly indicating the location, type and height of the proposed facility, or colocation, on-site land uses and zoning, adjacent land uses and zoning, comprehensive plan classification of the site, proposed means of access, setbacks from property lines, spacing between tower(s) and other wireless facilities, elevation drawings of the proposed tower and any other structures, topography of the site, and proposed parking;
b. If the proposed small wireless facility siting involves a colocation that will alter the exterior dimensions or appearance of an existing facility, applicant shall include a detailed visual simulation depicting how the existing facility will appear after the proposed modification is complete, and particularly, how concealment or stealth will be extended, if applicable. The visual simulation shall depict to scale the existing facility with any colocation in relation to the trees, landscaping and other structures adjacent to, or in the immediate vicinity of, the eligible support structure;
c. Legal description of the parent tract and leased parcel (if applicable);
d. If new equipment cabinets, generators, or any other ground equipment components are being proposed:
i. An assessment of noise that shows compliance with city and/or federal noise standards;
ii. A description of the method of concealment of equipment components, such as: whether such components will be located within an existing building, within an architecturally compatible addition to an existing building, or within a new building which is architecturally compatible with other buildings on the site and adjoining properties; located underground; or within an equipment cabinet or shelter;
iii. If equipment is proposed to be concealed within an equipment cabinet or shelter that will be located aboveground, a description of the landscaping and screening, if technically feasible;
e. Any engineering report(s) required to show feasibility of meeting the applicable criteria in this section as applicable.
6. A stamped report by a state of Washington registered professional engineer or an assessment demonstrating compliance with federal radio-frequency emissions standards applicable to wireless facilities.
B. Waiver of Submittal Requirement. The approval authority may waive any submittal requirement upon determination that the required submittal, or part thereof, would materially inhibit wireless service. A waiver, to be effective, must be in writing and signed by the approval authority.
C. Fee. Every application for a small wireless service facility permit or wireless conditional use permit must be accompanied by an application fee, which will be set by the City Council in its unified fee schedule, to reimburse the city for the costs of reviewing the application, including any third-party review required by the city, and fees equal to a reasonable approximation of the objectively reasonable costs for the attachment to or use of property owned or controlled by the city. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Application. A complete application for a wireless service facility permit or wireless conditional use permit for wireless facilities other than small wireless facilities and eligible support structures or EFRs must include the following information and materials on a form provided by the Director. For the purposes of this section, a complete application includes:
1. The name and address of the applicant.
2. Identification of all carriers using the facility.
3. If the applicant is not the owner or person in control of the eligible support structure or site, an attestation that the owner or person in control of the eligible support structure and/or site has consented to the proposed facility modification. If the eligible support structure is to be located within a public right-of-way, the applicant must also attest that the applicant has authorization to install, maintain, and operate transmission equipment in, under and above the public right-of-way.
4. A description of compliance with the applicable visibility and performance standards set forth in AMC 19.68.200. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. A scaled site plan clearly indicating the location, type and height of the proposed facility, or colocation, on-site land uses and zoning, adjacent land uses and zoning, comprehensive plan classification of the site, proposed means of access, setbacks from property lines, spacing between tower(s) and other structures, elevation drawings of the proposed tower and any other structures, topography of the site, and proposed parking;
b. Legal description of the parent tract and leased parcel;
d. Method of fencing, the finished color and/or the method of camouflage and illumination.
5. A description of compliance with the additional requirements in this chapter for colocating and/or for conditional uses, if applicable.
6. If new equipment cabinets, generators, or any other ground equipment components are being proposed: (a) an assessment of noise that shows compliance with city and/or federal noise standards.
7. A stamped report by a state of Washington registered professional engineer demonstrating compliance with radio-frequency emissions standards as set forth in AMC 19.68.240.
B. New Facilities. In addition to the application materials delineated in subsection A of this section, an application for a new wireless facility must provide:
1. A notarized statement by the applicant as to whether construction of a new facility will accommodate colocating of additional antennas for future users.
2. An explanation of how the proposed new facility at the proposed location is necessary to do one of the following: fill a significant gap in service, to introduce new services, to densify a network, or to otherwise improve service capabilities.
3. A description of the suitability of the use of existing facilities, including towers or other structures to provide the services to be provided through the use of the proposed new facility.
4. Any other engineering report(s) required to show feasibility of meeting the applicable criteria in subsections A and/or B of this section as applicable;
C. Third-Party Review. The city may require the applicant to submit its materials to a third party for review, as may be reasonably necessary to determine compliance with this chapter, such as an engineer or architect, by way of example only.
D. Fee. Every application for a wireless service facility permit or wireless conditional use permit must be accompanied by an application fee, which will be set by the City Council in its unified fee schedule, to reimburse the city for the costs of reviewing the application, including any third-party review required by the city, and fees equal to a reasonable approximation of the objectively reasonable costs for the attachment to or use of property owned or controlled by the city. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Wireless Service Facility Permit (WSF). The review process for wireless service facility permit applications is that for a Type 1 (Administrative Ministerial Action) as delineated in Table 19.20.030-1.
B. Wireless Conditional Use Permit (WCUP). The review process for wireless conditional use permit applications is that for a Type 3-HE review, delineated in Table 19.20.030-1. The criteria for a conditional use permit as set forth in AMC Chapter 19.36 do not apply.
C. The only applicable sections of AMC Chapter 19.20 for the purposes of this chapter are AMC 19.20.140 (Application—Notice), 19.20.150 (Application—Department review), 19.20.160 (Public hearings and meetings), 19.20.170 (Public hearing—Notice), and 19.20.190 (Decision—Notice). The appeal section in this chapter supersedes the appeal sections in AMC Chapter 19.20.
D. This permit approval process does not apply to eligible facility requests. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. In evaluating a permit application under this chapter, the decision-maker must examine the following criteria:
1. Whether all requisite licenses, certificates, and authorizations from applicable federal, state, and local agencies have been obtained by the applicant;
2. Whether the applicant has shown that its proposed facility or colocation meets the standards and criteria set forth in this chapter, including the visibility and performance criteria set forth in AMC 19.68.200;
3. Whether the applicant has shown that its proposed facility meets any additional requirements in this chapter for colocating and/or wireless conditional uses, if applicable.
B. For a new wireless facility or a new small wireless facility, whether it is necessary to introduce new services, to densify a network, or to otherwise improve service capabilities.
C. Decision. After considering all information submitted, and the record on file and from any hearing, the decision-maker will decide whether to grant, deny, or grant the permit with conditions, and must issue a written decision containing findings of fact supported by substantial evidence, based on the criteria above.
D. Issued Permit. Any wireless service facility permit that is issued under this chapter must contain the location, nature, and extent of approved use, together with all conditions that are imposed. A copy of the permit will be kept on file and reviewed annually by the administering city official. If, at any time, the use no longer complies with the stated conditions, the owner will be declared in violation of this chapter. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. In addition to the general criteria for approval uses set forth in this chapter, the following criteria apply to all permits denominated as conditional uses:
1. The applicant must demonstrate that visual, noise, and other impacts associated with the proposed facility have been minimized to the maximum extent possible using existing concealment technology, site design, noise abatement techniques, concealment, disguise, camouflage, and/or the use of architecturally compatible improvements to existing structures where permitted, and/or underground placement of ancillary equipment. In evaluating the site design, consideration will be given to whether the facility will blend into the surrounding topography, tree coverage, foliage, and other natural features and whether locating the facility in alternative locations upon the subject property, or reasonably available properties, would better conceal the facility through use of existing natural and built features;
2. The applicant must demonstrate compatibility of the proposed structure with the height and mass of existing buildings and structures in the area;
3. The applicant must demonstrate that the design of the proposed facility complies with the purpose and intent of this chapter, including, but not limited to, the visibility and performance standards set forth in AMC 19.68.200 which most closely match the proposed facility;
4. The applicant must demonstrate that alternative locations, including other colocations and alternative support structures, are not available for the proposed facility;
5. The applicant must demonstrate that the proposed facility is not in conflict with the health and safety of the community;
6. The applicant must demonstrate that the proposed facility will be supported by adequate public facilities or services and will not adversely affect public services to the surrounding area or conditions can be established to mitigate adverse impacts on such facilities.
B. In evaluating any proposed wireless service facility denominated as a conditional use, the Director may, at the expense of the applicant, retain an outside consultant to review the technical, design and other materials submitted by the applicant in conjunction with the proposal. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Completeness Review. Applications must be reviewed for completeness within 30 days of receipt, except for applications to site small wireless facilities, which must be reviewed for completeness within 10 days of receipt. If the application is not reviewed for completeness within the applicable time frame, it will be deemed complete.
B. Tolling. For applications to site small wireless facilities, the review period resets once an applicant submits its additional materials. For all other applications deemed incomplete, the review period is tolled for up to 60 days. Once an applicant submits additional materials, the review time frame begins to run again. If the applicant does not submit the required materials, the city may deny the application.
C. Submittal of Additional Materials. If an applicant submits additional materials, the Director must provide notice within 10 days as to any additional materials identified in the original notice that were not provided with the supplemental materials. Second or subsequent notices of incompleteness may not specify missing documents or information that was not delineated in the original notice of incompleteness. For second or subsequent notices of incompleteness, the review time frame will be tolled for all applications including for siting small wireless facilities. If the applicant does not submit the required materials, the city may deny the application.
D. Failure to Act. If the decision-maker fails to approve or deny a request seeking approval for either a wireless service facility permit or wireless conditional use permit within the applicable time frame for review, accounting for any tolling, the request is deemed granted. The deemed grant does not become effective until the applicant notifies the applicable reviewing authority in writing after the review period has expired that the application has been deemed granted. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
The time frame for review of an application for a wireless facility permit or wireless conditional use permit begins to run when an application is submitted, not when the application is deemed complete.
Modifications that Are Not Substantial | Colocating Wireless Facilities | New Wireless Facility | Colocating Small Wireless Facilities | New Small Wireless Facility | |
Time Frame | Approval required within 60 days from receipt of submission of application. | Written decision due within 90 days from submission of application. | Written decision due within 150 days from submission of application. | Written decision due within 60 days from submission of application. | Written decision due within 90 days from submission of application. |
Notes | If the city finds that the application involves a substantial change, the city may process the application as one for a new facility or deny the application. | This provision does not apply to small wireless facilities. | This provision does not apply to small wireless facilities. |
(Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Construction within Two Years. Construction or substantial progress toward construction of a facility for which a permit has been issued pursuant to this chapter must be undertaken within two years after approval of the permit. Substantial progress toward construction includes, but is not limited to, the letting of bids, making of contracts, and purchase of materials involved in development.
B. Tolling. In determining whether the two-year period has run, time during which litigation has been pending related to the construction of the facility must not be included.
C. Extension and Termination. The city may, at its discretion, extend the two-year period for a reasonable time, based on factors including the inability to expeditiously obtain other required governmental permits prior to the commencement of construction. If a facility for which a permit has been granted has not been completed within three years after the approval of a permit, the city must review the permit upon the expiration of three years, and upon a showing of good cause for the delay, either (1) extend the permit for one year; or (2) terminate the permit. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
Appeals may be commenced on an action by the decision-maker on a permit application, within 30 days of such act or failure to act, in any court of competent jurisdiction. This section supersedes the city’s administrative appeal process set forth in AMC 19.20.210. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Lattice and guyed wire towers are not permitted in any zoning district.
B. Commercial advertising, including billboards and business identification signs, may not be used as alternative antenna support structures. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
New wireless service facilities, which include new small wireless facilities, are permitted as follows, with the type of permit indicated. For those facilities located within a right-of-way, a master permit and construction permit for such use is required under the provisions of AMC Chapter 5.38. The zones referred to below are defined in the city’s general zoning code.
Type of Facility | Residential Zones (R1, R2, R2A, R3, R3A, R4, R4A, OT) | Mixed Use Zones (CBD, C, MMU, CM, CM2, P) | Industrial Zones (LM, LM1, MS, HM, I, AZ) |
Monopole | Permitted with WCUP | Permitted with WSF, except permitted with WCUP in P and except not permitted in CBD | Permitted with WSF |
Utility Poles | Permitted with WCUP | Permitted with WSF, except permitted with WCUP in P, and except not permitted in CBD | Permitted with WSF |
Electric Transmission Towers | Permitted with WSF, except permitted with WCUP in OT | Permitted with WSF, except permitted with WCUP in P and except not permitted in CBD | Permitted with WSF |
Water Tank Mounted | Permitted with WSF, except permitted with WCUP in OT | Permitted with WSF | Permitted with WSF |
Playfield, Ball Field and Stadium Light Mounted Facilities | Permitted with WCUP | Permitted with WSF | Permitted with WSF |
Building Attached | Permitted with WSF, only on buildings with nonresidential uses, and except permitted with WCUP in OT | Permitted with WSF | Permitted with WSF |
Stealth Support Structure | Permitted with WSF, except permitted with WCUP in OT | Permitted with WSF, except permitted with WCUP in P | Permitted with WSF |
Small Wireless Facility on an Existing or Replacement Structure | Permitted with WSF | Permitted with WSF | Permitted with WSF |
Other Types Not Listed | Permitted with WCUP | Permitted with WCUP | Permitted with WCUP |
(Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
All wireless service facilities locating within Anacortes must comply with the following standards:
A. Standards for all types of facilities:
General | 1. All portions of the facility must be the minimum size necessary to support operation of the facility, as certified by the provider’s licensed engineer. Where multiple facilities are proposed to be located in close proximity, they may be required to be consolidated in one equipment housing structure. 2. Owners and operators must provide information regarding the opportunity for the colocation of facilities. Provision for future colocation may be required if technically feasible and where opportunities for smaller facilities with fewer impacts are limited due to topography, lack of existing aboveground structures or other circumstances. |
Antennas (including small wireless facilities) | 1. In general, an antenna array must either be flush mounted within 12 inches of the support structure, or within 12 inches of the face of the building it is attached to; or be contained in a canister that is a continuation of the support structure and is centered on top of the support structure; or be placed pursuant to the city’s adopted design standards, subject to the concealment requirements below. 2. All antennas or arrays must be a color and material that matches the support structure. 3. Roof-mounted installation is permitted when the city’s adopted design and the Appearance and Screening requirements below have been met. The antennas, mounting brackets and any concealment structures are exempt from the height limit of the underlying zone to the extent that the total height of such facilities does not increase the overall building height by 18 feet, or 50 percent of the original building height, whichever is less. |
Equipment Cabinets, Shelters, and Undergrounding | 1. All equipment necessary for the operation of the facility must be concealed, either within an existing building, within an architecturally compatible addition to an existing building, or within a new building which is architecturally compatible with other buildings on the site and adjoining properties; or located underground with exceptions as stated in AMC Chapter 19.59, and excepting equipment cabinets and shelters, which may be located aboveground, and landscaped and screened pursuant to the city’s typical landscaping requirements. 2. This section does not apply to antennas or other facilities that are required to remain aboveground in order to be functional, or if it would otherwise materially inhibit wireless service. 3. Underground shelters are not allowed where such shelters would interfere with existing uses of public land including, but not limited to, public rights-of-way. Equipment enclosures less than or equal to five cubic feet, with no single dimension over three feet, may be mounted directly on a monopole or utility pole. These dimension limitations do not apply to small wireless facilities. 4. Equipment cabinets and shelters are permitted upon abutting private property and may be located within public rights-of-way, pursuant to the applicable requirements and obtaining the appropriate permits specified in AMC Chapter 5.38. 5. The size of equipment cabinets and shelters must be minimized to the greatest extent possible. 6. Prefabricated concrete and metal structures for equipment enclosures are not permitted unless treated with a facade giving the appearance of masonry or wood siding and are compatible with the existing neighborhood and surrounding setting. |
Appearance and Screening | The following standards must be met to ensure the facility minimizes its visual impact: 1. Design and configurations must be compatible with the existing neighborhood, blend in with the surrounding setting, and/or be screened from surrounding uses and properties. 2. Design and configurations must minimize visual intrusion of the facility on surrounding uses and properties. Such techniques may include, for example: containing transmission and power cables and other conduit within any support structure, locating facilities underground, or otherwise screening the facility; minimizing the lateral projection of antenna arrays to the greatest extent technically feasible; and integrating antenna arrays into the design of any structure to which they are attached. 3. Facilities on private property must be screened through the use of mature trees that are a minimum of 20 feet tall and planted to screen at least 80 percent of the area around the facility, if technically feasible. 4. For stealth supported structures, the structure must be designed to resemble an object that would be commonly found in the area, including, but not limited to, a flagpole, a clock or bell tower, a tree that is a native conifer species, or a silo. Antennas, to the maximum extent feasible, must be concealed by the stealth support structure, or must not be easily recognized. To determine feasibility, the applicant must submit an engineer’s report regarding the feasibility of concealing the antennas. |
Noise | Noise reduction measures must comply with the city and/or federal noise regulations, whichever demonstrates the least amount of noise impact for the nearest residential dwelling(s) at any time of day or night, as measured from the closest point from the exterior of the dwelling to the wireless facility. Such requirements are exempt during testing of alternative power sources (i.e., power generators or similar emergency power sources). |
1. Facilities and/or equipment cabinets must be surrounded with a minimum of four-feet-wide landscaping, in the applicable zones set forth in the city’s general zoning provisions, if technically feasible. 2. Towers must be landscaped with a buffer of plant materials that effectively screen the view of the tower compound from properties used for residences, if technically feasible. In some cases, natural growth around the property perimeter may provide a sufficient buffer. 3. Existing mature tree growth and natural land forms on the site must be preserved to the maximum extent possible. | |
1. In residential zones, towers, antennas, monopoles, and other wireless facilities and equipment pertaining thereto must not be closer than the greater of 20 feet or 100 percent of the tower height from the adjoining lot line. 2. In nonresidential zones, facilities must comply with the setback requirements set forth in the applicable zoning code, AMC Title 17, and meet or exceed the city or federal noise regulations, whichever demonstrates the least amount of noise impact for the nearest residential dwelling(s), as measured from the closest point from the exterior of the dwelling to the facility. 3. The setback may be reduced if the applicant uses noise abatement techniques, such as decorative noise walls, to achieve equivalent or greater reduction of visual and noise impacts from the facility. 4. For colocations, new equipment associated with the facility must be placed no closer to existing residential uses than any existing equipment enclosure on the subject property. 5. These setback requirements do not apply to SWFs in the ROW. | |
Spacing | 1. In residential zones, towers and their antennas must not be closer than 200 feet or 100 percent of the tower height from the nearest residential dwelling(s), as measured from the closest point from the exterior of the dwelling to the facility. 2. In nonresidential zones, there are no spacing requirements. 3. The minimum spacing requirements herein will not apply if they have the effect of materially inhibiting wireless service. |
B. Standards for specific types of facilities:
New Monopoles (including small wireless facilities) and Stealth Wireless Support Structures | Any wireless service provider that proposes to construct a new monopole or stealth supported facility must provide, as part of its permit application, written findings from a qualified engineer which demonstrate that: 1. Either there are no other facilities reasonably available for colocation; or 2. Any existing facilities reasonably available are not technologically suitable for use by the applicant; and 3. The proposed monopole has been designed in a manner that will allow for the colocation of at least one additional antenna array on the structure, if technically feasible. 4. The height of the monopole may not exceed 120 feet or the height of similar structures permitted in the zone within which it is located, whichever is greater. |
Colocating Monopoles or Utility Poles within Public Rights-of-Way | 1. More than one facility may be colocated on any monopole, subject to the permits and technical feasibility. 2. Monopoles located within public rights-of-way must be located a minimum of 500 feet apart; a shorter distance may be approved if the applicant submits an engineering analysis and equipment specifications that demonstrate the reduced distance is necessary to provide adequate coverage and/or capacity. 3. Where a utility located upon a monopole requires vertical separation between its facilities and the antenna(s), the structure/pole and antenna may be raised or replaced with a taller structure to accommodate the minimum separation requirement, not to exceed 20 feet in the public right-of-way. Any additions must be constructed of similar materials, and have surface treatments which match the color and texture of the original facility. |
Electric Transmission Towers or Utility Poles Outside Public Rights-of-Way | Where a utility located upon the support structure (such as an electric transmission tower) requires vertical separation between its facilities and the antenna(s), the structure/pole and antenna may be raised by a mount or replaced with a taller structure to accommodate the minimum separation requirement, not to exceed 30 feet. Any additions must be constructed of similar materials, and have surface treatments which match the color and texture of the original facility. |
Playfield, Ball Field and Stadium Light Mounted Facilities | Only one facility is permitted on any playfield, ball field, or stadium light. Where lighted signs and illuminated areas are permitted, such illuminating devices must be shaded and directed so as not to be visible from any residentially zoned property. |
Building Attached | The equipment for roof-mounted antennas within the OT zone must be located within the same building on which the antennas are located. This provision will not apply to small wireless facilities if it has the effect of materially inhibiting the provision of service. |
(Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. All wireless facilities colocating within the city of Anacortes must meet the following standards. This section does not apply to eligible facilities requests.
B. Colocations (as defined in AMC 19.68.030(C)) are permitted on existing monopoles and stealth support structure facilities, so long as the colocation maintains the appearance of the existing structure, and does not interfere with the city’s placement of cameras or other public safety uses.
C. The height of the existing facility may be increased by the minimum vertical separation necessary between the facilities, not to exceed 20 feet, except for towers and utility poles outside public rights-of-way, the height of which may be increased by up to 30 feet to accommodate the minimum separation requirement. The height of the existing facility with all increases in height due to colocations may not exceed the general height limitation for similar structures or buildings within the zone in which it is permitted or 120 feet, whichever is greater.
D. Existing monopoles and antenna support structures may be replaced to accommodate colocation. Monopoles and stealth support structures must, to the maximum extent feasible, be located within 20 feet of the existing structure within the public right-of-way, or within 30 feet of the existing structure outside of the public right-of-way, and maintain the design of the original structure, including any stealth or camouflage components. To determine feasibility, the applicant must submit an engineer’s report regarding the feasibility of a proposed replacement.
E. All antenna support structures permitted pursuant to the terms of this chapter or otherwise located within the city of Anacortes must be made available for use by the owner or initial user thereof, together with as many other wireless service providers as can be technically colocated thereon. The owner of an antenna support structure may charge a reasonable fee for the colocation of additional facilities upon said structure which does not exceed the fair market value for the space occupied by said colocated facilities. If the city is the owner, it may not charge a fee that exceeds a reasonable approximation of the objectively reasonable costs associated with siting a small wireless facility on the antenna support structure.
F. Colocating facilities must meet all other visibility and performance standards in AMC 19.68.200. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
All modifications to wireless service facilities to the existing facility, including small wireless facilities, that are nonsubstantial must comply with the following standards:
A. No modification may violate the city or federal noise regulations.
B. No modification may violate the federal radio-frequency emission standards.
C. No modification may violate setback or other lot coverage or height requirements in this chapter. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
The owner and/or operator of all wireless service facilities must maintain their facilities in a good and safe condition and in a manner which complies with all applicable federal, state, and local requirements. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. All wireless service facilities must comply with applicable Federal Communications Commission (FCC) regulations regarding radio-frequency emissions. All tests must be performed by or under the supervision of a professional engineer competent to perform such testing and interpret the data gathered.
B. Reports or similar support documents must be submitted for all facilities confirming compliance with all applicable FCC regulations. Compliance reports are required when requested by the Director.
C. If at any time radio-frequency emission tests show that a facility exceeds any of the standards established by the FCC, the owner or operator thereof must immediately discontinue use of the facility and notify the Director. Use of such facilities may not resume until the owner or operator demonstrates that corrections have been completed which reduce the radio-frequency emissions to levels permitted by the FCC. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. The owner or operator of a wireless service facility must conduct tests necessary to demonstrate compliance with all applicable local regulations regarding the noise emissions of the facility when notified in writing by the Director that a noise complaint has been received regarding the facility. All such tests must be performed by or under the supervision of a licensed environmental noise consultant competent to perform such tests and interpret the data gathered.
B. When such a report is required, a report, certified by a licensed environmental noise consultant, setting forth the observed noise levels at the property line of the property upon which the facility is located must be submitted. The report must account for background noise and other noise sources and demonstrate the noise levels emitted by the facility, including any air conditioning or ventilation equipment contained therein. Such report must address standards set forth within noise reduction measures within noise provisions in AMC 19.69.020 or the standards set forth with the Federal Interagency Committee on Urban Noise, whichever demonstrates the least amount of noise impact for the nearest residential dwelling(s), at any time of day or night, as measured from the closest point from the exterior of the dwelling to the wireless facility.
C. The Director may retain a technical expert in environmental noise measurement to verify the noise measurements and certification. The cost of such a technical expert must be borne by the owner or operator of the facility, if said facility fails to comply with applicable state or local noise standards.
D. This section does not apply during the testing of alternative power sources (i.e., power generators). (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
All wireless service facilities must be protected from unauthorized entry. The perimeter of all wireless service facilities, other than small wireless facilities in the ROW which include an antenna support structure must be secured with security fencing which does not exceed seven feet in height. Wireless service facilities that do not include an antenna support structure must be protected from unauthorized entry through appropriate means approved by the Director or his or her designee on a case-by-case basis consistent with the purpose of protecting the public health, safety, and welfare. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
Any antenna support structure that has had no antennas mounted upon it for a period of six months, or if the antennas mounted thereon are not operated for a period of six months, will be considered abandoned, and the owner thereof must remove such structure and any accompanying equipment and enclosure within 90 days after receipt of a notice from the Director to do so. The Director may extend this time period to a maximum of six additional months. The owner or operator of all wireless service facilities must, when requested by the Director, submit a written report, signed under penalty of perjury, which demonstrates whether or not there has been a cessation in use of the facility for a period of six months during the prior year. If a facility and associated equipment are not removed within 90 days after receipt of a notice from the Hearing Examiner requiring said removal, the Hearing Examiner may seek and obtain a court order directing such removal and imposing a lien upon the real property upon which such wireless service facility is situated in an amount equal to the cost of removal. In the event that more than one wireless service provider is using the antenna support structure, the antenna support structure will not be considered abandoned until all such users cease using the structure as provided in this section. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Except as approved as part of a plan to conceal, disguise, or camouflage a wireless service facility, no signs, symbols, flags, banners, or similar devices must be placed on, attached to, painted, or inscribed upon any antenna support structure or alternative antenna support structure. Notwithstanding the foregoing, an applicant and/or landowner may place not more than four signs measuring 12 by 18 inches upon or near a wireless service facility which:
1. State that trespassers will be prosecuted;
2. List the names and telephone numbers of persons to be contacted in the event of an emergency;
3. Identify the applicant and/or landowner or person responsible for operating the wireless facility; and/or
4. Contain information necessary and convenient for the person operating the wireless service facility to identify the wireless service facility.
B. Nothing in this section may be construed to prohibit the placement of safety or warning signs upon any portion of the wireless service facility which are required by law or which are designed to apprise emergency response personnel and the employees and agents of wireless service providers of particular hazards associated with equipment located upon the wireless service facility. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
Except as specifically required by Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) or FCC regulations, antenna support structures cannot be illuminated. However, equipment enclosures may be illuminated for security reasons when compatible with the surrounding neighborhood. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
Integration of Environmental Review. An application for a wireless service facility permit or wireless conditional use permit that is subject to the State Environmental Policy Act (SEPA) must be reviewed per AMC Chapter 18.04 concurrently with the review of the permit reviewed under this chapter, except where exempted by that chapter. If there is a conflict between this chapter and development regulations in other chapters, the provisions of this chapter will apply. (Ord. 3038 § 3, 2019)
A. Provide clear standards for development projects in Anacortes.
B. Preserve and protect the public health, safety, and welfare of the citizens of Anacortes.
C. Promote and accomplish the goals, policies, and objectives of the Anacortes comprehensive plan. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Noise levels are not to exceed those standards as established by the state pursuant to Chapter 70.107 RCW, and contained in Chapter 173-60 Washington Administrative Code (WAC).
B. The following sections of Chapter 173-60 of the Washington Administrative Code as they now exist or may hereafter be amended or recodified are hereby adopted by reference as a part of the Anacortes Municipal Code which is established in all respects as though such sections were set forth herein in full; and further provided, the inclusion of section captions is for convenience in identifying the subject of code sections only, and any error therein must not affect the validity of the adoption by reference of the section so adopted:
WAC
173-60-010, Authority and purpose.
173-60-020, Definitions.
173-60-030, Identification of environments.
173-60-040, Maximum permissible environmental noise levels.
173-60-050, Exemptions.
173-60-060, Nuisance regulations not prohibited.
173-60-070, Reserved.
173-60-080, Variances and implementation schedules.
173-60-090, Enforcement policy.
173-60-100, Appeals.
173-60-110, Cooperation with local government.
173-60-120, Effective date. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
The following types of air pollutants must be subject to the provisions of applicable Northwest Clean Air Agency regulations, regulating:
A. Smoke and gas.
B. Dust, dirt, or fly ash.
C. Noxious and odorous matter.
D. Other pollutants that may subsequently be added by state law. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. Exterior lighting in all zones must be installed so that the light is directed downward onto the property upon which it is located. All light sources must be shielded to direct light away from the sky and from residential uses. See Figure 19.69.040 for an illustration of appropriate light shielding.
Figure 19.69.040
Appropriate light shielding.
![]() |
B. Exterior lighting is encouraged to follow the color, temperature, timing, intensity, technology, and other recommendations of the International Dark Sky Association and the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Any operation producing intense glare or heat must be performed within an enclosure so as to completely obscure such operation from view from adjacent residential property. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
Uses, processes, equipment employed, and goods stored or sold must not inflict upon neighboring zones smoke, cinders, fumes, dirt, noise, vibrations, odor, refuse matter, water-carried waste, or other nuisances or hazards detrimental to the health, welfare, and safety of persons occupying or visiting the zone or adjacent zones above that which is allowed by local, state, and federal standards. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)
A. A clear-vision triangle must be maintained at the intersections of streets, alleys, and commercial driveways, with the following requirements:
1. A clear-vision triangle must contain no plantings, fences, walls, other structures, or visual obstructions within a vertical area extending from three to eight feet above the ground, measured from the established centerline of the street, alley or driveway.
2. The clear-vision triangle is determined by one of the following methods:
a. Measuring 15 feet along both street property lines beginning at their point of intersection. The third side of the triangle is a line connecting the endpoints of the first two sides of the triangle; or
b. Measuring 15 feet along the street lines and 15 feet along the edges of the driveway beginning at the respective points of intersection. The third side of each triangle is a line connecting the endpoints of the first two sides of each triangle.
3. Subsection (A)(1) of this section does not apply to:
a. A tree trimmed to the trunk within the three- to eight-foot clear area.
b. Other plant species that are so planted and trimmed as to leave a clear and unobstructed cross-view in all seasons.
c. A supporting member or appurtenance to a permanent building lawfully existing on the site.
B. Exemptions. A clear-vision triangle is not required where maximum building setbacks would otherwise conflict with this section (see AMC Chapter 19.61, Block Frontage Standards).
C. At the discretion of the City Engineer, additional clear-vision areas may be required to meet transportation safety requirements. (Ord. 3040 § 2 (Att. A), 2019)